Konica Minolta Documentation - Guides - Manuels Utilisateur - Konica Minolta Revenir à l'accueil Voir une liste d'imprimantes Vous souhaitez un imprimante ou un photocopieur Konica, contactez nous

 

 

 

 

Résultats recherche : 1 - 50 de 266 

Produit Sous-catégorie Langue Titre Version Date de sortie Lien
7823 Guide d’utilisation Français Konica 7823 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-03-16
7823 Abrégé d'utilisation Français Konica 7823 Quick Guide 1.1.1 2004-03-16
7915 Abrégé d'utilisation Français Konica 7915/7920 Short Guide 1.1.1 2004-05-10
7920 Abrégé d'utilisation Français Konica 7915/7920 Short Guide 1.1.1 2004-05-10
8020 Guide d’utilisation Français Konica 8020/8031 Advanced Informations 7.1.1 2004-03-09
8020 Guide d’utilisation Français URG 8020/8031 Guide de l´utilisateur 7.1.1 2004-09-08
8031 Guide d’utilisation Français Konica 8020/8031 Advanced Informations 7.1.1 2004-03-09
8031 Guide d’utilisation Français URG 8020/8031 Guide de l´utilisateur 7.1.1 2004-09-08
8050 Guide d’utilisation Français CN5001Pro 1.1.1 2003-12-12
8050 Guide d’utilisation Français CN5001Pro 1.1.1 2003-12-12
8050 Abrégé d'utilisation Français Konica 8050 Quick Guide 1.1.1 2004-09-08
8050 Guide d’utilisation Français IP-921 - Documents from EFI 1.0.0 2004-06-08
8050 Guide d’utilisation Français IP-921 - Release Notes 1.0.0 2004-04-22
8150 Guide d’utilisation Français CN5001Pro 1.1.1 2003-12-12
8150 Guide d’utilisation Français CN5001Pro 1.1.1 2003-12-12
8150 Guide d’utilisation Français IP-921 - Documents from EFI 1.0.0 2004-06-08
8150 Guide d’utilisation Français IP-921 - Release Notes 1.0.0 2004-04-22
bizhub C10 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C10 User Manuals 1.1.1 2007-08-03
bizhub C10 Guide d’utilisation Multi-Langues bizhub C10 Installation Guide and Safety Information 1.1.0 2007-08-03
bizhub C10P Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C10P User Manual 1.0.1 2007-03-01
bizhub C10P Guide d’installation Anglais bizhub C10P Installation Manual 1.0.0 2007-03-01
bizhub C20 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C20 User Guides 1.1.1 2008-10-28
bizhub C200 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C200 User Manuals 1-1-1 2008-07-07
bizhub C200 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C200 Phase2 User Manuals 1-1-1 Phase2 2009-02-23
bizhub C200 Abrégé d'utilisation Français bizhub C200 Phase2 Quick Guide 1-1-1 Phase2 2009-02-23
bizhub C203 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option) 1.1.1 2008-03-20
bizhub C203 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option) 1.1.1 2008-03-20
bizhub C203 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option2) 2.1.1 2008-07-07
bizhub C203 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C203/C253/C353 User Manual 2.1.1 2007-09-04
bizhub C203 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C203/C253/C353 User Manual 3.1.1 2007-09-04
bizhub C20P Guide d’utilisation Français Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05
bizhub C20P Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C20P User Manual 1.0.1 2008-04-17
bizhub C220 Abrégé d'utilisation Français bizhub C360/C280/C220 Quick Guide & Poster 3-2-1 2009-08-28
bizhub C220 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C360/C280/C220 User's Guides 3-2-1 2009-08-28
bizhub C224 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 User Guides (part 1/2) (French) 1-1-1 2012-06-04
bizhub C224 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 User Guides (part 2/2)(French) 1-1-1 2012-06-04
bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Français User's guides (French) 01 2011-03-14
bizhub C25 Abrégé d'utilisation Français Quick guide (French) 00 2011-03-14
bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Arabe Installation guide 00 2011-03-14
bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Turc Installation guide 00 2011-03-14
bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Suédois Installation guide 00 2011-03-14
bizhub C25 Guide d’installation slovaque Installation guide 00 2011-03-14
bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Russe Installation guide 00 2011-03-14
bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Polonais Installation guide 00 2011-03-14
bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Norvégien Installation guide 00 2011-03-14
bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Hongrois Installation guide 00 2011-03-14
bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Grec Installation guide 00 2011-03-14
bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Finnois Installation guide 00 2011-03-14
bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Hollandais Installation guide 00 2011-03-14
bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Danois Installation guide 00 2011-03-14

Résultats recherche : 1 - 50 de 266 

 

Résultats recherche :  51 - 100 de 266 

Produit Sous-catégorie Langue Titre Version Date de sortie Lien
bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Tchèque Installation guide 00 2011-03-14
bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Espagnol Installation guide 00 2011-03-14
bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Portugais Installation guide 00 2011-03-14
bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Italien Installation guide 00 2011-03-14
bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Français Installation guide 00 2011-03-14
bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Allemand Installation guide 00 2011-03-14
bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Anglais Installation guide 00 2011-03-14
bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Arabe Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14
bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Turc Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14
bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Suédois Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14
bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation slovaque Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14
bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Russe Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14
bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Polonais Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14
bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Norvégien Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14
bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Hongrois Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14
bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Grec Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14
bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Finnois Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14
bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Hollandais Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14
bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Danois Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14
bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Tchèque Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14
bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Coréen Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14
bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Simplified Chinese Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14
bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Traditional Chinese Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14
bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Espagnol Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14
bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Portugais Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14
bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Italien Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14
bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Français Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14
bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Allemand Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14
bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14
bizhub C250 Guide d’utilisation Français User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
bizhub C250 Guide d’utilisation Français Network Fax Operations 1.1.1 2006-08-22
bizhub C250 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C250 Phase3 User Manuals (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-11-01
bizhub C250P Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C250P User Manual 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-09-13
bizhub C252 Guide d’utilisation Français User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
bizhub C252 Guide d’utilisation Français Network Fax Operations 1.1.1 2006-08-22
bizhub C252 Guide d’utilisation Français User Manual bizhub C252 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
bizhub C252P Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C252P User Manual 1.1.1 2006-08-22
bizhub C253 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option) 1.1.1 2008-03-20
bizhub C253 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option) 1.1.1 2008-03-20
bizhub C253 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option2) 2.1.1 2008-07-07
bizhub C253 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C203/C253/C353 User Manual 2.1.1 2007-09-04
bizhub C253 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C203/C253/C353 User Manual 3.1.1 2007-09-04
bizhub C280 Abrégé d'utilisation Français bizhub C360/C280/C220 Quick Guide & Poster 3-2-1 2009-08-28
bizhub C280 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C360/C280/C220 User's Guides 3-2-1 2009-08-28
bizhub C284 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 User Guides (part 1/2) (French) 1-1-1 2012-06-04
bizhub C284 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 User Guides (part 2/2)(French) 1-1-1 2012-06-04
bizhub C300 Guide d’utilisation Français HDD Twain manual 1.0.1 2006-05-23
bizhub C300 Guide d’utilisation Français Real time mode Twain manual 1.0.1 2006-05-23
bizhub C300 Guide d’utilisation Français User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
bizhub C300 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C300 User Manuals (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-21

Résultats recherche :  51 - 100 de 266 

 

Résultats recherche :  101 - 150 de 266 

Produit Sous-catégorie Langue Titre Version Date de sortie Lien
bizhub C300 Guide d’utilisation Français Network Fax Operations 1.1.1 2006-08-22
bizhub C300 Guide d’utilisation Français IC-406, Manuals from EFI (same as IC-402, V.2) 1.1.1 2006-05-24
bizhub C30P Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C30P User Manual 1.0.1 2007-03-01
bizhub C30P Guide d’installation Anglais bizhub C30P Installation Manual 1.0.0 2007-03-01
bizhub C31P Guide d’utilisation Français Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05
bizhub C31P Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C31P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-03-28
bizhub C35 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C35 User's Guide 2-1-1 2010-06-16
bizhub C35 Abrégé d'utilisation Français bizhub C35 Quick Guide 2-1-2 2010-06-16
bizhub C35 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C35 French Short Guide 1-1-1 2010-07-14
bizhub C35 Guide d’utilisation Anglais bizhub C35 Reference Guide 1-1-0 2010-06-16
bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Arabe bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16
bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Turc bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16
bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Suédois bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16
bizhub C35 Guide d’installation slovaque bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16
bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Russe bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16
bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Polonais bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16
bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Norvégien bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16
bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Hongrois bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16
bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Grec bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16
bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Finnois bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16
bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Hollandais bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16
bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Danois bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16
bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Tchèque bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16
bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Coréen bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16
bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Simplified Chinese bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16
bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Traditional Chinese bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16
bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Espagnol bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16
bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Portugais bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16
bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Italien bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16
bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Français bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16
bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Allemand bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16
bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Anglais bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16
bizhub C35 Abrégé d'utilisation Français bizhub C35, Step 2, Quick Guide 3-2-1 2010-12-01
bizhub C350 Guide d’utilisation Français C350 Printer Controller User Manual 1.1.1 2004-05-21
bizhub C350 Guide d’utilisation Français C350 Advanced Information 1.1.1 2004-05-21
bizhub C350 Guide d’utilisation Français C350 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-02-09
bizhub C350 Guide d’utilisation Français C350 Printer Controller Advanced Information 1.1.1 2004-02-09
bizhub C351 Guide d’utilisation Français User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
bizhub C351 Guide d’utilisation Français Network Fax Operations 1.1.1 2006-08-22
bizhub C351 Guide d’utilisation Français User Manual bizhub C351 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-11-15
bizhub C352 Guide d’utilisation Français HDD Twain manual 1.0.1 2006-05-23
bizhub C352 Guide d’utilisation Français Real time mode Twain manual 1.0.1 2006-05-23
bizhub C352 Guide d’utilisation Français User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
bizhub C352 Guide d’utilisation Français User Manual bizhub C352 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
bizhub C352 Guide d’utilisation Français IC-406, Manuals from EFI (same as IC-402, V.2) 1.1.1 2006-05-24
bizhub C352P Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C352P User Manual 1.1.1 Phase3 2006-03-09
bizhub C353 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option) 1.1.1 2008-03-20
bizhub C353 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option) 1.1.1 2008-03-20
bizhub C353 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option2) 2.1.1 2008-07-07
bizhub C353 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C203/C253/C353 User Manual 2.1.1 2007-09-04

Résultats recherche :  101 - 150 de 266 

 

Résultats recherche :  151 - 200 de 266 

Produit Sous-catégorie Langue Titre Version Date de sortie Lien
bizhub C353 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C203/C253/C353 User Manual 3.1.1 2007-09-04
bizhub C353P Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C353P 1.1.1 2007-11-13
bizhub C35P Guide d’utilisation Tchèque User's guide 12 2010-06-29
bizhub C35P Guide d’utilisation Anglais bizhub C35P Reference Guide 00A 2010-02-02
bizhub C35P Guide d’utilisation Français User's Guide - Manuel Utilisateur (Fr) 12 2010-06-29
bizhub C360 Abrégé d'utilisation Français bizhub C360/C280/C220 Quick Guide & Poster 3-2-1 2009-08-28
bizhub C360 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C360/C280/C220 User's Guides 3-2-1 2009-08-28
bizhub C364 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 User Guides (part 1/2) (French) 1-1-1 2012-06-04
bizhub C364 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 User Guides (part 2/2)(French) 1-1-1 2012-06-04
bizhub C450 Guide d’utilisation Français User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
bizhub C450 Guide d’utilisation Français User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
bizhub C450P Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C450P User Manual 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-11-14
bizhub C451 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option) 1.1.1 2008-03-20
bizhub C451 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option) 1.1.1 2008-03-20
bizhub C451 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C451/C550/C650 User Manual 2.1.1 2007-02-27
bizhub C451 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option2) 2.1.1 2008-07-07
bizhub C451 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C451/C550/C650 FE2 User Manual 3.1.1 2007-02-27
bizhub C451 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C451/C550/C650 FE3 User Manual 4.1.1 2007-02-27
bizhub C452 Abrégé d'utilisation Français bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C452 Quick Guide and Poster 2-1-1 2009-09-11
bizhub C452 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C452 User Guides 2-1-1 2009-09-11
bizhub C454 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 User Guides (part 1/2) (French) 1-1-1 2012-06-04
bizhub C454 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 User Guides (part 2/2)(French) 1-1-1 2012-06-04
bizhub C550 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option) 1.1.1 2008-03-20
bizhub C550 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option) 1.1.1 2008-03-20
bizhub C550 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C451/C550/C650 User Manual 2.1.1 2007-02-27
bizhub C550 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option2) 2.1.1 2008-07-07
bizhub C550 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C451/C550/C650 FE2 User Manual 3.1.1 2007-02-27
bizhub C550 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C451/C550/C650 FE3 User Manual 4.1.1 2007-02-27
bizhub C552 Abrégé d'utilisation Français bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C452 Quick Guide and Poster 2-1-1 2009-09-11
bizhub C552 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C452 User Guides 2-1-1 2009-09-11
bizhub C552 Abrégé d'utilisation Français bizhub C652/C552 Quick Guide Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box 1-1-1 2009-02-18
bizhub C554 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 User Guides (part 1/2) (French) 1-1-1 2012-06-04
bizhub C554 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 User Guides (part 2/2)(French) 1-1-1 2012-06-04
bizhub C650 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option) 1.1.1 2008-03-20
bizhub C650 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option) 1.1.1 2008-03-20
bizhub C650 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C451/C550/C650 User Manual 2.1.1 2007-02-27
bizhub C650 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option2) 2.1.1 2008-07-07
bizhub C650 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C451/C550/C650 FE2 User Manual 3.1.1 2007-02-27
bizhub C650 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C451/C550/C650 FE3 User Manual 4.1.1 2007-02-27
bizhub C652 Abrégé d'utilisation Français bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C452 Quick Guide and Poster 2-1-1 2009-09-11
bizhub C652 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C452 User Guides 2-1-1 2009-09-11
bizhub C652 Abrégé d'utilisation Français bizhub C652/C552 Quick Guide Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box 1-1-1 2009-02-18
bizhub C652DS Abrégé d'utilisation Français bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C452 Quick Guide and Poster 2-1-1 2009-09-11
bizhub C652DS Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C452 User Guides 2-1-1 2009-09-11
bizhub C654 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C754/C654 User Guides (French) 1-1-1 2012-02-16
bizhub C754 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C754/C654 User Guides (French) 1-1-1 2012-02-16
bizhub PRESS C6000 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub-PRO-PRESS-C6000-C7000_ug_Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-09-23
bizhub PRESS C7000 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub-PRO-PRESS-C6000-C7000_ug_Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-09-23
bizhub PRESS C7000P Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub-PRO-PRESS-C6000-C7000_ug_Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-09-23
bizhub PRO C500 Guide d’utilisation Français CN5001Pro 1.1.1 2003-12-12

Résultats recherche :  151 - 200 de 266 

Résultats recherche :  201 - 250 de 266 

Produit Sous-catégorie Langue Titre Version Date de sortie Lien
bizhub PRO C500 Guide d’utilisation Français CN5001Pro 1.1.1 2003-12-12
bizhub PRO C500 Guide d’utilisation Français IP-921 - Documents from EFI 1.0.0 2004-06-08
bizhub PRO C500 Guide d’utilisation Français IP-921 - Release Notes 1.0.0 2004-04-22
bizhub PRO C500 Guide d’utilisation Français IC-405 (Manuals from EFI) 1.0 2006-06-19
bizhub PRO C500 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub PRO C500 1.1.1 2005-02-28
bizhub PRO C500 Guide d’utilisation Français IC-302 (Manuals from EFI) 1.0 2006-06-19
bizhub PRO C5500 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11
bizhub PRO C5500 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub PRO C5500, User manual 1.1.1 2007-06-29
bizhub PRO C5501 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11
bizhub PRO C5501 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub PRO C5501 1-1-1 2008-08-06
bizhub PRO C6500 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11
bizhub PRO C6500 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub PRO C6500/bizhub PRO C6500e - User Manual 111 2006-10-04
bizhub PRO C6500 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub PRO C6500/bizhub PRO C6500e, Phase 2.0 - User Manual 111 2006-10-04
bizhub PRO C6500 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub PRO C6500/bizhub PRO C6500e - User Manual 211 2006-10-04
bizhub PRO C6500 Guide d’utilisation Français IC-408 (Manuals from EFI) 100 2006-11-16
bizhub PRO C6500P Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11
bizhub PRO C6501 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11
bizhub PRO C6501 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub PRO C6501/C6501e 1-1-1 2008-06-23
bizhub PRO C6501e Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11
bizhub PRO C6501e Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub PRO C6501/C6501e 1-1-1 2008-06-23
bizhub PRO C6501P Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub PRO C6501eP User`s Guide 1-1-1 2008-07-29
bizhub PRO C65hc Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11
bizhub PRO C65hc Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub PRO C65hc 1.1.1 2008-12-10
CF1501 Guide d’utilisation Français PageScope Light Fiery Z5/X3e for CF1501/CF2001 1.1.1 2001-09-12
CF1501 Guide d’utilisation Français CF1501/CF2001 Ver1.0.1 2001-05-28
CF2001 Guide d’utilisation Français PageScope Light Fiery Z5/X3e for CF1501/CF2001 1.1.1 2001-09-12
CF2001 Guide d’utilisation Français CF1501/CF2001 Ver1.0.1 2001-05-28
CF2001P Guide d’utilisation Français CF2001P 1.0.1 2001-11-15
CF2001P Guide d’utilisation Français PageScope Light for CF2001P 1.1.1 2001-09-12
CF2002 Guide d’utilisation Français CF2002/CF3102 Utilisation Experte 7.1.1 2003-06-13
CF2002 Guide d’utilisation Français Available Features 1.1.1 2002-11-18
CF2002 Guide d’utilisation Français CF2002/CF3102 User Manual 7.1.1 2003-06-13
CF2002P Guide d’utilisation Français CF2002/3102 Printer 1.1.1 2003-02-18
CF3102 Guide d’utilisation Français CF2002/CF3102 Utilisation Experte 7.1.1 2003-06-13
CF3102 Guide d’utilisation Français Available Features 1.1.1 2002-11-18
CF3102 Guide d’utilisation Français CF2002/CF3102 User Manual 7.1.1 2003-06-13
CF3102P Guide d’utilisation Français CF2002/3102 Printer 1.1.1 2003-02-18
CF5001 Guide d’utilisation Français CF5001 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-01-01
CF9001 Guide d’utilisation Français CF9001 VER 1.0.1 2001-05-10
CF9001 Guide d’utilisation Français CF9001 VER 1.1.1 2001-05-10
CF9001 Abrégé d'utilisation Français CF9001 VER 1.0.0 2001-05-10
CF910 Guide d’utilisation Français CF910 VER 1.1.1 2001-05-10
CF911P Guide d’utilisation Français CF911P VER 1.0.1 2001-05-10
CS520 Guide d’utilisation Français CN5001Pro 1.1.1 2003-12-12
CS520 Guide d’utilisation Français CN5001Pro 1.1.1 2003-12-12
CS520 Guide d’utilisation Français IP-921 - Documents from EFI 1.0.0 2004-06-08
CS520 Guide d’utilisation Français IP-921 - Release Notes 1.0.0 2004-04-22
CS550 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11
CS655 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11
CS665 Pro Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11

Résultats recherche :  201 - 250 de 266 

Résultats recherche :  251 - 266 de 266

Produit Sous-catégorie Langue Titre Version Date de sortie Lien
IKON BusinessPro 550c Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11
IKON BusinessPro 650 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11
IKON BusinessPro 660c Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11
IKON CPP550 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11
IKON CPP560 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11
IKON CPP650 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11
ineo+ 5500 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11
ineo+ 5501 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11
ineo+ 6500 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11
LD-5100 Guide d’utilisation Français CN5001Pro 1.1.1 2003-12-12
LD-5100 Guide d’utilisation Français CN5001Pro 1.1.1 2003-12-12
LD-5100 Guide d’utilisation Français IP-921 - Documents from EFI 1.0.0 2004-06-08
LD-5100 Guide d’utilisation Français IP-921 - Release Notes 1.0.0 2004-04-22
LD-5501 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11
LD-6501 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11
Linium PRO C5500 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11

Résultats recherche :  251 - 266 de 266

 

 

 

 

Autre documentation Konica Minolta :

Konica-Minolta-Documentation-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-40P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C450-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C250-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-601-3-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-IC-408-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-362-282-222-Francais-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-601-2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-D191F-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-Ineo-7000-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Francais-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Francais-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-Ineo-951-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-Ineo-1052-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Ineo-25-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-163-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-ineo-253-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-282-Francais-documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Di2510-Di3010-Di3510-Advanced-Information-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C550-bizhub-C451-bizhub-C203-bizhub-C253-bizhub-C353-bizhub-C650-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C203-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-3730DN-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-PageScope-Account-Manager-Ver.2.1-User-s-Guide-EFIGS-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C554-C454-C364-C284-C224-User-Guides-part-1-2-French-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-162-210-copier-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-552-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-130f-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-PRO-PRESS-C6000-C7000_ug_Expert-Guide-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2400W-User-Documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-User-Manual-bizhub-C252-Phase3-complete-set-Documentation-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C200-Phase2-User-Manuals-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C200-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C10-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-163-211-User-Manual-Copier-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-1600f-User-Manual-Copier-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-131f-190f-User-Manual-Manuels

Konica-bizhub-131f-190f-Advanced-Information-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-190f-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C253-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C253-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option2-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Francais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-1690MF-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-362-282-222-Français-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Français-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Français-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C220-Anglais-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-36-Anglais-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Anglais-English-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Anglais-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Pays-Bas-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-283-Russe-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-222-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C203-C253-C353-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-601-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C452-bizhub-C552-bizhub-C652DS-bizhub-C652-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C554-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-652-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C224-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C652DS-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub_c652-c652ds-c552-c452-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-bizhub-C10P-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-bizhub-C10-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-7823-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C20-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C25-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2490MF-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-1600W-Manuel

Konica-Minolta-7823-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5670EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5650EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-7823-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450II-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-8650DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7300-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4750EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2490MF-Imprimante-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4750DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4690MF-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4695MF-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4650EN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4650DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2500W-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-3730DN-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5570-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5550-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5450-Couleur-Manuels

Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5440DL-Couleur-Manuels

 

http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=25461&productName=magicolor%202490MF http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=24593&productName=magicolor%202500W http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=45226&productName=magicolor%203730DN http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=31144&productName=magicolor%204650DN http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=31144&productName=magicolor%204650EN http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=48849&productName=magicolor%204690MF http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=48858&productName=magicolor%204695MF http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=41338&productName=magicolor%204750DN http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=25354&productName=magicolor%205450 http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=29872&productName=bizhub%20C10 http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0719195EN00&name=user.pdf http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/products/copier-print-systems/multifunctional-systems-black-and-white/bizhub-652/downloads/download-details.html?packageId=48057&productName=bizhub%20652 http://www.konicaminolta.fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement/download-details.html?packageId=25408&productName=bizhub%20C250 http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_scanner-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_box-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdfhttp://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_enlarge-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_print-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_copy-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=49761&productName=bizhub%20C25 http://www.konicaminolta.fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement/download-details.html?packageId=47425&productName=magicolor%201600W http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=22632&productName=bizhub%20C252 http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0610809EN00&name=bizhub_c252_um_scanner-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=26947&productName=Konica%20Minolta%20190f http://www.konicaminolta.fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement/download-details.html?packageId=21374&productName=bizhub%20210 http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0514130EN00&name=bizhub_162_210_UM_FR_1.1.1.pdf [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/about-konica-minolta.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/imprint.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/terms-of-use.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/conditions-dutilisation.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/identite.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/information-groupe.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/info-photo.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/cartouche-toner.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/copieur-couleur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/copieurs-couleur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/copieurs.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fax-copieur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fax-imprimante-copieur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fileadmin/content/fr/rss/flux.xml [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/about-konica-minolta.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/imprint.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/terms-of-use.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/accueil.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/certificats-et-labels.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/cycle-de-vie-eco-responsable.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/eco-fonctionnalites.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/eco-technologies.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/historique.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/ops-green.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/politique-environnementale.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/carrieres-et-emplois.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/contacts.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/jamais-deux-sans-trois-konica-minolta-est-elu-gamme-de-lannee-par-bli-pour-la-troisieme-ann.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/konica-minolta-parraine-la-9eme-edition-de-la-nuit-des-trophees-de-limprimerie-francaise.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/konica-minolta-stand-c05-profitera-du-salon-it-partners-qui-se-tiendra-les-5-et-6-fevrier-procha.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/la-4eme-edition-des-journees-du-bureau-eco-responsable-par-konica-minolta-business-solutions-fr.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/temoignage-copy-top-retour-sur-un-investissement-reussi.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/informations-sur-lentreprise.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/responsabilite-societale.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/conditions-dutilisation.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/gartner-magic-quadrant-2012.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/identite.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/information-groupe.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/applications.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/presses-numeriques.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/securite.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/systemes-dimpression-office.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/itraining.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/marches-verticaux.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/ops.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/ops.html/solutions-dentreprise/produits/conseils-et-services/la-prestation-de-consulting-idoc/audit-idoc.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/programme-dsp.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/services-informatiques.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/acces-reserve.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/cleanplanet.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/service-et-garantie.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimante-multifonction.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimante-photocopieur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-copieur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-laser-couleur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-multifonction.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-photocopieuse.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/info-photo.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/photocopieurs-konica-minolta.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/photocopieurs.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/presse-numerique.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/toner-photocopieur.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/fr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0111_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0117_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0204_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/research/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/com_message/project/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/contact/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/me/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/news/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/business.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/inkjethead.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/instruments.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/material.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/medical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/oled.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/optical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/planetarium.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/textileprinters.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-cn/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-fr/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/contact/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/document_download.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/domain.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/history.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/management.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/message.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/outline.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/symbol_logo.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/vision.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/csr/governance/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/fr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0111_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0117_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0204_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/research/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/com_message/project/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/contact/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/me/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/news/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/business.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/inkjethead.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/instruments.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/material.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/medical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/oled.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/optical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/planetarium.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/textileprinters.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-cn/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/domain.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/history.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/message.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/outline.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/vision.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/csr/csr/governance/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/csr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/siteinfo/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-fr/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/contact/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/document_download.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/domain.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/history.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/management.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/message.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/outline.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/symbol_logo.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/vision.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/csr/governance/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/fr/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0111_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0117_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0204_01_01.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/research/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific3/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/com_message/project/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/contact/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/me/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast1/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast2/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/news/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/business.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/inkjethead.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/instruments.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/material.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/medical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/oled.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/optical.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/planetarium.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/textileprinters.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/index.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/sitemap.html [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/01/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/02/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/03/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/04/ [+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/index.html Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link User`s Guide Dutch IC-206 for ineo 163/213 2.1.1 2007-06-07 Parts Guide Manual Italian ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-04-30 User`s Guide Hungarian ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) fk-506 for ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide English ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.0 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Russian ineo 163/213 - User Manual TWAIN driver 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide French ineo 163/213 - User Manual GDI-driver 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Russian ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Spanish ineo 163/213 - User Manual GDI-driver 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide German ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Italian IC-206 for ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Greek ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Italian IC-206 for ineo 163/213 2.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Dutch ineo 163/213 - User Manual TWAIN driver 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Dutch IC-206 for ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Dutch ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) ineo 163/213 - User Manual GDI-driver 1.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Spanish NC-503 for ineo 163/213 2.1.1 2007-06-07 User`s Guide Dutch fk-506 for ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-06-07 Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for ineo 163,213 i5 2010-01-08 User`s Guide German ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-04-30 User`s Guide French ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-04-30 User`s Guide Spanish ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-04-30 User`s Guide Italian ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-04-30 Declaration of Conformity - Not Related - Declaration of Conformity for ineo 163,213 i6 2011-09-15 Produit Sous-catégorie Langue Titre Version Date de sortie Lien 7013 Guide d’utilisation Italien Konica 7013 Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09 7013 Guide d’utilisation Anglais K7013 RS-232C User Manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08 7013 Guide d’utilisation Français Konica 7013 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-09-08 7013 Guide d’utilisation Allemand Konica 7013 Druckerkarte Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09 7013 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7013 Print Server Card Owner's Manual 1.1.0 2004-10-05 7013 Guide d’utilisation Allemand Konica 7013 Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09 7013 Guide d’utilisation Français K7013 Printer User Manual 1.1.1 2004-09-08 7013 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7013 User Manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08 7013 Guide d’utilisation Allemand RS232C Schnittstelle Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09 7013 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7013 Printer User Manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08 7013 Guide d’utilisation Français K7013 RS-232C 1.1.1 2004-09-08 7013 Abrégé d'utilisation Anglais Konica 7013 Quick Reference 1.1.0 2004-10-05 7020 Guide d’utilisation Danois Konica 7022/7130 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-03-17 7020 Guide d’utilisation Anglais IP-421 Instruction manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08 7020 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7020/7025/7030/7035 Instruction Manual 1.1.0 2004-03-31 7020 Guide d’utilisation Anglais IP-011 User's Guide 1.1.0 2004-10-05 7020 Guide d’utilisation Anglais FK-101 User Manual 1.1.0 2004-11-02 7020 Guide d’utilisation Allemand Konica 7020 Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09 7020 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-011 Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13 7020 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-421 Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13 7022 Guide d’utilisation Portugais Konica 7022 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-03-17 7022 Guide d’utilisation Anglais IP-423 User Manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08 7022 Guide d’utilisation Français Konica 7022/7130 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-03-16 7022 Guide d’utilisation Français URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022 Guide d’utilisation Italien Konica 7022/7130 Manuale Instruzioni 1.1.1 2004-03-09 7022 Guide d’utilisation Hollandais Konica 7022/7130 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-03-17 7022 Guide d’utilisation Allemand Konica 7022/7130/7135 Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09 7022 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica IP-422 Print Controller User Manual 1.1.0 2004-03-10 7022 Guide d’utilisation Portugais URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7022/7130 Instruction Manual 1.1.0 2004-03-31 7022 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-422/IP-423 Printcontroller/PS-343/PS-345 PostScript3 Zubehör Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13 7022 Guide d’utilisation Espagnol URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-422 Printcontroller, PS-343 PostScript3 Zubehör Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13 7022 Guide d’utilisation Espagnol Konica 7022/7130 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-03-16 7022 Guide d’utilisation Allemand URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022 Guide d’utilisation Italien URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022 Guide d’utilisation Anglais URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.0 2004-09-07 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Anglais IP-423 User Manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Français URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica IP-422 Print Controller User Manual 1.1.0 2004-03-10 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Portugais URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-422/IP-423 Printcontroller/PS-343/PS-345 PostScript3 Zubehör Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Espagnol URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-422 Printcontroller, PS-343 PostScript3 Zubehör Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Allemand URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Italien URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07 7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Anglais URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.0 2004-09-07 7024 Guide d’utilisation Allemand Konica 7024 Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09 7025 Guide d’utilisation Anglais IP-421 Instruction manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08 7025 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7020/7025/7030/7035 Instruction Manual 1.1.0 2004-03-31 Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link User`s Guide Spanish d131f_d191f - pcl Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-12 User`s Guide Spanish D131F/191F Advanced Information 1.1.1 2007-09-11 User`s Guide Italian D131F/191F Advanced Information 1.1.1 2007-09-11 User`s Guide Dutch D131F/191F User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 User`s Guide German MB-190 Manual 1.0.0 2007-09-12 User`s Guide French D131F/191F User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 User`s Guide Danish D131F/191F User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 Search Results: 1 - 44 of 44 Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link User`s Guide English ineo+ 6000/7000 User's Guides 1 2010-10-05 User`s Guide German ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-06 User`s Guide English ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-0 2010-10-06 User`s Guide Czech ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Danish ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Greek ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Spanish ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Finnish ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide French ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Italian ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Norwegian ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Polish ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Russian ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Czech ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Danish ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide German ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Greek ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Spanish ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide French ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Italian ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Dutch ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Norwegian ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Polish ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Portuguese ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Russian ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28 User`s Guide Turkish ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-29 Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity of ineo+ 6000, ineo+ 7000 i2 2011-03-14 User`s Guide Czech ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Danish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide German ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Greek ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Spanish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Finnish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide French ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Italian ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Dutch ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Norwegian ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Polish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Portuguese ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Russian ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Swedish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide Turkish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15 User`s Guide English ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-0 2011-11-15 Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity of ineo+ 6000, ineo+ 7000 i1n 2012-11-14 Search Results: 1 - 44 of 44 Search Results: 1 - 6 of 6 Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link User`s Guide German ineo 1052 / 1250: User Guides 1-1-1 2012-07-27 User`s Guide Spanish ineo 1052 / 1250: User Guides 1-1-1 2012-07-27 User`s Guide French ineo 1052 / 1250: User Guides 1-1-1 2012-07-27 User`s Guide Italian ineo 1052 / 1250: User Guides 1-1-1 2012-07-27 User`s Guide English ineo 1052 / 1250: User Guides 1-1-0 2012-07-27 Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for ineo 1052, ineo 1250 i1n 2012-11-14 Search Results: 1 - 6 of 6 Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link Quick Guide Swedish ineo +25 Quick Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-1 2012-01-12 Quick Guide Turkish ineo +25 Quick Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-1 2012-01-12 User`s Guide English ineo +25 Reference Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide English ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide German ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide French ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Italian ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Portuguese ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Spanish ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Czech ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Danish ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Dutch ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Finnish ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Greek ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Hungarian ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Norwegian ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Polish ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Russian ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Slovakian ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Swedish ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Turkish ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide English ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide German ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide French ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Italian ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Portuguese ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Spanish ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Czech ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Danish ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Dutch ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Finnish ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Greek ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Hungarian ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Norwegian ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Polish ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Russian ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Slovakian ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Swedish ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 Install Manual/Guide Turkish ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide German ineo +25 User Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-1 2012-01-12 User`s Guide English ineo +25 User Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Spanish ineo +25 User Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-1 2012-01-12 User`s Guide French ineo +25 User Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-1 2012-01-12 User`s Guide Italian ineo +25 User Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-1 2012-01-12 Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for ineo+ 25 i1n 2012-11-14 Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link User`s Guide English ineo 223/283/363/423 User's Guides 1-1-0 2010-06-16 User`s Guide German ineo 223/283/363/423 User's Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 User`s Guide Spanish ineo 223/283/363/423 User's Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 User`s Guide French ineo 223/283/363/423 User's Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 User`s Guide Italian ineo 223/283/363/423 User's Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 User`s Guide Dutch ineo 223/283/363/423 User's Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide English ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-0 2010-06-16 Quick Guide Czech ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide Danish ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide German ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide Greek ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide Spanish ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides Spanish 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide French ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide Hungarian ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide Italian ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide Dutch ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide Norwegian ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide Polish ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide Portuguese ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide Russian ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide Slovakian ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Quick Guide Turkish ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16 Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for ineo 223, 283, 363, 423 i3 2011-09-15 Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for ineo 223, 283, 363, 423 i1n 2012-11-14 Search Results: 101 - 135 of 135 Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link User`s Guide Hungarian bizhub C250 Phase3 User Manuals (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-11-01 User`s Guide Finnish bizhub C250 User Manuals 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-08-26 User`s Guide Polish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) bizhub C250 Phase2 User Manuals (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-08-26 User`s Guide Russian bizhub C250 Phase2 User Manuals (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-08-26 User`s Guide Swedish bizhub C250 Phase2 User Manuals (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-08-26 User`s Guide Finnish bizhub C250 Phase2 User Manuals (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-08-26 User`s Guide Turkish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Danish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Swedish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Czech bizhub C250 User Manuals 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-08-26 User`s Guide Spanish bizhub C250 Phase2 User Manuals (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-08-26 User`s Guide English User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.0 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Slovakian bizhub C250 User Manuals 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-08-26 User`s Guide Polish bizhub C250 Phase3 User Manuals (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-11-01 User`s Guide Swedish bizhub C250 User Manuals 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-08-26 Blue Angel German Blauer Engel Urkunde für Multifunktionsgerät bizhub C250 (RAL-UZ 114) i1 2006-06-26 Blue Angel German Blauer Engel Vertrag für Multifunktions- gerät bizhub C250 (RAL-UZ 114) 17011 2005-12-29 Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for Konica Minolta bizhub C250, C250P, C252, C252P CEM 2006 - T012B 2006-10-17 ISO Certificate English ISO 14001:2004 certificate for production - Copy Machines, Laser Beam Printers, Shilong Factory, P.R. China 1526-2000-AE-RGC-RvA 2009-03-05 Special Certificates English Konica Minolta Information Security Management System according to ISO/IEC 27001 JQA-IM0473 2011-03-15 User`s Guide English TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide German TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide French TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Italian TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Spanish TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Traditional Chinese TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Korean TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide English HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide German HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide French HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Italian HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Spanish HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Traditional Chinese HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Korean HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 Search Results: 101 - 135 of 135 Alkategória Nyelv Megnevezés Verzió Megjelenés dátuma Link Felhasználói segédlet Czech bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21 Felhasználói segédlet Multilingual bizhub 40P Installation and Safety Guide 1.1.1 2009-03-11 Felhasználói segédlet English bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21 Felhasználói segédlet Portugál Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Portuguese (Portugal) bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21 Felhasználói segédlet English Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Danish bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21 Felhasználói segédlet Polish Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Italian bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21 Felhasználói segédlet Spanish bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21 Felhasználói segédlet Italian Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Slovakian Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Dutch bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21 Felhasználói segédlet Greek Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet German bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21 Felhasználói segédlet Russian Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Russian bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21 Felhasználói segédlet German Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Swedish Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Danish Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Polish bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21 Felhasználói segédlet Spanish Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Hungarian Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Dutch Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Swedish bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21 Felhasználói segédlet Norwegian Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Turkish Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet French bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21 Felhasználói segédlet Finnish Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Felhasználói segédlet Czech Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 ISO tanúsítvány English ISO 14001:2004 certificate for production - Copy Machines, Laser Beam Printers, Shilong Factory, P.R. China 1526-2000-AE-RGC-RvA 2009-03-05 Felhasználói segédlet English bizhub 40P Reference Guide 1.1.0 2009-03-11 Felhasználói segédlet French Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 Különleges tanúsítványok English Konica Minolta Information Security Management System according to ISO/IEC 27001 JQA-IM0473 2011-03-15 Megfelelőségi nyilatkozat - Not Related - Declaration of Conformity for Konica Minolta bizhub 40P CEM-2007-T018G 2011-09-16 Gyors segédlet Romanian poster bizhub 40P Search Results: 1 - 50 of 126 Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link User`s Guide Dutch User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Italian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Hungarian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide French User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Hungarian User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Danish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide English User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C352/C250 and bizhub 750/600/bizhub 500/420) 1.1.0 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Spanish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide German User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Turkish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide German User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Greek User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Turkish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Finnish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide German User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Spanish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Slovakian User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide English User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C352/C351/C250) 1.0.0 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Greek User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide French User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide English User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.0 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide French User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Greek User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Dutch User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide German Bedienungsanleitungen (komplett) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Danish User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Hungarian User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide English FK-502 Phase 2.5 for bizhub C250/C300/C351/C352/C450 1.0.0 (Phase2.5) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Italian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Swedish User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Danish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Turkish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Dutch User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Norwegian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Czech User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Spanish User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Dutch User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Italian User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Greek User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide French User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Polish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Greek User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Polish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Czech User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Finnish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Czech User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 Search Results: 1 - 50 of 126 Search Results: 51 - 100 of 126 Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link User`s Guide Czech User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Polish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Turkish User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Spanish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Norwegian User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Hungarian User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Swedish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Polish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Slovakian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Slovakian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Hungarian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Slovakian User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Czech User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Russian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Polish User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Norwegian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Slovakian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide English User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.0 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide English User Manual bizhub C450 Phase 2.5 (complete set) 1.0.0 (Phase 2.5) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide English Network Fax Operations 1.1.0 2006-08-22 User`s Guide Spanish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Hungarian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Italian User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Finnish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Greek User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Turkish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Dutch User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide English User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.0 (Phase 1.8) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Norwegian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide English User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.0 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Slovakian User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Swedish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide German Bedienungsanleitungen (komplett) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Italian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Finnish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Italian User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Swedish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Russian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Norwegian User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Spanish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Finnish User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Polish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide German User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Czech User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Dutch User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Norwegian User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Danish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide Turkish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 Search Results: 51 - 100 of 126 Search Results: 101 - 126 of 126 Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link User`s Guide Danish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide Swedish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide French User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 User`s Guide Finnish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01 User`s Guide English User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.0 (Phase2) 2005-04-13 User`s Guide French User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01 Blue Angel German Blauer Engel Vertrag für Kopierer bizhub C450 (RAL-UZ 114) 16721 2005-07-07 Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for C450, C450P +Print Controller IC-402 +Fax CEM-2005 -T001C 2006-09-01 Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for bizhub C451, bizhub C550, bizhub C650 CEM-2007-T015A 2007-09-07 Blue Angel German Blauer Engel Urkunde für Multifunktionsgerät bizhub C450 (RAL-UZ 114) i1 2006-06-26 ISO Certificate English ISO 14001:2004 certificate for production - Copy Machines, Laser Beam Printers, Shilong Factory, P.R. China 1526-2000-AE-RGC-RvA 2009-03-05 Special Certificates English Konica Minolta Information Security Management System according to ISO/IEC 27001 JQA-IM0473 2011-03-15 User`s Guide English TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide German TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide French TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Italian TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Spanish TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Traditional Chinese TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Korean TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide English HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide German HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide French HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Italian HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Spanish HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Traditional Chinese HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 User`s Guide Korean HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05 Product Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link IC-202 User`s Guide French IC-202 for ineo 750/600, Phase 2 - User Manual 1.1.1 2007-01-17 IC-204 User`s Guide Czech IC-204 for ineo 500/420, Phase 2 111 2007-01-10 IC-204 User`s Guide Russian IC-204 for ineo 500/420, Phase 2 111 2007-01-10 IC-204 User`s Guide Danish IC-204 for ineo 500/420/360 3 2008-01-16 IC-204 User`s Guide Italian IC-204 for ineo 500/420/360 3 2008-01-16 IC-204 User`s Guide Hungarian IC-204 for ineo 500/420/360 3 2008-01-16 IC-204 User`s Guide German IC-204 for ineo 500/420, Phase 2 111 2007-01-10 IC-204 User`s Guide English IC-204 for ineo 500/420, Phase 2 111 2007-01-10 IC-204 User`s Guide English IC-204 for ineo 500/420/360 3 2008-01-16 IC-204 User`s Guide Spanish IC-204 for ineo 500/420, Phase 2 111 2007-01-10 IC-204 User`s Guide Danish IC-204 for ineo 500/420, Phase 2 111 2007-01-10 IC-204_ineo User`s Guide Danish IC-204 for ineo 500/420/360 3 2008-01-16 IC-204_ineo User`s Guide Italian IC-204 for ineo 500/420/360 3 2008-01-16 IC-204_ineo User`s Guide Hungarian IC-204 for ineo 500/420/360 3 2008-01-16 IC-204_ineo User`s Guide English IC-204 for ineo 500/420/360 3 2008-01-16 IC-206 User`s Guide Dutch IC-206 for ineo 163/213 2.1.1 2007-06-07 IC-206 Parts Guide Manual Italian ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-04-30 IC-206 User`s Guide Italian IC-206 for ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-06-07 IC-206 User`s Guide Italian IC-206 for ineo 163/213 2.1.1 2007-06-07 IC-206 User`s Guide Dutch IC-206 for ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-06-07 IC-207_generic User`s Guide Spanish IC-207 1-1-1 2008-06-24 IC-207_generic User`s Guide French IC-207 1-1-1 2008-06-24 IC-207_generic User`s Guide Dutch IC-207 1-1-1 2008-06-24 IC-207_generic User`s Guide English IC-207 1-1-0 2008-06-24 IC-208_generic User`s Guide Hungarian ineo 751/601 1.1.1 2008-11-27 IC-208_generic User`s Guide French ineo 751/601 1.1.1 2008-11-27 Suchergebnisse: 1 - 50 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download 1060 Print System Installationsanleitung Deutsch Benutzerhandbuch: Inbetrieb nahme n.a. 1997-01-25 1060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13 1060 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS 1060E Print System Getting Started n.a. 1997-01-25 1060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 1060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Französisch Guide de l'Utilisateur du Système d’Impression QMS 1060 : Manuel de Référence n.a. 1997-09-10 1060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 1060 Print System Reference Guide n.a. 1997-09-10 1060 Print System Installationsanleitung Französisch Guide de l’Utilisateur du Système d’Impression QMS 1060: Mise en Service n.a. 1997-01-25 1060 Print System Installationsanleitung Spanisch Sistem a de Impresión QMS 1060 Guía del Usuario: Los Primeros Pasos n.a. 1997-01-25 1060 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 1060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 1060 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS 1060 Print System Getting Started n.a. 1997-01-25 1060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 1060E Print System Reference Guide n.a. 1997-09-10 1060 Print System Service-Handbuch Französisch Guide de l'Utilisateur du Système d'Impression QMS 1060: Instructions de Service n.a. 1997-09-10 1060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 1060 Print System Operation n.a. 1997-09-10 1060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Working with and Printing Status Pages. n.a. 2002-03-19 1060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 1060E Print System Operation n.a. 1997-09-10 1660 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13 1660 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 1660 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 1660E: Print System Reference n.a. 1996-01-01 1660 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 1660: Print System Reference B 1996-01-01 1660 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Französisch Guide de l’Utilisateur du Système d’Impression QMS 1660: Manuel de Référence n.a. 1997-09-10 1660 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 1660E: Print System Operation n.a. 1996-01-01 1660 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Französisch Guide de l'Utilisateur du Système d’Impression QMS 1660: Mise en Service n.a. 1997-09-10 1660 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 1660: Print System Operation B 1996-01-01 1660 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 1660 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 1660 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS 1660: Getting Started b 1996-01-01 1660 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS 1660E: Getting Started n.a. 1996-01-01 1660 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Working with and Printing Status Pages. n.a. 2002-03-19 1660 Print System Installationsanleitung Spanisch Sistem a de Impresión QMS 1660 Guía del Usuario: Los Primeros Pasos n.a. 1996-01-01 1725 E Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 1725 E Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Operation B 1996-01-01 1725 E Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Reference B 1996-01-01 1725 E Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch Getting Started b 1996-01-01 1725 EX Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 1725 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13 1725 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 1725 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 1725 SLS Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 2025 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13 2025 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 3825/3225/2025 Print System Users Guide n.a. 1996-01-01 2025 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 3825/3225/2025 Print System Administrators Guide n.a. 1996-01-01 2025 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 2025 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X. n.a. 2002-02-14 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.2 and higher n.a. 2002-09-26 2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (traditionell) Software Guide A 2001-12-10 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Minolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.3 and higher n.a. 2003-11-27 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Overlay / Background printing n.a. 2002-04-13 2060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Französisch Guide de l'Utilisateur du Système d’Impression QMS 2060: Mise en Service n.a. 1997-09-10 Suchergebnisse: 1 - 50 von über 1000 Suchergebnisse: 51 - 100 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 6.x). n.a. 2002-04-13 2060 Print System Technische Daten Englisch Printer specification 1.1.0 2002-04-08 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13 2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS Document Option Commands J 2001-02-07 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Portugiesisch (Portugal) Guia do software A 2001-12-10 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 3.x till 5.x). n.a. 2002-04-13 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch LPR printing from Macintosh. n.a. 2002-03-15 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Accounting. n.a. 2003-07-21 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and Page Maker. n.a. 2002-04-13 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Booklet printing n.a. 2001-12-27 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 6. x, Basic NDS Installation. n.a. 2003-05-13 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT4, advanced printer features using separator files. n.a. 2002-03-19 2060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Operation B 1998-09-18 2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Deutsch Drucksystem QMS 2060 Inbetriebnahme n.a. 1997-09-10 2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Deutsch Benutzerhandbuch: Inbetrieb nahme n.a. 1997-01-25 2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Tschechisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 2060 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 2060 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 3. x Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Driver sharing: Windows 2000 to Windows NT (driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2001-11-19 2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS UNIX Host Software E 1998-02-07 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Printing envelops on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25 2060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Reference B 1998-09-18 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Use the Unix Host Software on Linux. n.a. 2001-12-28 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and QuarkXpress. n.a. 2002-03-04 2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS VMS Host Software E 1998-02-07 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Spanisch Guía de software A 2001-12-10 2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (vereinfacht) Software Guide A 2001-12-10 2060 Print System Technische Daten Englisch Consumable specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via Ethertalk. n.a. 2002-03-18 2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Italienisch Guida software A 2001-12-10 2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Deutsch Software Handbuch A 2001-12-10 2060 Print System Technische Daten Englisch Option specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Umlauts do not print from PageMaker. n.a. 2002-04-13 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, LPR installation. n.a. 2002-02-28 2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Ungarisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Duplexing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25 2060 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98/ME driver installation. n.a. 2001-12-10 2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Slowenisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Polnisch PodrÍcznik oprogramowania A 2001-12-10 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Sylvester driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2002-04-13 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Change resolution. n.a. 2001-12-10 2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch Installation Guide B 2003-08-29 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via LPR. n.a. 2002-03-18 Suchergebnisse: 51 - 100 von über 1000 Suchergebnisse: 101 - 150 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download 2060 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 2060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace Toner cartridge. n.a. 2003-07-18 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Working with and Printing Status Pages. n.a. 2002-03-19 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Number Up printing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2003-02-10 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 4. x NDS Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Installing Minolta-QMS Crown printers in Windows NT4SP6 or lower environments using the v1.0.7 driver n.a. 2003-11-17 2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Französisch Guide Logiciels A 2001-12-10 2060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Reset Consumable Status. n.a. 2003-07-21 2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Adjusting output resolution in QuarkXpress 4.0x. n.a. 2002-03-18 2060 WX Benutzerhandbuch Englisch User Guide n.a. 1997-09-10 2060 WX Installationsanleitung Englisch Getting Started n.a. 1997-09-10 2060 WX Sonstiges Englisch What is "LEF" A4? n.a. 1997-09-10 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X. n.a. 2002-02-14 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.2 and higher n.a. 2002-09-26 2425 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 2425 Operation Guide n.a. 1997-08-09 2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (traditionell) Software Guide A 2001-12-10 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Minolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.3 and higher n.a. 2003-11-27 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Overlay / Background printing n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 6.x). n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Französisch Guide de l'Utilisateur du Système d’Impression QMS 2425: Mise en Service n.a. 1997-09-10 2425 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Deutsch QMS 2425 Benutzerhandbuch n.a. 1997-08-09 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS Document Option Commands J 2001-02-07 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Portugiesisch (Portugal) Guia do software A 2001-12-10 2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS 2425 Stacking and Stapling Information n.a. 1997-09-05 2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS 2425: Options Installation Guide. n.a. 1997-09-05 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 3.x till 5.x). n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch LPR printing from Macintosh. n.a. 2002-03-15 2425 Print System Service-Handbuch Französisch Guide de l'Utilisateur du Système d'Impression QMS 2425: Instructions de Service n.a. 1997-09-10 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Accounting. n.a. 2003-07-21 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and Page Maker. n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Booklet printing n.a. 2001-12-27 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 6. x, Basic NDS Installation. n.a. 2003-05-13 2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Tschechisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 2425 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace Toner cartridge. n.a. 2003-07-18 2425 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 3. x Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 2425 Reference Guide n.a. 1997-08-09 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Driver sharing: Windows 2000 to Windows NT (driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2001-11-19 2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS UNIX Host Software E 1998-02-07 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and QuarkXpress. n.a. 2002-03-04 2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS VMS Host Software E 1998-02-07 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Spanisch Guía de software A 2001-12-10 Suchergebnisse: 101 - 150 von über 1000 Suchergebnisse: 151 - 200 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download 2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (vereinfacht) Software Guide A 2001-12-10 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via Ethertalk. n.a. 2002-03-18 2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Italienisch Guida software A 2001-12-10 2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS 2425: Getting Started n.a. 1997-01-25 2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Deutsch Software Handbuch A 2001-12-10 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Umlauts do not print from PageMaker. n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, LPR installation. n.a. 2002-02-28 2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Ungarisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Deutsch Benutzerhandbuch: Inbetrieb nahme n.a. 1997-01-25 2425 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98/ME driver installation. n.a. 2001-12-10 2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Slowenisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Polnisch PodrÍcznik oprogramowania A 2001-12-10 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Sylvester driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Change resolution. n.a. 2001-12-10 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via LPR. n.a. 2002-03-18 2425 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 4. x NDS Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Installing Minolta-QMS Crown printers in Windows NT4SP6 or lower environments using the v1.0.7 driver n.a. 2003-11-17 2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Französisch Guide Logiciels A 2001-12-10 2425 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Reset Consumable Status. n.a. 2003-07-21 2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (traditionell) Software Guide A 2001-12-10 2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Overlay / Background printing n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 6.x). n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS Document Option Commands J 2001-02-07 2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Portugiesisch (Portugal) Guia do software A 2001-12-10 2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 3.x till 5.x). n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch LPR printing from Macintosh. n.a. 2002-03-15 2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and Page Maker. n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Booklet printing n.a. 2001-12-27 2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Novell 6. x, Basic NDS Installation. n.a. 2003-05-13 2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Tschechisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Novell 3. x Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS UNIX Host Software E 1998-02-07 2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and QuarkXpress. n.a. 2002-03-04 2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS VMS Host Software E 1998-02-07 2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Spanisch Guía de software A 2001-12-10 2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (vereinfacht) Software Guide A 2001-12-10 2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Italienisch Guida software A 2001-12-10 2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Deutsch Software Handbuch A 2001-12-10 2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Umlauts do not print from PageMaker. n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Ungarisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 2425 Turbo Sonstiges Französisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27 2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27 2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98/ME driver installation. n.a. 2001-12-10 2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Slowenisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 Suchergebnisse: 151 - 200 von über 1000 Suchergebnisse: 201 - 250 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download 2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Polnisch PodrÍcznik oprogramowania A 2001-12-10 2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Change resolution. n.a. 2001-12-10 2425 Turbo Sonstiges Französisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Novell 4. x NDS Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Englisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Französisch Guide Logiciels A 2001-12-10 2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95 / 98 installation n.a. 2002-04-13 2560 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Reload Staples. n.a. 2002-04-13 2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Assign IP Address via Control Panel or via MAP Utililty. n.a. 2002-04-13 2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Setup Conserve Toner. n.a. 2002-04-13 2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Setup TCP/IP port on Windows 95/98. n.a. 2002-04-13 2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Change / Set output resolution in the driver. n.a. 2002-04-13 2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Restore driver to defaults. n.a. 2002-04-13 2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Setup IPX connection. n.a. 2002-04-13 2560 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Installing or Replacing the Toner Cartridge n.a. 2002-04-13 2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 3.xx and lower Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Input tray selection. n.a. 2002-04-13 2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Uninstall printer driver on PC. n.a. 2002-04-13 2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT installation n.a. 2002-04-13 2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch CrownView setup. n.a. 2002-04-13 2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 4.xx NDS Installation n.a. 2002-04-13 2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 4.xx Bindery Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 2560 Print System Service-Handbuch Englisch Load Paper. n.a. 2002-04-13 2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 installation n.a. 2003-01-28 2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Setup Collation. n.a. 2002-04-13 2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Installation on Unix. n.a. 2002-04-13 3225 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13 3225 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 3825/3225/2025 Print System Users Guide n.a. 1996-01-01 3225 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 3825/3225/2025 Print System Administrators Guide n.a. 1996-01-01 3225 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 3225 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X. n.a. 2002-02-14 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.2 and higher n.a. 2002-09-26 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (traditionell) Software Guide A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Minolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.3 and higher n.a. 2003-11-27 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Overlay / Background printing n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 6.x). n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS Document Option Commands J 2001-02-07 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, NDPS installation, Add Printer. n.a. 2001-12-28 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Portugiesisch (Portugal) Guia do software A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Technische Daten Englisch Option specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Operation B 1999-02-02 3260 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Reference B 2000-01-31 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 3.x till 5.x). n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch LPR printing from Macintosh. n.a. 2002-03-15 3260 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replacing the Staple Cartridge n.a. 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Accounting. n.a. 2003-07-21 Suchergebnisse: 201 - 250 von über 1000 Suchergebnisse: 251 - 300 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and Page Maker. n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Booklet printing n.a. 2001-12-27 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 6. x, Basic NDS Installation. n.a. 2003-05-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT4, advanced printer features using separator files. n.a. 2002-03-19 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, NDPS installation using the MQ NDPS Utility. n.a. 2001-12-28 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Tschechisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 3. x Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Driver sharing: Windows 2000 to Windows NT (driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2001-11-19 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS UNIX Host Software E 1998-02-07 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Printing envelops on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Use the Unix Host Software on Linux. n.a. 2001-12-28 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and QuarkXpress. n.a. 2002-03-04 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS VMS Host Software E 1998-02-07 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Spanisch Guía de software A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (vereinfacht) Software Guide A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via Ethertalk. n.a. 2002-03-18 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Italienisch Guida software A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Deutsch Software Handbuch A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace Toner Cartridge n.a. 2003-07-18 3260 Print System Technische Daten Englisch Printer specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Umlauts do not print from PageMaker. n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, LPR installation. n.a. 2002-02-28 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Ungarisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Duplexing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25 3260 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98/ME driver installation. n.a. 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Slowenisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Technische Daten Englisch Consumable specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Polnisch PodrÍcznik oprogramowania A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Sylvester driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Change resolution. n.a. 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via LPR. n.a. 2002-03-18 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch CrownView. n.a. 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Working with and Printing Status Pages. n.a. 2002-03-19 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Number Up printing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2003-02-10 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 4. x NDS Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Installing Minolta-QMS Crown printers in Windows NT4SP6 or lower environments using the v1.0.7 driver n.a. 2003-11-17 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Französisch Guide Logiciels A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Reset Consumable Status. n.a. 2003-07-21 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Adjusting output resolution in QuarkXpress 4.0x. n.a. 2002-03-18 3260 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Checking the Status of Consumables Crown Printers. n.a. 2001-12-10 Suchergebnisse: 251 - 300 von über 1000 Suchergebnisse: 251 - 300 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and Page Maker. n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Booklet printing n.a. 2001-12-27 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 6. x, Basic NDS Installation. n.a. 2003-05-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT4, advanced printer features using separator files. n.a. 2002-03-19 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, NDPS installation using the MQ NDPS Utility. n.a. 2001-12-28 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Tschechisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 3. x Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Driver sharing: Windows 2000 to Windows NT (driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2001-11-19 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS UNIX Host Software E 1998-02-07 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Printing envelops on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Use the Unix Host Software on Linux. n.a. 2001-12-28 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and QuarkXpress. n.a. 2002-03-04 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS VMS Host Software E 1998-02-07 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Spanisch Guía de software A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (vereinfacht) Software Guide A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via Ethertalk. n.a. 2002-03-18 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Italienisch Guida software A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Deutsch Software Handbuch A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace Toner Cartridge n.a. 2003-07-18 3260 Print System Technische Daten Englisch Printer specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Umlauts do not print from PageMaker. n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, LPR installation. n.a. 2002-02-28 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Ungarisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Duplexing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25 3260 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98/ME driver installation. n.a. 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Slowenisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Technische Daten Englisch Consumable specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Polnisch PodrÍcznik oprogramowania A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Sylvester driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Change resolution. n.a. 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via LPR. n.a. 2002-03-18 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch CrownView. n.a. 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Working with and Printing Status Pages. n.a. 2002-03-19 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Number Up printing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2003-02-10 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 4. x NDS Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Installing Minolta-QMS Crown printers in Windows NT4SP6 or lower environments using the v1.0.7 driver n.a. 2003-11-17 3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Französisch Guide Logiciels A 2001-12-10 3260 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Reset Consumable Status. n.a. 2003-07-21 3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Adjusting output resolution in QuarkXpress 4.0x. n.a. 2002-03-18 3260 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Checking the Status of Consumables Crown Printers. n.a. 2001-12-10 Suchergebnisse: 251 - 300 von über 1000 Suchergebnisse: 301 - 350 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download 3825 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13 3825 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 3825 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 3825/3225/2025 Print System Users Guide n.a. 1996-01-01 3825 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 3825/3225/2025 Print System Administrators Guide n.a. 1996-01-01 3825 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 3825 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X. n.a. 2002-02-14 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.2 and higher n.a. 2002-09-26 4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (traditionell) Software Guide A 2001-12-10 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Minolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.3 and higher n.a. 2003-11-27 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Overlay / Background printing n.a. 2002-04-13 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 6.x). n.a. 2002-04-13 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13 4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS Document Option Commands J 2001-02-07 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, NDPS installation, Add Printer. n.a. 2001-12-28 4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Portugiesisch (Portugal) Guia do software A 2001-12-10 4032 Print System Technische Daten Englisch Option specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13 4032 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Operation B 1999-02-02 4032 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Reference B 2000-01-31 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 3.x till 5.x). n.a. 2002-04-13 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch LPR printing from Macintosh. n.a. 2002-03-15 4032 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replacing the Staple Cartridge n.a. 2001-12-10 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Accounting. n.a. 2003-07-21 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and Page Maker. n.a. 2002-04-13 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Booklet printing n.a. 2001-12-27 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 6. x, Basic NDS Installation. n.a. 2003-05-13 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT4, advanced printer features using separator files. n.a. 2002-03-19 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, NDPS installation using the MQ NDPS Utility. n.a. 2001-12-28 4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Tschechisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 4032 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 4032 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 3. x Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Driver sharing: Windows 2000 to Windows NT (driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2001-11-19 4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS UNIX Host Software E 1998-02-07 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Printing envelops on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Use the Unix Host Software on Linux. n.a. 2001-12-28 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and QuarkXpress. n.a. 2002-03-04 4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS VMS Host Software E 1998-02-07 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Spanisch Guía de software A 2001-12-10 4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (vereinfacht) Software Guide A 2001-12-10 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via Ethertalk. n.a. 2002-03-18 4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Italienisch Guida software A 2001-12-10 4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Deutsch Software Handbuch A 2001-12-10 4032 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace Toner Cartridge n.a. 2003-07-18 4032 Print System Technische Daten Englisch Printer specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Umlauts do not print from PageMaker. n.a. 2002-04-13 Suchergebnisse: 301 - 350 von über 1000 Suchergebnisse: 351 - 400 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, LPR installation. n.a. 2002-02-28 4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Ungarisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Duplexing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25 4032 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98/ME driver installation. n.a. 2001-12-10 4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Slowenisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 4032 Print System Technische Daten Englisch Consumable specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13 4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Polnisch PodrÍcznik oprogramowania A 2001-12-10 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Sylvester driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2002-04-13 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Change resolution. n.a. 2001-12-10 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via LPR. n.a. 2002-03-18 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch CrownView. n.a. 2001-12-10 4032 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Working with and Printing Status Pages. n.a. 2002-03-19 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Number Up printing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2003-02-10 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 4. x NDS Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Installing Minolta-QMS Crown printers in Windows NT4SP6 or lower environments using the v1.0.7 driver n.a. 2003-11-17 4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Französisch Guide Logiciels A 2001-12-10 4032 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Reset Consumable Status. n.a. 2003-07-21 4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Adjusting output resolution in QuarkXpress 4.0x. n.a. 2002-03-18 4032 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Checking the Status of Consumables Crown Printers. n.a. 2001-12-10 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X. n.a. 2002-02-14 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.2 and higher n.a. 2002-09-26 4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (traditionell) Software Guide A 2001-12-10 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Minolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.3 and higher n.a. 2003-11-27 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Overlay / Background printing n.a. 2002-04-13 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 6.x). n.a. 2002-04-13 4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch Getting Started n.a. 1997-01-25 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13 4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS Document Option Commands J 2001-02-07 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Portugiesisch (Portugal) Guia do software A 2001-12-10 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 3.x till 5.x). n.a. 2002-04-13 4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch Options Installation Guide n.a. 1997-09-05 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch LPR printing from Macintosh. n.a. 2002-03-15 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Accounting. n.a. 2003-07-21 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and Page Maker. n.a. 2002-04-13 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Booklet printing n.a. 2001-12-27 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 6. x, Basic NDS Installation. n.a. 2003-05-13 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT4, advanced printer features using separator files. n.a. 2002-03-19 4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Tschechisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 4060 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 4060 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 3. x Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Driver sharing: Windows 2000 to Windows NT (driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2001-11-19 Suchergebnisse: 351 - 400 von über 1000 Suchergebnisse: 401 - 450 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download 4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS UNIX Host Software E 1998-02-07 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Printing envelops on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Use the Unix Host Software on Linux. n.a. 2001-12-28 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and QuarkXpress. n.a. 2002-03-04 4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Deutsch Benutzerhandbuch: Inbetrieb nahme n.a. 1997-01-25 4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS VMS Host Software E 1998-02-07 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Spanisch Guía de software A 2001-12-10 4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (vereinfacht) Software Guide A 2001-12-10 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via Ethertalk. n.a. 2002-03-18 4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Italienisch Guida software A 2001-12-10 4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Deutsch Software Handbuch A 2001-12-10 4060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace Toner. n.a. 2003-07-18 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Umlauts do not print from PageMaker. n.a. 2002-04-13 4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Ungarisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Duplexing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25 4060 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98/ME driver installation. n.a. 2001-12-10 4060 Print System Technische Daten Englisch Media Specification 1.1.0 2001-12-27 4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Slowenisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Polnisch PodrÍcznik oprogramowania A 2001-12-10 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Sylvester driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2002-04-13 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Change resolution. n.a. 2001-12-10 4060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Operation n.a. 1997-01-31 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via LPR. n.a. 2002-03-18 4060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Reference n.a. 1997-01-31 4060 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Working with and Printing Status Pages. n.a. 2002-03-19 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Number Up printing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2003-02-10 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 4. x NDS Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Französisch Guide Logiciels A 2001-12-10 4060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Reset Consumable Status. n.a. 2003-07-21 4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Adjusting output resolution in QuarkXpress 4.0x. n.a. 2002-03-18 4060 Q-Doc Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Q-Doc User Manual 1.1.0 2006-03-29 bizhub C10P Konformitätserklärung Englisch Declaration of Conformity for Konica Minolta bizhub C10P, mc2500W, mc2530DL, mc2550 CEM-2006-T018A 2007-04-30 bizhub C20P Konformitätserklärung Englisch Declaration of Conformity for Konica Minolta bizhub C20P, mc4650DN, mc4650EN CEM-2007-T019B 2007-12-18 bizhub C30P Konformitätserklärung Englisch Declaration of Conformity for Konica Minolta bizhub C30P, mc5550, mc5570 CEM-2006-T017C 2007-10-02 bizhub C31P Konformitätserklärung Englisch Declaration of Conformity for Konica Minolta bizhub C31P, mc5650, mc5670 CEM-2008-T001A 2008-04-09 Color PagePro Sonstiges Englisch Assign IP Address n.a. 2002-03-21 Color PagePro Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 Color PagePro Sonstiges Englisch Install a Page Pro Printer on Windows 95/98 via TCP/IP. n.a. 2002-03-21 Color PagePro Ex Benutzerhandbuch Englisch User Manual 1.1.0 2004-06-18 Color PagePro Ex Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 Color PagePro Ex Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Usermanual Network Card 1.1.0 2005-01-04 Color PagePro L Benutzerhandbuch Englisch User's Guide 1.1.0 2002-05-08 Color PagePro L Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 Color PagePro Plus Benutzerhandbuch Englisch User Guide 1.1.0 2004-06-18 Suchergebnisse: 401 - 450 von über 1000 Suchergebnisse: 451 - 500 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download Color PagePro Plus Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 Color PagePro Plus Sonstiges Englisch Network Setup Guide 1.1.0 2001-09-30 Color PagePro PS Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 Color PagePro PS Plus Benutzerhandbuch Englisch User Guide 1.1.0 2004-06-18 Color PagePro PS Plus Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 Color PagePro PS Plus Sonstiges Englisch Network Setup Guide 1.1.0 2001-09-30 Color PageWorks L Benutzerhandbuch Englisch User's Guide 1.1.0 2002-05-08 ColorScript 310 Benutzerhandbuch Französisch ColorScript 310/330 Guide de l’utilisateur n.a. 1997-08-09 ColorScript 310 Benutzerhandbuch Deutsch ColorScript 310/330 Benutzerhandbuch n.a. 1997-08-09 ColorScript 310 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch ColorScript 310/330 Users Guide n.a. 1997-08-09 ColorScript 330 Benutzerhandbuch Französisch ColorScript 310/330 Guide de l’utilisateur n.a. 1997-08-09 ColorScript 330 Benutzerhandbuch Deutsch ColorScript 310/330 Benutzerhandbuch n.a. 1997-08-09 ColorScript 330 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch ColorScript 310/330 Users Guide n.a. 1997-08-09 DeskLaser 1400 P Sonstiges Englisch Assign a TCP/IP Address. n.a. 2002-04-13 DeskLaser 1400 P Sonstiges Englisch Novell, NDS installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 DeskLaser 1400 P Sonstiges Englisch Novell, Bindery installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 DeskLaser 1600 P Benutzerhandbuch Englisch User manual n.a. 2002-04-05 DeskLaser 1600 P Sonstiges Englisch Novell 4, NDS installation. n.a. 2001-12-27 DeskLaser 1600 P Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Network Interface - User manual n.a. 2002-04-05 DeskLaser 1600 P Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Duplexer - User manual n.a. 2002-04-05 DeskLaser 1600 P Sonstiges Englisch Macintosh Installation. n.a. 2001-12-27 DeskLaser 1600 P Sonstiges Englisch Assign TCP/IP Address. n.a. 2001-12-27 DeskLaser 2000 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch User Guide n.a. 1997-09-10 DeskLaser 2000 Installationsanleitung Englisch Getting Started n.a. 1997-09-10 DeskLaser 2000 Sonstiges Englisch What is "LEF" A4? n.a. 1997-09-10 magicolor 1600W Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Black 1.1.0 2008-12-18 magicolor 1600W Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Cyan 1.1.0 2008-12-18 magicolor 1600W Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch OPC Drum 1.1.0 2008-12-18 magicolor 1600W Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Magenta 1.1.0 2008-12-18 magicolor 1600W Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Yellow 1.1.0 2008-12-18 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Französisch User's guide 03 2008-11-21 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Norwegisch User's guide 03 2008-11-21 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Niederländisch User's guide 03 2008-11-21 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Griechisch User's guide 03 2008-11-21 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Spanisch User's guide 03 2008-11-21 magicolor 1650EN Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Black 1.1.0 2008-12-18 magicolor 1650EN Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Cyan 1.1.0 2008-12-18 magicolor 1650EN Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch OPC Drum 1.1.0 2008-12-18 magicolor 1650EN Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Magenta 1.1.0 2008-12-18 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Türkisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Schwedisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Spanisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Slovakisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Russisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Portugiesisch (Brasilien) Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Polnisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Norwegisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Koreanisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Japanisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Italienisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 Suchergebnisse: 451 - 500 von über 1000 Suchergebnisse: 501 - 550 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Ungarisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Griechisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Deutsch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Französisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Finnisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Niederländisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Dänisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Tschechisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Chinesisch (traditionell) Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Chinesisch (vereinfacht) Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Arabisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04 magicolor 1650EN Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Yellow 1.1.0 2008-12-18 magicolor 1680MF Benutzerhandbuch Schwedisch User's guide 01 2008-12-03 magicolor 1680MF Benutzerhandbuch Chinesisch (vereinfacht) Quick guide 00 2008-12-03 magicolor 1680MF Benutzerhandbuch Koreanisch Quick guide 00 2008-12-03 magicolor 1680MF Benutzerhandbuch Griechisch Quick guide 00 2008-12-03 magicolor 1680MF Benutzerhandbuch Tschechisch Quick guide 00 2008-12-03 magicolor 1680MF Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Black 1.1.0 2008-12-18 magicolor 1680MF Benutzerhandbuch Schwedisch Quick guide 00 2008-12-03 magicolor 1680MF Benutzerhandbuch Dänisch User's guide 01 2008-12-03 magicolor 1680MF Benutzerhandbuch Deutsch User's guide 01 2008-12-01 magicolor 1680MF Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Cyan 1.1.0 2008-12-18 magicolor 1680MF Benutzerhandbuch Tschechisch User's guide 01 2008-12-03 magicolor 1680MF Benutzerhandbuch Ungarisch User's guide 01 2008-12-03 magicolor 1680MF Benutzerhandbuch Französisch User's guide 01 2008-12-01 magicolor 1680MF Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch OPC Drum 1.1.0 2008-12-18 magicolor 1680MF Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Magenta 1.1.0 2008-12-18 magicolor 1680MF Benutzerhandbuch Italienisch User's guide 01 2008-12-03 magicolor 1680MF Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Yellow 1.1.0 2008-12-18 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Russisch User's guide 01 2008-11-21 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Englisch User's guide 01 2008-11-21 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Russisch Facsimile User's Guide 01 2008-11-21 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Französisch User's guide 01 2008-11-21 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Schwedisch User's guide 01 2008-11-21 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Schwedisch Facsimile User's Guide 01 2008-11-21 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Chinesisch (traditionell) Facsimile User's Guide 01 2008-11-21 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Türkisch Facsimile User's Guide 01 2008-11-21 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Italienisch User's guide 01 2008-11-21 magicolor 1690MF Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Black 1.1.0 2008-12-18 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Koreanisch User's guide 01 2008-11-21 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Finnisch Facsimile User's Guide 01 2008-11-21 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Dänisch Facsimile User's Guide 01 2008-11-21 magicolor 1690MF Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Cyan 1.1.0 2008-12-18 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Polnisch User's guide 01 2008-11-21 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Tschechisch User's guide 01 2008-11-21 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Ungarisch Facsimile User's Guide 01 2008-11-21 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Portugiesisch (Brasilien) User's guide 01 2008-11-21 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Spanisch User's guide 01 2008-11-21 magicolor 1690MF Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch OPC Drum 1.1.0 2008-12-18 Suchergebnisse: 501 - 550 von über 1000 Suchergebnisse: 551 - 600 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download magicolor 1690MF Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Magenta 1.1.0 2008-12-18 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Norwegisch User's guide 01 2008-11-21 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Türkisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Schwedisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Spanisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Slovakisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Russisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Portugiesisch (Brasilien) Installation guide 00 2008-12-04 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Polnisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Norwegisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Italienisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Ungarisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Griechisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Deutsch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Französisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Finnisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Niederländisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Dänisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Tschechisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04 magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Arabisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04 magicolor 1690MF Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Yellow 1.1.0 2008-12-18 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X. n.a. 2002-02-14 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Deutsch ICC-Farbabstimmung für Minolta-QMS Crown-Farbdrucker, MacOS 1.1.1 2002-05-07 magicolor 2 Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner K 1.1.0 1999-12-08 magicolor 2 Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch TSCA Decalartion 1.1.0 1999-12-27 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.2 and higher n.a. 2002-09-26 magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (traditionell) Software Guide A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Minolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.3 and higher n.a. 2003-11-27 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Overlay / Background printing n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Englisch Print System Options B 1999-06-16 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 6.x). n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Reference B 1999-06-16 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Deutsch ICC-Farbabstimmung für Minolta-QMS Crown-Farbdrucker, Windows. 1.1.1 2002-05-07 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Using Pantone Color Palettes for Crown Color Printers 1.1.0 2002-05-07 magicolor 2 Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Fuser Oil 1.1.0 1999-12-27 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS Document Option Commands J 2001-02-07 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner M 1.1.0 1999-12-08 magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Portugiesisch (Portugal) Guia do software A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch How to setup your printer for printing on different media’s. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 3.x till 5.x). n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Color Density Adjustment A 1998-11-17 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch LPR printing from Macintosh. n.a. 2002-03-15 magicolor 2 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Operation B 1999-06-16 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and Page Maker. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Booklet printing n.a. 2001-12-27 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Host based ICC ColorMagagement Minolta-QMS Crown printers, Windows 1.1.0 2002-05-07 magicolor 2 Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner C 1.1.0 1999-12-08 Suchergebnisse: 551 - 600 von über 1000 Suchergebnisse: 601 - 650 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 6. x, Basic NDS Installation. n.a. 2003-05-13 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT4, advanced printer features using separator files. n.a. 2002-03-19 magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Tschechisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Französisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 3. x Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Driver sharing: Windows 2000 to Windows NT (driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2001-11-19 magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS UNIX Host Software E 1998-02-07 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Printing envelops on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Use the Unix Host Software on Linux. n.a. 2001-12-28 magicolor 2 Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, OPC 1.1.0 1999-12-27 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Host based ICC ColorMagagement Minolta-QMS Crown printers, Macintosh 1.1.0 2002-05-07 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and QuarkXpress. n.a. 2002-03-04 magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS VMS Host Software E 1998-02-07 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Spanisch Guía de software A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (vereinfacht) Software Guide A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via Ethertalk. n.a. 2002-03-18 magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Italienisch Guida software A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Deutsch Software Handbuch A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Italienisch Corrispondenza colore ICC per stampanti a colori Minolta-QMS Crown, MacOS. 1.1.1 2002-05-07 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Umlauts do not print from PageMaker. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Ungarisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Italienisch Corrispondenza colore ICC per stampanti a colori Minolta-QMS Crown, Windows. 1.1.1 2002-05-07 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Pantone Color Setup. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Französisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98/ME driver installation. n.a. 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner Y 1.1.0 1999-12-08 magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Slowenisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Polnisch PodrÍcznik oprogramowania A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 Service-Handbuch Deutsch User Maintenance Guide n/a. 2001-01-25 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Sylvester driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Change resolution. n.a. 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via LPR. n.a. 2002-03-18 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch CrownView. n.a. 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Französisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Working with and Printing Status Pages. n.a. 2002-03-19 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 4. x NDS Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Englisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Französisch Correspondance couleurs ICC pour imprimantes Crown Minolta-QMS, MacOS. 1.1.1 2002-11-28 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Französisch Correspondance couleurs ICC pour imprimantes Crown Minolta-QMS, Windows. 1.1.1 2002-11-28 magicolor 2 Technische Daten Spanisch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Technische Daten Italienisch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Technische Daten Deutsch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Technische Daten Französisch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 Technische Daten Englisch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13 Suchergebnisse: 601 - 650 von über 1000 Suchergebnisse: 651 - 700 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Installing Minolta-QMS Crown printers in Windows NT4SP6 or lower environments using the v1.0.7 driver n.a. 2003-11-17 magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Französisch Guide Logiciels A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Adjusting output resolution in QuarkXpress 4.0x. n.a. 2002-03-18 magicolor 2 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Checking the Status of Consumables Crown Printers. n.a. 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X. n.a. 2002-02-14 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Deutsch ICC-Farbabstimmung für Minolta-QMS Crown-Farbdrucker, MacOS 1.1.1 2002-05-07 magicolor 2 + Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner K 1.1.0 1999-12-08 magicolor 2 + Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch TSCA Decalartion 1.1.0 1999-12-27 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.2 and higher n.a. 2002-09-26 magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (traditionell) Software Guide A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Minolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.3 and higher n.a. 2003-11-27 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Overlay / Background printing n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 6.x). n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Deutsch ICC-Farbabstimmung für Minolta-QMS Crown-Farbdrucker, Windows. 1.1.1 2002-05-07 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Using Pantone Color Palettes for Crown Color Printers 1.1.0 2002-05-07 magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Englisch Installation Guide A 1999-09-01 magicolor 2 + Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Fuser Oil 1.1.0 1999-12-27 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS Document Option Commands J 2001-02-07 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, NDPS installation, Add Printer. n.a. 2001-12-28 magicolor 2 + Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner M 1.1.0 1999-12-08 magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Portugiesisch (Portugal) Guia do software A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 + Technische Daten Englisch Option specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch How to setup your printer for printing on different media’s. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 3.x till 5.x). n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch LPR printing from Macintosh. n.a. 2002-03-15 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Accounting. n.a. 2003-07-21 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and Page Maker. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Booklet printing n.a. 2001-12-27 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Host based ICC ColorMagagement Minolta-QMS Crown printers, Windows 1.1.0 2002-05-07 magicolor 2 + Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner C 1.1.0 1999-12-08 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Novell 6. x, Basic NDS Installation. n.a. 2003-05-13 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT4, advanced printer features using separator files. n.a. 2002-03-19 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, NDPS installation using the MQ NDPS Utility. n.a. 2001-12-28 magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Tschechisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Französisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Novell 3. x Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Driver sharing: Windows 2000 to Windows NT (driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2001-11-19 magicolor 2 + Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Color Book - Booklet Maker - BM-2 - User Manual 1.1.0 2006-03-29 magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS UNIX Host Software E 1998-02-07 magicolor 2 + Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Operation manual A 1999-09-01 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Printing envelops on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Use the Unix Host Software on Linux. n.a. 2001-12-28 magicolor 2 + Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, OPC 1.1.0 1999-12-27 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Host based ICC ColorMagagement Minolta-QMS Crown printers, Macintosh 1.1.0 2002-05-07 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and QuarkXpress. n.a. 2002-03-04 Suchergebnisse: 651 - 700 von über 1000 Suchergebnisse: 701 - 750 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS VMS Host Software E 1998-02-07 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Technische Daten Englisch Consumable specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Spanisch Guía de software A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (vereinfacht) Software Guide A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via Ethertalk. n.a. 2002-03-18 magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Italienisch Guida software A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Deutsch Software Handbuch A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Italienisch Corrispondenza colore ICC per stampanti a colori Minolta-QMS Crown, MacOS. 1.1.1 2002-05-07 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Umlauts do not print from PageMaker. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, LPR installation. n.a. 2002-02-28 magicolor 2 + Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Reference manual A 1999-09-01 magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Ungarisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Italienisch Corrispondenza colore ICC per stampanti a colori Minolta-QMS Crown, Windows. 1.1.1 2002-05-07 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Duplexing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Pantone Color Setup. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Technische Daten Englisch Printer specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Französisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98/ME driver installation. n.a. 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 + Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner Y 1.1.0 1999-12-08 magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Slowenisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Polnisch PodrÍcznik oprogramowania A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Sylvester driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Change resolution. n.a. 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via LPR. n.a. 2002-03-18 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch CrownView. n.a. 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Französisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Working with and Printing Status Pages. n.a. 2002-03-19 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Number Up printing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2003-02-10 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Novell 4. x NDS Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Englisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Französisch Correspondance couleurs ICC pour imprimantes Crown Minolta-QMS, MacOS. 1.1.1 2002-11-28 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Französisch Correspondance couleurs ICC pour imprimantes Crown Minolta-QMS, Windows. 1.1.1 2002-11-28 magicolor 2 + Technische Daten Spanisch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Technische Daten Italienisch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Technische Daten Deutsch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Technische Daten Französisch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Technische Daten Englisch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 + Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Statistics page on Crown Printers. n.a. 2002-03-19 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Installing Minolta-QMS Crown printers in Windows NT4SP6 or lower environments using the v1.0.7 driver n.a. 2003-11-17 magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Französisch Guide Logiciels A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 + Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Reset Consumable Status. n.a. 2003-07-21 magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Adjusting output resolution in QuarkXpress 4.0x. n.a. 2002-03-18 magicolor 2 + Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Checking the Status of Consumables Crown Printers. n.a. 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner K 1.1.0 1999-12-08 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch TSCA Decalartion 1.1.0 1999-12-27 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sonstiges Italienisch Corrispondenza colore ICC per stampanti a colori Minolta-QMSDesklaser. 1.1.1 2002-05-07 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Host based ICC ColorMagagement Minolta-QMS Desklaser printers 1.1.0 2002-05-07 Suchergebnisse: 701 - 750 von über 1000 Suchergebnisse: 751 - 800 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download magicolor 2 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Englisch Installation Guide A 1999-06-29 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Fuser Oil 1.1.0 1999-12-27 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Französisch Installation Guide A 1999-06-29 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Black and White printing. n.a. 2001-12-10 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner M 1.1.0 1999-12-08 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch User's Guide C 1999-06-26 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Englisch Setup Guide C 1999-06-29 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Spanisch Installation Guide A 1999-06-29 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Deutsch Installationsanleitung A 1999-06-29 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sonstiges Deutsch -Farbabstimmung für Minolta-QMS Desklaser-Farbdrucker. 1.1.1 2002-05-07 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner C 1.1.0 1999-12-08 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Technische Daten Englisch Option specification n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Technische Daten Englisch Consumable specifications 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Color Book - Booklet Maker - BM-2 - User Manual 1.1.0 2006-03-29 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, OPC 1.1.0 1999-12-27 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Technische Daten Englisch Printer specification n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Italienisch Installation Guide A 1999-06-29 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sonstiges Französisch Correspondance couleurs ICC pour imprimantes couleur Desklaser Minolta-QMS. 1.1.1 2002-11-28 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner Y 1.1.0 1999-12-08 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sonstiges Französisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Printing Multiple Copies of a File using collation on the magicolor 2 DeskLaser n.a. 2002-05-28 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Technische Daten Spanisch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Technische Daten Italienisch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Technische Daten Deutsch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Technische Daten Französisch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2 DeskLaser Technische Daten Englisch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Waste Toner Pack. n.a. 2003-07-28 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X. n.a. 2002-02-14 magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Deutsch Installationsanleitung 1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Deutsch ICC-Farbabstimmung für Minolta-QMS Crown-Farbdrucker, MacOS 1.1.1 2002-05-07 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.2 and higher n.a. 2002-09-26 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Transfer Roller n.a. 2003-07-28 magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (traditionell) Software Guide A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Minolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.3 and higher n.a. 2003-11-27 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Overlay / Background printing n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Deutsch Benutzerhandbuch B 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 6.x). n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Repacking instructions A 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Deutsch ICC-Farbabstimmung für Minolta-QMS Crown-Farbdrucker, Windows. 1.1.1 2002-05-07 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Using Pantone Color Palettes for Crown Color Printers 1.1.0 2002-05-07 magicolor 2200 Technische Daten Englisch Consumable specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS Document Option Commands J 2001-02-07 magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Französisch Guide d'installation 1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, NDPS installation, Add Printer. n.a. 2001-12-28 magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Portugiesisch (Portugal) Guia do software A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch How to setup your printer for printing on different media’s. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 3.x till 5.x). n.a. 2002-04-13 Suchergebnisse: 751 - 800 von über 1000 Suchergebnisse: 801 - 850 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch LPR printing from Macintosh. n.a. 2002-03-15 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Französisch Guide d’utilisation B 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Accounting. n.a. 2003-07-21 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and Page Maker. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Technische Daten Englisch Printer specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Booklet printing n.a. 2001-12-27 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the OPC drum. n.a. 2003-07-28 magicolor 2200 Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner-K 1.1.0 1999-12-27 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Host based ICC ColorMagagement Minolta-QMS Crown printers, Windows 1.1.0 2002-05-07 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 6. x, Basic NDS Installation. n.a. 2003-05-13 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT4, advanced printer features using separator files. n.a. 2002-03-19 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Loading the MPT tray on the magicolor 2200 Series. n.a. 2003-03-10 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, NDPS installation using the MQ NDPS Utility. n.a. 2001-12-28 magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Tschechisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2200 Technische Daten Englisch Option specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Französisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 3. x Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Service-Handbuch Englisch How to remove paper jams near to the fuser unit? n.a. 2003-07-28 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Driver sharing: Windows 2000 to Windows NT (driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2001-11-19 magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Italienisch Guida di installazione A 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS UNIX Host Software E 1998-02-07 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Printing envelops on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25 magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Englisch Installation Guide B 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Use the Unix Host Software on Linux. n.a. 2001-12-28 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Italienisch Guida Utenete B 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Host based ICC ColorMagagement Minolta-QMS Crown printers, Macintosh 1.1.0 2002-05-07 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and QuarkXpress. n.a. 2002-03-04 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Transfer Belt. n.a. 2003-07-28 magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS VMS Host Software E 1998-02-07 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Laser Lens Cover. n.a. 2003-07-28 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch User Guide B 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Fuser Oil 1.1.0 1999-12-27 magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Spanisch Guía de software A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (vereinfacht) Software Guide A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2200 Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner-Y 1.1.0 1999-12-27 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via Ethertalk. n.a. 2002-03-18 magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Italienisch Guida software A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Deutsch Software Handbuch A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2200 Service-Handbuch Englisch Clearing Media Jams Near the Sensor n.a. 2002-09-18 magicolor 2200 Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner-M 1.1.0 1999-12-27 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Italienisch Corrispondenza colore ICC per stampanti a colori Minolta-QMS Crown, MacOS. 1.1.1 2002-05-07 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Umlauts do not print from PageMaker. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, LPR installation. n.a. 2002-02-28 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Spanisch Consumables Specifications Spécifications des consommables Verbrauchsmaterialspezifikationen Specifiche sui materiali di consumo Especificaciones de materiales de consumo n.a. 2003-07-11 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Italienisch Consumables Specifications Spécifications des consommables Verbrauchsmaterialspezifikationen Specifiche sui materiali di consumo Especificaciones de materiales de consumo n.a. 2003-07-11 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Deutsch Consumables Specifications Spécifications des consommables Verbrauchsmaterialspezifikationen Specifiche sui materiali di consumo Especificaciones de materiales de consumo n.a. 2003-07-11 Suchergebnisse: 801 - 850 von über 1000 Suchergebnisse: 851 - 900 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Französisch Consumables Specifications Spécifications des consommables Verbrauchsmaterialspezifikationen Specifiche sui materiali di consumo Especificaciones de materiales de consumo n.a. 2003-07-11 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Consumables Specifications Spécifications des consommables Verbrauchsmaterialspezifikationen Specifiche sui materiali di consumo Especificaciones de materiales de consumo n.a. 2003-07-11 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Fuser Unit. n.a. 2003-07-28 magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Ungarisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Italienisch Corrispondenza colore ICC per stampanti a colori Minolta-QMS Crown, Windows. 1.1.1 2002-05-07 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Duplexing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Pantone Color Setup. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Service-Handbuch Spanisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Service-Handbuch Portugiesisch (Portugal) Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Service-Handbuch Italienisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Service-Handbuch Deutsch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Service-Handbuch Französisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Service-Handbuch Englisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Service-Handbuch Niederländisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Service-Handbuch Dänisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Service-Handbuch Tschechisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Französisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98/ME driver installation. n.a. 2001-12-10 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Removing the Transfer Belt Fixture Unit on the magicolor 2200 Series n.a. 2003-08-18 magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Slowenisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Fuser Oil Roller. n.a. 2003-07-28 magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Polnisch PodrÍcznik oprogramowania A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Sylvester driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Change resolution. n.a. 2001-12-10 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via LPR. n.a. 2002-03-18 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch CrownView. n.a. 2001-12-10 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Französisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12 magicolor 2200 Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner-C 1.1.0 1999-12-27 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Working with and Printing Status Pages. n.a. 2002-03-19 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Toner Cartridges. n.a. 2003-07-28 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Number Up printing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2003-02-10 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 4. x NDS Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Englisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Französisch Correspondance couleurs ICC pour imprimantes Crown Minolta-QMS, MacOS. 1.1.1 2002-11-28 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Französisch Correspondance couleurs ICC pour imprimantes Crown Minolta-QMS, Windows. 1.1.1 2002-11-28 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Statistics page on Crown Printers. n.a. 2002-03-19 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Installing Minolta-QMS Crown printers in Windows NT4SP6 or lower environments using the v1.0.7 driver n.a. 2003-11-17 magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Französisch Guide Logiciels A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Reset Consumable Status. n.a. 2003-07-21 magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Adjusting output resolution in QuarkXpress 4.0x. n.a. 2002-03-18 magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Checking the Status of Consumables Crown Printers. n.a. 2001-12-10 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Waste Toner Pack. n.a. 2003-07-28 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Deutsch Installationsanleitung C 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Italienisch Corrispondenza colore ICC per stampanti a colori Minolta-QMSDesklaser. 1.1.1 2002-05-07 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Transfer Roller n.a. 2003-07-28 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Using the Printer's Web Page n.a. 2002-03-19 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Ungarisch Installation Guide C 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Host based ICC ColorMagagement Minolta-QMS Desklaser printers 1.1.0 2002-05-07 Suchergebnisse: 851 - 900 von über 1000 Suchergebnisse: 901 - 950 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Repacking instructions A 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Italienisch Sostituzione di materiali di consumo n.a. 2002-08-08 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Technische Daten Englisch Consumable specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (vereinfacht) Installation Guide C 2002-01-12 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Black and White printing. n.a. 2001-12-10 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Setup duplexing n,a, 2002-05-08 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Französisch Assign IP Address. n.a. 2001-12-28 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Assign IP Address. n.a. 2001-12-28 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Deutsch Benutzerhandbuch B 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Französisch Driver Options, using the printer driver. n.a. 2002-03-19 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Driver Options, using the printer driver. n.a. 2002-03-19 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Slovakisch User Guide . B 2002-01-12 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Disabling Color Matching Setting. n.a. 2001-12-10 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Printing Multiple Copies of a File using collation on the magicolor 2200 DeskLaser n.a. 2003-03-10 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Thailändisch Installation Guide C 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Setting the magicolor 2200/6100 DeskLaser to Switch Bins When One Bin is Empty n.a. 2003-03-10 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Polnisch Installation Guide C 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the OPC drum. n.a. 2003-07-28 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner-K 1.1.0 1999-12-27 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Französisch Setting up a TCP/IP Network on Windows 2000 n.a. 2002-03-19 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Setting up a TCP/IP Network on Windows 2000 n.a. 2002-03-19 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Deutsch -Farbabstimmung für Minolta-QMS Desklaser-Farbdrucker. 1.1.1 2002-05-07 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Loading the MPT tray on the magicolor 2200 Series. n.a. 2003-03-10 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Tschechisch Installation Guide C 2002-02-23 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Tschechisch User Guide B 2002-02-23 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Uninstall the printer driver. n.a. 2002-05-28 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Selecting Input/Output Trays on the magicolor 2200/6100 DeskLaser n.a. 2002-05-28 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Service-Handbuch Englisch How to remove paper jams near to the fuser unit? n.a. 2003-07-28 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (traditionell) Installation Guide C 2002-01-12 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Englisch Installation Guide C 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Uninstalling the magicolor 2200/6100 DeskLaser Driver n.a. 2003-03-10 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Transfer Belt. n.a. 2003-07-28 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Disabling Composite Black Setting. n.a. 2001-12-10 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Deutsch Austausch von Verbrauchsmaterial. n.a. 2002-08-08 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch User Guide B 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Französisch Guide d’utilisation B 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Laser Lens Cover. n.a. 2003-07-28 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Fuser Oil 1.1.0 1999-12-27 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Technische Daten Englisch Option specification 1.1.0 2002-04-29 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Technische Daten Englisch Printer specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner-Y 1.1.0 1999-12-27 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Clear Care Procedure / Clear messages. n.a. 2002-08-08 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Selecting Media Types and envelops on the magicolor 2200/6100 DeskLaser n.a. 2003-03-10 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Service-Handbuch Englisch Clearing Media Jams Near the Sensor n.a. 2002-09-18 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner-M 1.1.0 1999-12-27 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Printing Multiple Copies of a File using collation on the magicolor 2200 DeskLaser n.a. 2002-05-28 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Installing the Printer Driver for the magicolor 2200 DeskLaser in Windows 95/98/NT4/2000/XP n.a. 2002-03-19 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Technische Daten Englisch Consumable specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Selecting Media Types and envelops on the magicolor 2200/6100 DeskLaser n,a, 2002-05-28 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Spanisch Consumables Specifications Spécifications des consommables Verbrauchsmaterialspezifikationen Specifiche sui materiali di consumo Especificaciones de materiales de consumo n.a. 2003-07-11 Suchergebnisse: 901 - 950 von über 1000 Suchergebnisse: 951 - 1000 von über 1000 Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Italienisch Consumables Specifications Spécifications des consommables Verbrauchsmaterialspezifikationen Specifiche sui materiali di consumo Especificaciones de materiales de consumo n.a. 2003-07-11 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Deutsch Consumables Specifications Spécifications des consommables Verbrauchsmaterialspezifikationen Specifiche sui materiali di consumo Especificaciones de materiales de consumo n.a. 2003-07-11 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Französisch Consumables Specifications Spécifications des consommables Verbrauchsmaterialspezifikationen Specifiche sui materiali di consumo Especificaciones de materiales de consumo n.a. 2003-07-11 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Consumables Specifications Spécifications des consommables Verbrauchsmaterialspezifikationen Specifiche sui materiali di consumo Especificaciones de materiales de consumo n.a. 2003-07-11 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Vietnamesisch Installation Guide C 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Fuser Unit. n.a. 2003-07-28 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Slovakisch Installation Guide C 2002-01-12 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Französisch Guide d'installation C 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Französisch Correspondance couleurs ICC pour imprimantes couleur Desklaser Minolta-QMS. 1.1.1 2002-11-28 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Spanisch Guía de instalación C 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Spanisch Guía de usuario B 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Service-Handbuch Spanisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Service-Handbuch Portugiesisch (Portugal) Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Service-Handbuch Italienisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Service-Handbuch Deutsch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Service-Handbuch Französisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Service-Handbuch Englisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Service-Handbuch Niederländisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Service-Handbuch Dänisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Service-Handbuch Tschechisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Removing the Transfer Belt Fixture Unit on the magicolor 2200 Series n.a. 2003-08-18 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Fuser Oil Roller. n.a. 2003-07-28 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Italienisch Guida di installazione C 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Selecting Input/Output Trays on the magicolor 2200/6100 DeskLaser n.a. 2003-03-10 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Italienisch Guida Utente B 2002-04-13 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Menu options. n.a. 2002-05-08 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner-C 1.1.0 1999-12-27 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Toner Cartridges. n.a. 2003-07-28 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Französisch Remplacement des consommables n.a. 2002-08-08 magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Reset Consumable Status. n.a. 2003-07-21 magicolor 2210 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Waste Toner Pack. n.a. 2003-07-28 magicolor 2210 Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X. n.a. 2002-02-14 magicolor 2210 Sonstiges Deutsch ICC-Farbabstimmung für Minolta-QMS Crown-Farbdrucker, MacOS 1.1.1 2002-05-07 magicolor 2210 Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.2 and higher n.a. 2002-09-26 magicolor 2210 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Transfer Roller n.a. 2003-07-28 magicolor 2210 Installationsanleitung Polnisch Installation Guide C 2002-01-17 magicolor 2210 Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (traditionell) Software Guide A 2001-12-10 magicolor 2210 Installationsanleitung Französisch Installation Guide Magicolor 2210, French A 2001-11-15 magicolor 2210 Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Minolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.3 and higher n.a. 2003-11-27 magicolor 2210 Sonstiges Englisch Overlay / Background printing n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2210 Installationsanleitung Slovakisch Installation Guide C 2002-01-17 magicolor 2210 Installationsanleitung Deutsch Installationsanleitung C 2002-01-17 magicolor 2210 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 6.x). n.a. 2002-04-13 magicolor 2210 Sonstiges Deutsch ICC-Farbabstimmung für Minolta-QMS Crown-Farbdrucker, Windows. 1.1.1 2002-05-07 magicolor 2210 Sonstiges Englisch Using Pantone Color Palettes for Crown Color Printers 1.1.0 2002-05-07 magicolor 2210 Technische Daten Englisch Consumable specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13 magicolor 2210 Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (traditionell) Installation Guide C 2002-01-17 magicolor 2210 Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS Document Option Commands J 2001-02-07 magicolor 2210 Installationsanleitung Portugiesisch (Portugal) Guia de Instalação C 2002-01-17 magicolor 2210 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, NDPS installation, Add Printer. n.a. 2001-12-28 Suchergebnisse: 951 - 1000 von über 1000 Résultats recherche : 1 - 50 de 266 Produit Sous-catégorie Langue Titre Version Date de sortie Lien 7823 Guide d’utilisation Français Konica 7823 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-03-16 7823 Abrégé d'utilisation Français Konica 7823 Quick Guide 1.1.1 2004-03-16 7915 Abrégé d'utilisation Français Konica 7915/7920 Short Guide 1.1.1 2004-05-10 7920 Abrégé d'utilisation Français Konica 7915/7920 Short Guide 1.1.1 2004-05-10 8020 Guide d’utilisation Français Konica 8020/8031 Advanced Informations 7.1.1 2004-03-09 8020 Guide d’utilisation Français URG 8020/8031 Guide de l´utilisateur 7.1.1 2004-09-08 8031 Guide d’utilisation Français Konica 8020/8031 Advanced Informations 7.1.1 2004-03-09 8031 Guide d’utilisation Français URG 8020/8031 Guide de l´utilisateur 7.1.1 2004-09-08 8050 Guide d’utilisation Français CN5001Pro 1.1.1 2003-12-12 8050 Guide d’utilisation Français CN5001Pro 1.1.1 2003-12-12 8050 Abrégé d'utilisation Français Konica 8050 Quick Guide 1.1.1 2004-09-08 8050 Guide d’utilisation Français IP-921 - Documents from EFI 1.0.0 2004-06-08 8050 Guide d’utilisation Français IP-921 - Release Notes 1.0.0 2004-04-22 8150 Guide d’utilisation Français CN5001Pro 1.1.1 2003-12-12 8150 Guide d’utilisation Français CN5001Pro 1.1.1 2003-12-12 8150 Guide d’utilisation Français IP-921 - Documents from EFI 1.0.0 2004-06-08 8150 Guide d’utilisation Français IP-921 - Release Notes 1.0.0 2004-04-22 bizhub C10 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C10 User Manuals 1.1.1 2007-08-03 bizhub C10 Guide d’utilisation Multi-Langues bizhub C10 Installation Guide and Safety Information 1.1.0 2007-08-03 bizhub C10P Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C10P User Manual 1.0.1 2007-03-01 bizhub C10P Guide d’installation Anglais bizhub C10P Installation Manual 1.0.0 2007-03-01 bizhub C20 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C20 User Guides 1.1.1 2008-10-28 bizhub C200 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C200 User Manuals 1-1-1 2008-07-07 bizhub C200 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C200 Phase2 User Manuals 1-1-1 Phase2 2009-02-23 bizhub C200 Abrégé d'utilisation Français bizhub C200 Phase2 Quick Guide 1-1-1 Phase2 2009-02-23 bizhub C203 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option) 1.1.1 2008-03-20 bizhub C203 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option) 1.1.1 2008-03-20 bizhub C203 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option2) 2.1.1 2008-07-07 bizhub C203 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C203/C253/C353 User Manual 2.1.1 2007-09-04 bizhub C203 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C203/C253/C353 User Manual 3.1.1 2007-09-04 bizhub C20P Guide d’utilisation Français Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 bizhub C20P Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C20P User Manual 1.0.1 2008-04-17 bizhub C220 Abrégé d'utilisation Français bizhub C360/C280/C220 Quick Guide & Poster 3-2-1 2009-08-28 bizhub C220 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C360/C280/C220 User's Guides 3-2-1 2009-08-28 bizhub C224 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 User Guides (part 1/2) (French) 1-1-1 2012-06-04 bizhub C224 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 User Guides (part 2/2)(French) 1-1-1 2012-06-04 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Français User's guides (French) 01 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Abrégé d'utilisation Français Quick guide (French) 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Arabe Installation guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Turc Installation guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Suédois Installation guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’installation slovaque Installation guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Russe Installation guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Polonais Installation guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Norvégien Installation guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Hongrois Installation guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Grec Installation guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Finnois Installation guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Hollandais Installation guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Danois Installation guide 00 2011-03-14 Résultats recherche : 1 - 50 de 266 Résultats recherche : 51 - 100 de 266 Produit Sous-catégorie Langue Titre Version Date de sortie Lien bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Tchèque Installation guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Espagnol Installation guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Portugais Installation guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Italien Installation guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Français Installation guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Allemand Installation guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’installation Anglais Installation guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Arabe Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Turc Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Suédois Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation slovaque Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Russe Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Polonais Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Norvégien Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Hongrois Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Grec Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Finnois Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Hollandais Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Danois Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Tchèque Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Coréen Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Simplified Chinese Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Traditional Chinese Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Espagnol Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Portugais Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Italien Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Français Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Allemand Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C25 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Safety information guide 00 2011-03-14 bizhub C250 Guide d’utilisation Français User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 bizhub C250 Guide d’utilisation Français Network Fax Operations 1.1.1 2006-08-22 bizhub C250 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C250 Phase3 User Manuals (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-11-01 bizhub C250P Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C250P User Manual 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-09-13 bizhub C252 Guide d’utilisation Français User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 bizhub C252 Guide d’utilisation Français Network Fax Operations 1.1.1 2006-08-22 bizhub C252 Guide d’utilisation Français User Manual bizhub C252 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 bizhub C252P Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C252P User Manual 1.1.1 2006-08-22 bizhub C253 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option) 1.1.1 2008-03-20 bizhub C253 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option) 1.1.1 2008-03-20 bizhub C253 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option2) 2.1.1 2008-07-07 bizhub C253 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C203/C253/C353 User Manual 2.1.1 2007-09-04 bizhub C253 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C203/C253/C353 User Manual 3.1.1 2007-09-04 bizhub C280 Abrégé d'utilisation Français bizhub C360/C280/C220 Quick Guide & Poster 3-2-1 2009-08-28 bizhub C280 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C360/C280/C220 User's Guides 3-2-1 2009-08-28 bizhub C284 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 User Guides (part 1/2) (French) 1-1-1 2012-06-04 bizhub C284 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 User Guides (part 2/2)(French) 1-1-1 2012-06-04 bizhub C300 Guide d’utilisation Français HDD Twain manual 1.0.1 2006-05-23 bizhub C300 Guide d’utilisation Français Real time mode Twain manual 1.0.1 2006-05-23 bizhub C300 Guide d’utilisation Français User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 bizhub C300 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C300 User Manuals (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-21 Résultats recherche : 51 - 100 de 266 Résultats recherche : 101 - 150 de 266 Produit Sous-catégorie Langue Titre Version Date de sortie Lien bizhub C300 Guide d’utilisation Français Network Fax Operations 1.1.1 2006-08-22 bizhub C300 Guide d’utilisation Français IC-406, Manuals from EFI (same as IC-402, V.2) 1.1.1 2006-05-24 bizhub C30P Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C30P User Manual 1.0.1 2007-03-01 bizhub C30P Guide d’installation Anglais bizhub C30P Installation Manual 1.0.0 2007-03-01 bizhub C31P Guide d’utilisation Français Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05 bizhub C31P Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C31P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-03-28 bizhub C35 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C35 User's Guide 2-1-1 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Abrégé d'utilisation Français bizhub C35 Quick Guide 2-1-2 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C35 French Short Guide 1-1-1 2010-07-14 bizhub C35 Guide d’utilisation Anglais bizhub C35 Reference Guide 1-1-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Arabe bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Turc bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Suédois bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation slovaque bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Russe bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Polonais bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Norvégien bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Hongrois bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Grec bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Finnois bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Hollandais bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Danois bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Tchèque bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Coréen bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Simplified Chinese bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Traditional Chinese bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Espagnol bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Portugais bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Italien bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Français bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Allemand bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Guide d’installation Anglais bizhub C35 Installation Guide 1-0-0 2010-06-16 bizhub C35 Abrégé d'utilisation Français bizhub C35, Step 2, Quick Guide 3-2-1 2010-12-01 bizhub C350 Guide d’utilisation Français C350 Printer Controller User Manual 1.1.1 2004-05-21 bizhub C350 Guide d’utilisation Français C350 Advanced Information 1.1.1 2004-05-21 bizhub C350 Guide d’utilisation Français C350 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-02-09 bizhub C350 Guide d’utilisation Français C350 Printer Controller Advanced Information 1.1.1 2004-02-09 bizhub C351 Guide d’utilisation Français User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 bizhub C351 Guide d’utilisation Français Network Fax Operations 1.1.1 2006-08-22 bizhub C351 Guide d’utilisation Français User Manual bizhub C351 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-11-15 bizhub C352 Guide d’utilisation Français HDD Twain manual 1.0.1 2006-05-23 bizhub C352 Guide d’utilisation Français Real time mode Twain manual 1.0.1 2006-05-23 bizhub C352 Guide d’utilisation Français User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 bizhub C352 Guide d’utilisation Français User Manual bizhub C352 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 bizhub C352 Guide d’utilisation Français IC-406, Manuals from EFI (same as IC-402, V.2) 1.1.1 2006-05-24 bizhub C352P Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C352P User Manual 1.1.1 Phase3 2006-03-09 bizhub C353 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option) 1.1.1 2008-03-20 bizhub C353 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option) 1.1.1 2008-03-20 bizhub C353 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option2) 2.1.1 2008-07-07 bizhub C353 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C203/C253/C353 User Manual 2.1.1 2007-09-04 Résultats recherche : 101 - 150 de 266 Résultats recherche : 151 - 200 de 266 Produit Sous-catégorie Langue Titre Version Date de sortie Lien bizhub C353 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C203/C253/C353 User Manual 3.1.1 2007-09-04 bizhub C353P Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C353P 1.1.1 2007-11-13 bizhub C35P Guide d’utilisation Tchèque User's guide 12 2010-06-29 bizhub C35P Guide d’utilisation Anglais bizhub C35P Reference Guide 00A 2010-02-02 bizhub C35P Guide d’utilisation Français User's Guide - Manuel Utilisateur (Fr) 12 2010-06-29 bizhub C360 Abrégé d'utilisation Français bizhub C360/C280/C220 Quick Guide & Poster 3-2-1 2009-08-28 bizhub C360 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C360/C280/C220 User's Guides 3-2-1 2009-08-28 bizhub C364 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 User Guides (part 1/2) (French) 1-1-1 2012-06-04 bizhub C364 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 User Guides (part 2/2)(French) 1-1-1 2012-06-04 bizhub C450 Guide d’utilisation Français User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13 bizhub C450 Guide d’utilisation Français User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28 bizhub C450P Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C450P User Manual 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-11-14 bizhub C451 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option) 1.1.1 2008-03-20 bizhub C451 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option) 1.1.1 2008-03-20 bizhub C451 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C451/C550/C650 User Manual 2.1.1 2007-02-27 bizhub C451 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option2) 2.1.1 2008-07-07 bizhub C451 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C451/C550/C650 FE2 User Manual 3.1.1 2007-02-27 bizhub C451 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C451/C550/C650 FE3 User Manual 4.1.1 2007-02-27 bizhub C452 Abrégé d'utilisation Français bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C452 Quick Guide and Poster 2-1-1 2009-09-11 bizhub C452 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C452 User Guides 2-1-1 2009-09-11 bizhub C454 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 User Guides (part 1/2) (French) 1-1-1 2012-06-04 bizhub C454 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 User Guides (part 2/2)(French) 1-1-1 2012-06-04 bizhub C550 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option) 1.1.1 2008-03-20 bizhub C550 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option) 1.1.1 2008-03-20 bizhub C550 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C451/C550/C650 User Manual 2.1.1 2007-02-27 bizhub C550 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option2) 2.1.1 2008-07-07 bizhub C550 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C451/C550/C650 FE2 User Manual 3.1.1 2007-02-27 bizhub C550 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C451/C550/C650 FE3 User Manual 4.1.1 2007-02-27 bizhub C552 Abrégé d'utilisation Français bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C452 Quick Guide and Poster 2-1-1 2009-09-11 bizhub C552 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C452 User Guides 2-1-1 2009-09-11 bizhub C552 Abrégé d'utilisation Français bizhub C652/C552 Quick Guide Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box 1-1-1 2009-02-18 bizhub C554 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 User Guides (part 1/2) (French) 1-1-1 2012-06-04 bizhub C554 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C554/C454/C364/C284/C224 User Guides (part 2/2)(French) 1-1-1 2012-06-04 bizhub C650 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option) 1.1.1 2008-03-20 bizhub C650 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option) 1.1.1 2008-03-20 bizhub C650 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C451/C550/C650 User Manual 2.1.1 2007-02-27 bizhub C650 Guide d’utilisation Français Advanced Function Operations (i-Option2) 2.1.1 2008-07-07 bizhub C650 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C451/C550/C650 FE2 User Manual 3.1.1 2007-02-27 bizhub C650 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C451/C550/C650 FE3 User Manual 4.1.1 2007-02-27 bizhub C652 Abrégé d'utilisation Français bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C452 Quick Guide and Poster 2-1-1 2009-09-11 bizhub C652 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C452 User Guides 2-1-1 2009-09-11 bizhub C652 Abrégé d'utilisation Français bizhub C652/C552 Quick Guide Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box 1-1-1 2009-02-18 bizhub C652DS Abrégé d'utilisation Français bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C452 Quick Guide and Poster 2-1-1 2009-09-11 bizhub C652DS Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C452 User Guides 2-1-1 2009-09-11 bizhub C654 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C754/C654 User Guides (French) 1-1-1 2012-02-16 bizhub C754 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub C754/C654 User Guides (French) 1-1-1 2012-02-16 bizhub PRESS C6000 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub-PRO-PRESS-C6000-C7000_ug_Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-09-23 bizhub PRESS C7000 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub-PRO-PRESS-C6000-C7000_ug_Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-09-23 bizhub PRESS C7000P Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub-PRO-PRESS-C6000-C7000_ug_Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-09-23 bizhub PRO C500 Guide d’utilisation Français CN5001Pro 1.1.1 2003-12-12 Résultats recherche : 151 - 200 de 266 Résultats recherche : 201 - 250 de 266 Produit Sous-catégorie Langue Titre Version Date de sortie Lien bizhub PRO C500 Guide d’utilisation Français CN5001Pro 1.1.1 2003-12-12 bizhub PRO C500 Guide d’utilisation Français IP-921 - Documents from EFI 1.0.0 2004-06-08 bizhub PRO C500 Guide d’utilisation Français IP-921 - Release Notes 1.0.0 2004-04-22 bizhub PRO C500 Guide d’utilisation Français IC-405 (Manuals from EFI) 1.0 2006-06-19 bizhub PRO C500 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub PRO C500 1.1.1 2005-02-28 bizhub PRO C500 Guide d’utilisation Français IC-302 (Manuals from EFI) 1.0 2006-06-19 bizhub PRO C5500 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 bizhub PRO C5500 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub PRO C5500, User manual 1.1.1 2007-06-29 bizhub PRO C5501 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 bizhub PRO C5501 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub PRO C5501 1-1-1 2008-08-06 bizhub PRO C6500 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 bizhub PRO C6500 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub PRO C6500/bizhub PRO C6500e - User Manual 111 2006-10-04 bizhub PRO C6500 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub PRO C6500/bizhub PRO C6500e, Phase 2.0 - User Manual 111 2006-10-04 bizhub PRO C6500 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub PRO C6500/bizhub PRO C6500e - User Manual 211 2006-10-04 bizhub PRO C6500 Guide d’utilisation Français IC-408 (Manuals from EFI) 100 2006-11-16 bizhub PRO C6500P Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 bizhub PRO C6501 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 bizhub PRO C6501 Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub PRO C6501/C6501e 1-1-1 2008-06-23 bizhub PRO C6501e Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 bizhub PRO C6501e Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub PRO C6501/C6501e 1-1-1 2008-06-23 bizhub PRO C6501P Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub PRO C6501eP User`s Guide 1-1-1 2008-07-29 bizhub PRO C65hc Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 bizhub PRO C65hc Guide d’utilisation Français bizhub PRO C65hc 1.1.1 2008-12-10 CF1501 Guide d’utilisation Français PageScope Light Fiery Z5/X3e for CF1501/CF2001 1.1.1 2001-09-12 CF1501 Guide d’utilisation Français CF1501/CF2001 Ver1.0.1 2001-05-28 CF2001 Guide d’utilisation Français PageScope Light Fiery Z5/X3e for CF1501/CF2001 1.1.1 2001-09-12 CF2001 Guide d’utilisation Français CF1501/CF2001 Ver1.0.1 2001-05-28 CF2001P Guide d’utilisation Français CF2001P 1.0.1 2001-11-15 CF2001P Guide d’utilisation Français PageScope Light for CF2001P 1.1.1 2001-09-12 CF2002 Guide d’utilisation Français CF2002/CF3102 Utilisation Experte 7.1.1 2003-06-13 CF2002 Guide d’utilisation Français Available Features 1.1.1 2002-11-18 CF2002 Guide d’utilisation Français CF2002/CF3102 User Manual 7.1.1 2003-06-13 CF2002P Guide d’utilisation Français CF2002/3102 Printer 1.1.1 2003-02-18 CF3102 Guide d’utilisation Français CF2002/CF3102 Utilisation Experte 7.1.1 2003-06-13 CF3102 Guide d’utilisation Français Available Features 1.1.1 2002-11-18 CF3102 Guide d’utilisation Français CF2002/CF3102 User Manual 7.1.1 2003-06-13 CF3102P Guide d’utilisation Français CF2002/3102 Printer 1.1.1 2003-02-18 CF5001 Guide d’utilisation Français CF5001 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-01-01 CF9001 Guide d’utilisation Français CF9001 VER 1.0.1 2001-05-10 CF9001 Guide d’utilisation Français CF9001 VER 1.1.1 2001-05-10 CF9001 Abrégé d'utilisation Français CF9001 VER 1.0.0 2001-05-10 CF910 Guide d’utilisation Français CF910 VER 1.1.1 2001-05-10 CF911P Guide d’utilisation Français CF911P VER 1.0.1 2001-05-10 CS520 Guide d’utilisation Français CN5001Pro 1.1.1 2003-12-12 CS520 Guide d’utilisation Français CN5001Pro 1.1.1 2003-12-12 CS520 Guide d’utilisation Français IP-921 - Documents from EFI 1.0.0 2004-06-08 CS520 Guide d’utilisation Français IP-921 - Release Notes 1.0.0 2004-04-22 CS550 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 CS655 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 CS665 Pro Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 Résultats recherche : 201 - 250 de 266 Résultats recherche : 251 - 266 de 266 Produit Sous-catégorie Langue Titre Version Date de sortie Lien IKON BusinessPro 550c Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 IKON BusinessPro 650 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 IKON BusinessPro 660c Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 IKON CPP550 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 IKON CPP560 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 IKON CPP650 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 ineo+ 5500 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 ineo+ 5501 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 ineo+ 6500 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 LD-5100 Guide d’utilisation Français CN5001Pro 1.1.1 2003-12-12 LD-5100 Guide d’utilisation Français CN5001Pro 1.1.1 2003-12-12 LD-5100 Guide d’utilisation Français IP-921 - Documents from EFI 1.0.0 2004-06-08 LD-5100 Guide d’utilisation Français IP-921 - Release Notes 1.0.0 2004-04-22 LD-5501 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 LD-6501 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 Linium PRO C5500 Guide d’utilisation Français FS-520 User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11 Résultats recherche : 251 - 266 de 266

FS-520 Guide de l’utilisateur FS-520 Table des matières-1 Table des matières 1 Introduction 2 Précautions d'installation et d'utilisation 2.1 Etiquettes et indicateurs d'avertissement ..................................... 2-3 2.2 Encombrement ................................................................................. 2-4 2.3 Module de finition FS-520 ................................................................ 2-6 2.4 Equipement Standard/En option..................................................... 2-8 2.5 Rajout d'agrafes ............................................................................... 2-9 Insertion d'une nouvelle cartouche d'agrafes dans le module de finition FS-520................................................................................ 2-9 2.6 Élimination des déchets de perforation ....................................... 2-12 Vidage de la corbeille du Module de finition FS-520 ................... 2-12 2.7 Informations sur le papier.............................................................. 2-14 2.8 Spécifications ................................................................................. 2-16 Module de finition FS-520............................................................ 2-16 3 Opérations de copie 3.1 Utilisation du Module de finition FS-520......................................... 3-3 Sortie sur bac principal .................................................................. 3-3 Sortie sur le bac auxiliaire .............................................................. 3-4 3.1.1 Non trié/Trié/Groupé sortie sur le bac principal ............................. 3-5 3.1.2 Agrafage, sortie sur le bac principal .............................................. 3-7 3.1.3 Trié/Groupé sortie sur le bac auxiliaire ........................................ 3-10 3.1.4 Perforer des trous dans les copies (Perforation) .......................... 3-13 3.2 Insertion de couvertures (bac d'insertion) ................................... 3-16 3.3 Utilisation manuelle du Module de finition FS-520...................... 3-18 Table des matières-2 FS-520 4 Principes de réglage du module de finition (FS-520) 03 Réglage perforation \ 01 Régl. position verticale....................... 4-3 03 Réglage perforation/02 Régl. position horizontale .................... 4-3 03 Réglage perforation \ 03 Réglage synchronisation.................... 4-3 03 Réglage perforation \ 04 Capteur dét. bord feuille .................... 4-3 06 Détect. format bac insert ........................................................... 4-3 07 Limite quantité sortie ................................................................. 4-3 08 Réglage Gondolage ................................................................... 4-4 1 Introduction Introduction 1 FS-520 1-3 1 Introduction Le module de finition FS-520 est périphérique en option récemment ajouté à la configuration des options du bizhub PRO C6500. Veuillez consulter ce guide pour le fonctionnement et les informations de sécurité de ce module de finition et conservez ce guide dans le guide de l'utilisateur de l'unité principale afin de pouvoir le consulter à tout moment. Et, n'oubliez pas de lire le chapitre 1 "Introduction/Informations de sécurité" du Guide de l'utilisateur du bizhub PRO C6500. KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC 1 Introduction 1-4 FS-520 2 Précautions d'installation et d'utilisation Précautions d'installation et d'utilisation 2 FS-520 2-3 2 Précautions d'installation et d'utilisation 2.1 Etiquettes et indicateurs d'avertissement Sur cette machine, les étiquettes et indicateurs d'avertissement de sécurité apparaissent aux emplacements suivants. Faites bien attention à ce qu'aucun accident ne survienne pendant l'exécution de certaines opérations comme le dégagement d'un bourrage papier. 2 Rappel Ne pas ôter les étiquettes ni les avis d'avertissement. Si une étiquette ou un avis d'avertissement est souillé, veuillez les nettoyer pour qu'ils soient lisibles. Si vous ne pouvez pas les rendre lisibles, ou si l'étiquette ou l'avis d'avertissement est endommagé, veuillez contacter le S.A.V. Pour éviter toute blessure, NE PAS mettre vos mains sur le haut des feuilles imprimées. Assurez-vous de tenir les deux bords des feuilles imprimées quand vous les sortez, et NE PAS laisser vos mains sur les feuilles imprimées pendant que le bac principal remonte. ATTENTION Module de finition FS-520 2 Précautions d'installation et d'utilisation 2-4 FS-520 2.2 Encombrement Pour faciliter le fonctionnement de la machine, l'approvisionnement en consommables, le remplacement des pièces et l'entretien régulier, veuillez observer les exigences d'encombrement détaillées ci-dessous. Veuillez-vous assurer que le sol de l'emplacement d'installation est de niveau et stable. La taille combinée de la machine et des options peut varier pour l'environnement d'installation. 1619 899 2142 1021 950 293 1021 1619 393 205 410 760 718 656 2419 1160 1177 100 85 100 Machine + DF-609 + LU-202 + FS-520 + PI-502 Machine + DF-609 + LU-202 + FS-520 + PI-502 (vue latérale) Unité :mm Précautions d'installation et d'utilisation 2 FS-520 2-5 2 Rappel Veillez à prévoir un dégagement de 200 mm ou plus à l'arrière de cette machine pour le conduit de ventilation et permettre l'accès au bac de récupération toner. 2 Précautions d'installation et d'utilisation 2-6 FS-520 2.3 Module de finition FS-520 2 3 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Précautions d'installation et d'utilisation 2 FS-520 2-7 Vue externe Vue interne No. Nom Description 1 Porte du module de finition S'ouvre vers le module de finition interne pour permettre de dégager le papier serré, de rajouter des agrafes et de vider la corbeille à déchets du kit de perforation. 2 Bac principal Reçoit les jeux éjectés en mode Non-Trié, en mode Groupé (décalage) ou en mode Agrafage. 3 Bac auxiliaire Reçoit les jeux éjectés en mode Non-Trié. No. Nom Description 1 Levier de transport du bac auxiliaire S'ouvre vers la droite afin d'enlever la feuille à l'origine du bourrage. 2 Levier de transport du bac d'insertion S'ouvre vers la gauche afin d'enlever la feuille à l'origine du bourrage. 3 Kit de perforation PK-512/PK-513 (en option) Réalise des trous de classeur dans les copies sorties. 4 Levier d'entrée S'ouvre vers le bas afin d'enlever la feuille à l'origine du bourrage. 5 Levier de transport de l'empileuse S'ouvre en bas vers la gauche afin d'enlever la feuille à l'origine du bourrage. 6 Cartouche d'agrafes Contient la cartouche d'agrafes à remplacer lors de l'alimentation en agrafes. 7 Poignée de l'empileur Permet de tirer le module en arrière pour enlever la feuille à l'origine du bourrage et remplacer la cartouche d'agrafes. 2 Précautions d'installation et d'utilisation 2-8 FS-520 2.4 Equipement Standard/En option PI-502 PK-512 PK-513 FS-520 DF-609 OC-506 Compteur clé Machine IC-303 IC-304 IC-408 LU-502 HT-503 HT-504 PF-601 Précautions d'installation et d'utilisation 2 FS-520 2-9 2.5 Rajout d'agrafes Insertion d'une nouvelle cartouche d'agrafes dans le module de finition FS-520 Lorsque la cartouche d'agrafes du module de finition FS-520 est vide, le témoin Cartouche d'agrafes s'allume en rouge dans la zone d'option de l'écran Machine. 1 Ouvrez la porte de l'unité de finition. 2 Sortez l'empileuse. – Saisissez la poignée de l'unité d'empilage et tirez doucement jusqu'à la butée pour dégager l'unité d'empilage. 2 Précautions d'installation et d'utilisation 2-10 FS-520 3 Enlevez la cartouche d'agrafes. – Tout en tenant le levier sur la cartouche d'agrafes, tirez la cartouche vers le bas pour la dégager. 4 Sortez la cartouche vide de son support. 5 Insérez la cartouche neuve dans le support. – N'enlevez pas les agrafes qui restent à l'intérieur du logement, sinon la première feuille à agrafer après le rechargement en agrafes ne sera pas agrafée. Précautions d'installation et d'utilisation 2 FS-520 2-11 6 Ramenez l'empileuse à sa position d'origine. 7 Fermez la porte de l'unité de finition. 2 Précautions d'installation et d'utilisation 2-12 FS-520 2.6 Élimination des déchets de perforation Vidage de la corbeille du Module de finition FS-520 Quand la corbeille de perforation de l'unité de perforation PK-512/PK-513 installée sur le module de finition FS-520 est pleine, le témoin Corbeille Perforation s'allume en rouge dans la zone d'option de l'écran Machine. 1 Ouvrez la porte de l'unité de finition. 2 Tirez la corbeille. Précautions d'installation et d'utilisation 2 FS-520 2-13 3 Videz la corbeille. 4 Replacez la corbeille dans sa position initiale, puis refermez soigneusement la porte du module de finition. 2 Précautions d'installation et d'utilisation 2-14 FS-520 2.7 Informations sur le papier Le module de finition FS-520 offre les fonctions suivantes. - Sortie droite via le bac principal : éjecte des jeux triés/groupés normalement dans le bac principal. - Sortie droite via le bac auxiliaire : éjecte des jeux triés/groupés normalement dans le bac auxiliaire. - Sortie décalée : éjecte des jeux triés/groupés dans le bac principal en décalant chaque jeu d'env. 30mm au moment de la sortie. - Sortie agrafée : agrafe chaque jeu à l'aide d'une agrafe en coin ou de deux agrafes le long du bord. Le mode perforation est disponible avec le module de finition FS-520 complété par le kit de perforation PK-512/PK-513. L'insertion de feuilles est disponible avec le module de finition FS-520 complété par le bac d'insertion PI-502. Informations sur le papier Poids Bac principal : 60 à 300 g/m2 Bac auxiliaire : 50 à 300 g/m2 Agrafage : 60 à 209 g/m2 Capacité Bac auxiliaire Max. 100 feuilles Bac principal (normal) 500 feuilles (80 g/m2) (A5 w/v, B6 w, 5,5" e 8,5" w/v) 3000 feuilles (80 g/m2) (A4 w/v, B5 w/v, 16K w/v, 8,5" e 11" w/v, 7,25" e 10,5" w/v) 1500 feuilles (80 g/m2) (SRA3 w, SRA4 w, A3 w, B4 w, Foolscap, 8K w, 12" e 18" w, 11" e 17" w, 8,5" e 14" w, format large (320mm max. e 450 mm)) La capacité des bacs varie en fonction du grammage. • ~80g/m2 : 1500 feuilles • 81~135 g/m2 : 1000 feuilles • 136~209 g/m2 : 700 feuilles • 210~300 g/m2 : 500 feuilles Bac principal (agrafage) 50 feuilles max. (80 g/m2) par jeu 2 à 9 feuilles agrafées : 100 jeux (150-417mm en longueur)/ 50 jeux (autres) 10 à 20 feuilles agrafées : 50 jeux 21 à 30 feuilles agrafées : 30 jeux 31 à 40 feuilles agrafées : 25 jeux 41 à 50 feuilles agrafées : 20 jeux Bac d'insertion PI-502 Magasin supérieur/ inférieur 200 feuilles max. (50 à 200 g/m2) Kit de perforation PK-512/ PK-513 Illimité Précautions d'installation et d'utilisation 2 FS-520 2-15 Capacité d'agrafage Format papier Bac auxiliaire Format standard : SRA3 w, SRA4 w/v, A3 w, B4 w, Foolscap, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w, 8K w, 16K w/v, 13" e 19" w, 12" e 18" w, 11" e 17" w, 8,5" e 14" w, 8,5" e 11" w/v, 5,5" e 8,5" w/v Formats personnalisés : 330 mm max. e 487 mm à 100mm min. e 148mm Papier avec onglets A4 v, 8,5" e 11" v Bac principal (normal) Format standard : SRA3 w*1, SRA4 w, A3 w, B4 w, Foolscap, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 w*1/v, B6 w*1, 8K w, 16K w/v, 12" e 18" w, 11" e 17" w, 8,5" e 14" w, 8,5" e 11" w/v, 5,5" e 8,5" w*1/v *1 : 5,5" e 8,5" w, SRA3 w, A5 w et B6 w ne sont disponibles que pour la sortie droite. Formats personnalisés*2 : 314mm max. e 458 mm à 182mm min. e 148mm *2 : 314 mm max. e 458 mm à 128mm min. e 148mm pour sortie droite uniquement. Papier avec onglets A4 v, 8,5" e 11" v Bac principal (agrafage) Format standard : SRA4 w, A3 w, B4 w, Foolscap, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 v, 8K w, 16K w/v, 12" e 18" w, 11" e 17" w, 8,5" e 14" w, 8,5" e 11" w/v, 5,5" e 8,5" v Formats personnalisés : 314mm max. e 458 mm à 182mm min. e 148mm Papier avec onglets A4 v, 8,5" e 11" v Informations sur le papier Grammage du papier Type de papier Papier ordinaire Papier de qualité supérieure Papier couleur Papier couché 64 à 80 g/m2 50 feuilles 50 feuilles 50 feuilles 40 feuilles 81 à 105 g/m2 40 feuilles 30 feuilles 30 feuilles 25 feuilles 106 à 135 g/m2 30 feuilles 30 feuilles 25 feuilles 20 feuilles 136 à 209 g/m2 20 feuilles 20 feuilles 15 feuilles --- 2 Précautions d'installation et d'utilisation 2-16 FS-520 2.8 Spécifications Module de finition FS-520 Rubrique Description Nom FS-520 Type module de finition Magasin de décalage Bac de sortie Bac principal et bac auxiliaire Fonction Sortie droite (trié, groupée) Sortie décalée (triée et décalée, groupée et décalée) Sortie agrafée (en coin, 2 points) Types de papier Pour plus de détails, voir page 2-14. Formats papier Pour plus de détails, voir page 2-14. Capacité magasin papier Pour plus de détails, voir page 2-14. Consommation électrique maximum 80 W ou moins Dimensions 424 (674,5 quand le bac principal est monté/ 790,5 quand le bac sorti) (L) e 656 (P) e 990 (H) mm Poids Environ 60 kg 3 Opérations de copie Opérations de copie 3 FS-520 3-3 3 Opérations de copie 3.1 Utilisation du Module de finition FS-520 Le module de finition FS-520 dispose d'un bac principal et d'un bac auxiliaire, chacun proposant les modes de finition suivants. Sortie sur bac principal Vous pouvez combiner aux modes de finition ci-dessus, à l'exception du mode Agrafage, les types de sortie suivants : recto vers le haut ou vers le bas, et de la première page à la dernière et de la dernière à la première. Exemple : réaliser 3 jeux de copie à partir d'un original de 4 feuilles. Mode Description Non-Trié Le mode Non-Trié signifie simplement que le mode décalage du module de finition n'est pas sélectionné. Les copies seront éjectées sans être triées par jeux décalés. Tri Le mode Tri éjecte plusieurs pages du jeu d'impression en triant et décalant les jeux de copies de 30 mm à la sortie. Groupe Le mode Groupe regroupe plusieurs pages de chaque original et décale les jeux de 30 mm à la sortie. Agrafage Le mode Agrafage décale et agrafe chaque jeu issu du tri. Non-Trié Agrafage Trié Vers le haut 1 agrafe Agrafage Décalage de 30 mm Décalage de 30 mm 2 agrafes 3 Opérations de copie 3-4 FS-520 Sortie sur le bac auxiliaire Vous pouvez combiner aux modes de finition ci-dessus, les types de sortie suivants : recto vers le haut ou vers le bas, et de la première page à la dernière ou de la dernière à la première. Exemple : réaliser 3 jeux de copies Mode Description Tri Le mode Tri délivre plusieurs copies du jeu d'originaux. Aucun décalage n'est possible. Groupe Le mode Groupe regroupe plusieurs copies de chaque original. Aucun décalage n'est possible. Groupé recto vers le bas Groupé recto vers le haut Recto vers le haut vers le bas Recto vers le haut vers le haut Opérations de copie 3 FS-520 3-5 3.1.1 Non trié/Trié/Groupé sortie sur le bac principal Une machine équipée de l'Unité de finition FS-520 est réglée par défaut pour grouper les copies sur le bac principal, peu importe qu'elle soit équipée d'autres périphériques en option. Choisir un mode de finition en appliquant la procédure suivante. ! Détails Vous pouvez changer le mode initial de finition dans le réglage UTILITAIRES. Pour plus de détails, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur du bizhub PRO C6500. Pour les spécifications détaillées, voir "Informations sur le papier" à la page 2-14 et "Spécifications" à la page 2-16. 1 Positionnez l'original. 2 Appuyez sur [Finition] sur l'écran Copie. L'écran Finition s'affiche. Les positions des bacs de sortie sont indiquées par des carrés portés sur l'image de la façade de la machine ; lorsqu'un bac est sélectionné, le carré correspondant apparaît en évidence. Si le bac principal n'est pas sélectionné, appuyez sur [Bac de sortie] pour le sélectionner. 3 Sélectionnez le mode de sortie désiré. – Pour une sortie Non-trié, annulez les modes [Tri] et [Groupe]. – Pour une sortie Triée, appuyez sur [Tri] pour la mettre en évidence. – Pour une sortie Groupé, appuyez sur [Groupe] pour la mettre en évidence. 3 Opérations de copie 3-6 FS-520 – Sélectionnez le sens de sortie (Recto vers le bas/Recto vers le haut), et l'ordre de sortie (1 vers N/N vers 1) selon les besoins. 4 Appuyez sur [Valider] sur l'écran Finition. L'icône du mode de sortie spécifié s'affiche sur l'écran Copie. 2 Rappel Le bac principal s'abaisse progressivement pendant l'éjection des feuilles imprimées. NE PAS laisser le moindre objet faire obstacle au fonctionnement du magasin du côté gauche de l'unité de finition, car la moindre interférence risque d'endommager l'unité de finition. Veillez à ne pas dépasser la capacité du magasin de l'unité de finition lorsque vous spécifiez le nombre d'exemplaires, sinon vous risquez de provoquer une anomalie sur la machine. Opérations de copie 3 FS-520 3-7 3.1.2 Agrafage, sortie sur le bac principal Dans ce mode les copies sont agrafées. Appliquez la procédure suivante pour sélectionner la position d'agrafage et nombre d'agrafes : Haut gauche/ Haut droite (Agrafage en coin), Gauche/Haut/Droite (Agrafage 2 points). ! Détails Pour les spécifications détaillées, voir "Informations sur le papier" à la page 2-14 et "Spécifications" à la page 2-16. 1 Positionnez l'original. 2 Appuyez sur [Agraf.] sur l'écran Copie. – Les feuilles agrafées seront éjectées dans le bac principal. L'icône Finition indique la position d'agrafage actuellement sélectionnée. Si vous voulez modifier la position d'agrafage, appliquez la procédure suivante. 3 Appuyez sur [Finition] sur l'écran Copie. L'écran Finition s'affiche. 3 Opérations de copie 3-8 FS-520 4 Appuyez sur [Agrafage] pour sélectionner la position d'agrafage. L'écran Configuration Agrafage s'affiche. 5 Appuyez sur la touche de la position d'agrafage voulue pour la mettre en évidence. 6 Appuyez sur [Valider]. – Appuyez sur [Annuler] pour revenir à la configuration précédente. – Pour désactiver la fonction Agrafage sans effacer la position d'agrafage actuelle, appuyez sur [Désactiver]. L'écran Finition réapparaît. 7 Appuyez sur [Valider] sur l'écran Finition. L'icône du mode de sortie spécifié s'affiche sur l'écran Copie. Opérations de copie 3 FS-520 3-9 2 Rappel Le bac principal s'abaisse progressivement pendant l'éjection des feuilles imprimées. NE PAS laisser le moindre objet faire obstacle au fonctionnement du magasin du côté gauche de l'unité de finition, car la moindre interférence risque d'endommager l'unité de finition. Veillez à ne pas dépasser la capacité du magasin de l'unité de finition lorsque vous spécifiez le nombre d'exemplaires, sinon vous risquez de provoquer une anomalie sur la machine. 3 Opérations de copie 3-10 FS-520 3.1.3 Trié/Groupé sortie sur le bac auxiliaire Une machine équipée de l'Unité de finition FS-520 est réglée par défaut pour grouper les copies sur le bac principal, peu importe qu'elle soit équipée d'autres périphériques en option. Changez de bac de sortie et sélectionnez le mode de sortie désiré au moyen de la procédure suivante. ! Détails Pour les spécifications détaillées, voir "Informations sur le papier" à la page 2-14 et "Spécifications" à la page 2-16. 1 Positionnez l'original. 2 Appuyez sur [Finition] sur l'écran Copie. L'écran Finition s'affiche. 3 Sélectionnez le bac auxiliaire comme bac de sortie. – Appuyez sur [Bac de sortie] pour afficher l'écran Sélection du bac de sortie. Opérations de copie 3 FS-520 3-11 – Appuyez sur la touche de position du bac auxiliaire pour la mettre en évidence et appuyez sur [Valider]. 4 Sélectionnez le mode de sortie désiré. – Pour une sortie Triée, appuyez sur [Tri] pour la mettre en évidence. – Pour une sortie Groupé, appuyez sur [Groupe] pour la mettre en évidence. – Sélectionnez le sens de sortie (Recto vers le bas/Recto vers le haut), et l'ordre de sortie (1 vers N/N vers 1) selon les besoins. 5 Appuyez sur [Valider] sur l'écran Finition. L'icône du mode de sortie spécifié s'affiche sur l'écran Copie. 3 Opérations de copie 3-12 FS-520 2 Rappel Veillez à ne pas dépasser la capacité du magasin de l'unité de finition lorsque vous spécifiez le nombre d'exemplaires, sinon vous risquez de provoquer une anomalie sur la machine. Opérations de copie 3 FS-520 3-13 3.1.4 Perforer des trous dans les copies (Perforation) Le Module de finition FS-520 équipé du Kit de perforation PK-512/PK-513 peut perforer les copies imprimées. 2 Rappel Ne perforez pas les types de papier spéciaux comme les étiquettes, le papier calque, etc. sinon un incident peut se produire sur la machine. Assurez-vous que les plaques-guide du magasin papier sont correctement alignées sur le papier, sinon les copies ne seront pas perforées au bon emplacement. ! Détails Pour les spécifications détaillées, voir "Informations sur le papier" à la page 2-14 et "Spécifications" à la page 2-16. 80mm 80mm 70mm 21mm 21mm 3 Opérations de copie 3-14 FS-520 1 Positionnez l'original. 2 Appuyez sur [Perfo] sur l'écran Copie. – Les feuilles perforées seront éjectées dans le bac principal. L'icône Finition montre le nombre de trous ainsi que la position de perforation actuellement sélectionnées. Si vous voulez modifier le nombre de trous et la position de perforation, appliquez la procédure suivante. 3 Appuyez sur [Finition] sur l'écran Copie. L'écran Finition s'affiche. 4 Appuyez sur [Perforation]. L'écran Perforation s'affiche. Opérations de copie 3 FS-520 3-15 5 Appuyez sur la touche de perforation voulue pour la sélectionner. 6 Appuyez sur [Valider]. – Appuyez sur [Annuler] pour revenir à la configuration précédente. – Pour désactiver la fonction Perforation tout en mémorisant le nombre et la position des trous de perforation actuellement sélectionnés, appuyez sur [Désactiver]. L'écran Finition réapparaît. 7 Appuyez sur [Valider] sur l'écran Finition. L'icône du mode de sortie spécifié s'affiche sur l'écran Copie. 2 Rappel Veillez à ne pas dépasser la capacité du magasin de l'unité de finition lorsque vous spécifiez le nombre d'exemplaires, sinon vous risquez de provoquer une anomalie sur la machine. 3 Opérations de copie 3-16 FS-520 3.2 Insertion de couvertures (bac d'insertion) Le Module de finition FS-520 équipé du Bac d'insertion PI-502 peut joindre des couvertures aux copies imprimées. La fonction Insertion Intercalaires permet d'insérer des pages de couverture chargées dans les magasins supérieur et inférieur du bac d'insertion comme couverture et/ou dos ou comme intercalaires aux copies imprimées et également avec le mode Agrafage de réaliser un livret agrafé et doté d'une couverture. Couverture Jeu copié avec couvertures et Jeu copié avec couverture fixée en mode Agrafage intercalaires joints Opérations de copie 3 FS-520 3-17 0 Capacité magasin supérieur/inférieur : 200 feuilles (papier) ou 30mm d'épaisseur pour chacun 0 Utiliser le chargeur ADF. 0 Le format de la page de couverture doit être identique au format utilisé pour les copies. 0 La couverture chargée dans le bac d'insertion ne peut pas être copiée. 1 Placez le papier à couverture dans les magasins supérieur et inférieur du bac d'insertion. 2 Utiliser la fonction Insertion intercalaires pour joindre des couvertures aux copies imprimées. Bac supérieur Bac inférieur 3 Opérations de copie 3-18 FS-520 3.3 Utilisation manuelle du Module de finition FS-520 Le Module de finition FS-520 équipé du Bac d'insertion PI-502 peut être utilisé manuellement par l'intermédiaire du panneau de contrôle intégré du Bac d'insertion. Placez du papier dans le magasin inférieur. Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser le magasin supérieur. Voici les modes de finition disponibles en fonction des options installées. - Module de finition FS-520 + Bac d'insertion PI-502 – Agrafage (1 agrafe/2 agrafes) - Module de finition FS-520 + Bac d'insertion PI-502 + Kit de perforation PK-512/PK-513 – Agrafage (1 agrafe/2 agrafes) – Perforation 0 Le papier ne devrait être chargé que dans le magasin inférieur du bac d'insertion. Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser le magasin supérieur. 0 Agrafage (1 agrafe/2 agrafes) et Perforation peuvent être combinés. Bouton Départ/Arrêt 1 agrafe en coin 2 agrafes parallèles Perforation Opérations de copie 3 FS-520 3-19 1 Placer un jeu de papier le magasin inférieur du bac d'insertion. – Agrafage (1 agrafe/2 agrafes) : placez le papier Recto vers le HAUT. – Perforation : placez le papier Recto vers le HAUT. – Alignez la plaque-guide avec le papier. 2 Appuyez sur le bouton de sélection du mode Agrafage et sur le bouton Perforation pour sélectionner le mode désiré. – Pour sélectionner Agrafage (1 agrafe/2 agrafes), appuyez sur la touche de sélection du mode d'agrafage pour allumer le voyant du mode désiré. – Pour sélectionner Perforation, appuyez sur le bouton Perforation pour allumer le voyant. Pour utiliser l'Agrafage et une autre fonction, allumez le voyant du mode d'agrafage désiré. Pour sélectionner seulement le mode Perforation, éteignez tous les autres voyants. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton Départ/Arrêt. ? Si vous désirez arrêter l'opération de finition ? % Appuyez sur le bouton Départ/Arrêt sur le panneau de contrôle du bac d'insertion. Bac inférieur Bouton de sélection du mode Agrafage Bouton Perforation Bouton Départ/Arrêt 3 Opérations de copie 3-20 FS-520 4 Principes de réglage du module de finition (FS-520) Principes de réglage du module de finition (FS-520) 4 FS-520 4-3 4 Principes de réglage du module de finition (FS-520) Utilisez cette fonction pour procéder aux réglages de précision du module de finition FS-520. Pour plus de détails, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur du bizhub PRO C6500. ! Détails Les éléments de réglage cible varient en fonction de la configuration des options installées. 03 Réglage perforation \ 01 Régl. position verticale % Procédez à ce réglage pour centrer les trous effectués par l'unité de perforation PK-512/PK-513. 03 Réglage perforation/02 Régl. position horizontale % Procédez à ce réglage pour la position des trous par rapport au bord de la feuille effectués par l'unité de perforation PK-512/PK-513. 03 Réglage perforation \ 03 Réglage synchronisation % Procédez à ce réglage pour la position oblique de la position de perforation effectuée par le Kit perforation PK-512/PK-513 en copie recto-verso ou en mode insertion couvertures avec le bac d'insertion. 03 Réglage perforation \ 04 Capteur dét. bord feuille % Procédez à ce réglage pour détecter le bord du papier à utiliser comme point de référence de l'opération de perforation. 06 Détect. format bac insert % Procédez à ce réglage du format pour le magasin supérieur et le magasin inférieur du bac d'insertion PI-502. 07 Limite quantité sortie % Spécifiez la limite de quantité de sortie des jeux agrafés. 4 Principes de réglage du module de finition (FS-520) 4-4 FS-520 08 Réglage Gondolage % Ce réglage peut être utilisé pour régler la quantité de fixation de compression du rouleau détuileur de sortie si un pli se forme sur les feuilles imprimées éjectées par le FS-520. User’s Guide [Printer/Copier/Scanner]x-1 Thank You Thank you for purchasing a bizhub C35. You have made an excellent choice. Your bizhub C35 is specially designed for optimal performance in Windows, Macintosh and Linux environments. Trademarks Acrobat and the Acrobat logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Adobe, the Adobe logo and Photoshop are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Apple and the Apple logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of Apple, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. DIC and the DIC logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of DIC Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Ethernet is a registered trademark or trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. IEEE and the IEEE logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. Mac and Mac OS are registered trademarks or trademarks of Apple, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. NETWARE is a registered trademark or trademark of Novell, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. Pentium is registered trademark or trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. TOYO is a registered trademark of TOYO INK MFG. CO., LTD. in the United States and/or other countries. Microsoft, Windows and Windows Vista are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. KONICA MINOLTA and the KONICA MINOLTA logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC. bizhub and PageScope are trademarks or registered trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.x-2 Copyright Notice Copyright © 2009 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC., Marunouchi Center Building, 1-6-1 Marunouchi, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo, 100-0005, Japan. All Rights Reserved. This document may not be copied, in whole or part, nor transferred to any other media or language, without written permission of KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. Notice KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. reserves the right to make changes to this guide and to the equipment described herein without notice. Considerable effort has been made to ensure that this guide is free of inaccuracies and omissions. However, KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. makes no warranty of any kind including, but not limited to, any implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose with regard to this guide. KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. assumes no responsibility for, or liability for, errors contained in this guide or for incidental, special, or consequential damages arising out of the furnishing of this guide, or the use of this guide in operating the equipment, or in connection with the performance of the equipment when so operated.x-3 SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT This package contains the following materials provided by KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. (KMBT): software included as part of the printing system (“Printing Software”), the digitally-encoded machine-readable outline data encoded in the special format and in the encrypted form (“Font Programs”), other software which runs on a computer system for use in conjunction with the Printing Software (“Host Software”), and related explanatory written materials (“Documentation”). The term “Software” shall be used to describe Printing Software, Font Programs and/or Host Software and also include any upgrades, modified versions, additions, and copies of the Software. The Software is being licensed to you under the terms of this Agreement. KMBT grants to you a non-exclusive sublicense to use the Software and Documentation, provided that you agree to the following: 1. You may use the Software and accompanying Font Programs for imaging to the licensed output device(s), solely for your own internal business purposes. 2. In addition to the license for Font Programs set forth in Section 1 above, you may use Roman Font Programs to reproduce weights, styles, and versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols (“Typefaces”) on the display or monitor for your own internal business purposes. 3. You may make one backup copy of the Host Software, provided your backup copy is not installed or used on any computer. Notwithstanding the above restrictions, you may install the Host Software on any number of computers solely for use with one or more printing systems running the Printing Software. 4. You may assign its rights under this Agreement to an assignee of all of Licensee’s right and interest to such Software and Documentation (“Assignee”) provided you transfer to Assignee all copies of such Software and Documentation Assignee agrees to be bound by all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement. 5. You agree not to modify, adapt or translate the Software and Documentation. 6. You agree that you will not attempt to alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile the Software. 7. Title to and ownership of the Software and Documentation and any reproductions thereof shall remain with KMBT and its licensor. 8. Trademarks shall be used in accordance with accepted trademark practice, including identification of the trademark owner’s name. Trademarks can only be used to identify printed output produced by the Software. Such use of any trademark does not give you any rights of ownership in that trademark. 9. You may not rent, lease, sublicense, lend or transfer versions or copies of the Software Licensee does not use, or Software contained on any unused media, except as part of the permanent transfer of all Software and Documentation as described above. 10. IN NO EVENT WILL KMBT OR ITS LICENSOR BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL INDIRECT, PUNITIVE OR SPECIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST SAVING, EVEN IF KMBT HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY THIRD PARTY. KMBT OR ITS LICENSOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.x-4 11. Notice to Government End Users: The Software is a “commercial item,” as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R.2.101, consisting of “commercial computer software” and “commercial computer software documentation,” as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, all U.S. Government End Users acquire the Software with only those rights set forth herein. 12. You agree that you will not export the Software in any form in violation of any applicable laws and regulations regarding export control of any countries.x-5 Legal Restrictions on Copying Certain types of documents must never be copied with the purpose or intent to pass copies of such documents off as the originals. The following is not a complete list, but is meant to be used as a guide to responsible copying. Financial Instruments z Personal checks z Traveler’s checks z Money orders z Certificates of deposit z Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness z Stock certificates Legal Documents z Food stamps z Postage stamps (canceled or uncanceled) z Checks or drafts drawn by government agencies z Internal revenue stamps (canceled or uncanceled) z Passports z Immigration papers z Motor vehicle licenses and titles z House and property titles and deeds General z Identification cards, badges, or insignias z Copyrighted works without permission of the copyright owner In addition, it is prohibited under any circumstances to copy domestic or foreign currencies, or works of art without permission of the copyright owner. When in doubt about the nature of a document, consult with legal counsel. " This machine provides the forgery prevention function in order to prevent financial instruments from being copied illegally. We appreciate your understanding that printed images may infrequently have some noise or image data may not be stored under certain circumstances due to this forgery prevention function.x-6 For EU member states only This symbol means: Do not dispose of this product together with your household waste! Please contact the Local Authority for appropriate disposal instructions. In the case of a new device being purchased, the used one can also be given to our dealer for appropriate disposal. Recycling of this product will help to conserve natural resources and prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human health caused by inappropriate waste handling. This product complies with RoHS (2002/95/EC) directive.Contents Contents x-7 1 Introduction .................................................................................................... 1-1 Getting Acquainted with Your Machine ....................................................... 1-2 Space Requirements................................................................................... 1-2 Part Names ................................................................................................. 1-4 Front View............................................................................................. 1-4 Rear View ............................................................................................. 1-6 Front View with Options ........................................................................ 1-6 Adjusting the angle of the control panel...................................................... 1-7 Drivers CD/DVD.......................................................................................... 1-8 Printer Drivers (PostScript Drivers)....................................................... 1-8 Printer Drivers (PCL Drivers) ................................................................ 1-8 Printer Drivers (XPS Drivers) ................................................................ 1-8 Printer Drivers (PPD Files).................................................................... 1-9 Scanner Drivers .................................................................................... 1-9 PC Fax Drivers...................................................................................... 1-9 Applications CD/DVD................................................................................ 1-10 Applications......................................................................................... 1-10 Documentation CD/DVD ........................................................................... 1-12 Documentation.................................................................................... 1-12 System Requirements............................................................................... 1-13x-8 Contents 2 Control panel and touch panel screens ...................................................... 2-1 About the Control Panel ................................................................................ 2-2 Touch panel screens ..................................................................................... 2-5 Home screen............................................................................................... 2-5 Initial Copy mode screen............................................................................. 2-7 Initial Scan to Folder mode screen.............................................................. 2-8 Initial Scan to E-mail mode screen.............................................................. 2-9 Initial Fax mode screen............................................................................... 2-9 Job screen................................................................................................. 2-10 Status screen ............................................................................................ 2-11 USB/HDD screen ...................................................................................... 2-12 Keys and icons that appear in the screens ............................................... 2-13 User authentication and account track ..................................................... 2-15 With user authentication............................................................................ 2-15 Device authentication.......................................................................... 2-15 External server authentication ............................................................ 2-15 Logging in using the authentication device ......................................... 2-16 With account track..................................................................................... 2-16 3 Utility Settings ................................................................................................ 3-1 [Accessibility] ................................................................................................ 3-2 [Meter Count] ................................................................................................. 3-7 [Address Registration] .................................................................................. 3-8 [User Settings] ............................................................................................. 3-10 [Machine Settings]..................................................................................... 3-13 [Copy Settings].......................................................................................... 3-15 [Scan Settings].......................................................................................... 3-16 [Print Settings]........................................................................................... 3-17 [Fax Settings] ............................................................................................ 3-20 [Select Default Start App].......................................................................... 3-20 [Admin Settings] .......................................................................................... 3-21 [Machine Settings]..................................................................................... 3-41 [Administrator Registration]....................................................................... 3-43 [Address Registration]............................................................................... 3-43 [Authentication Setting] ............................................................................. 3-44 [Ethernet]................................................................................................... 3-45 [External Memory Print]............................................................................. 3-48 [Job Timeout] ............................................................................................ 3-48 [Copy Settings].......................................................................................... 3-48 [Print Settings]........................................................................................... 3-49 [Fax Settings] ............................................................................................ 3-63 [Maintenance Menu].................................................................................. 3-63 [Folder Settings]........................................................................................ 3-69 [Security Settings] ..................................................................................... 3-70 Changing the administrator password ................................................ 3-74 Limitations of the password rules........................................................ 3-74Contents x-9 Passwords regulated by the password rules............................................. 3-74 Conditions of the password rules.............................................................. 3-75 Enhanced security settings ................................................................. 3-75 Required settings ...................................................................................... 3-75 Changed settings ...................................................................................... 3-76 [Restore Defaults] ..................................................................................... 3-77 [HDD Format]............................................................................................ 3-77 [Paper Empty] ........................................................................................... 3-78 [Restriction Code Settings]........................................................................ 3-78 [Erase Job Log]......................................................................................... 3-78 4 Media Handling .............................................................................................. 4-1 Print Media ..................................................................................................... 4-2 Specifications.............................................................................................. 4-2 Types .......................................................................................................... 4-4 Plain Paper (Recycled Paper)............................................................... 4-4 Thick Stock ........................................................................................... 4-5 Envelope ............................................................................................... 4-6 Label ..................................................................................................... 4-7 Letterhead............................................................................................. 4-8 Postcard................................................................................................ 4-8 Glossy Media ........................................................................................ 4-9 Single Side Only........................................................................................ 4-10 Special Paper............................................................................................ 4-11 Printable Area ........................................................................................... 4-12 Envelopes ................................................................................................. 4-13 Page Margins............................................................................................ 4-13 Loading Media .............................................................................................. 4-14 How do I load media? ............................................................................... 4-14 Tray 1 (Manual Feed Tray) ....................................................................... 4-14 Loading Plain Paper, Single Side Only and Special Paper................. 4-14 Other Media ........................................................................................ 4-16 Loading Envelopes ............................................................................. 4-17 Loading Label Sheets/Letterhead/Postcards/Thick Stock and Glossy Media ...................................................................................... 4-19 Tray 2........................................................................................................ 4-21 Loading Plain Paper, Single Side Only and Special Paper................. 4-21 Loading Label Sheets/Letterhead/Postcards/Thick Stock and Glossy Media ...................................................................................... 4-24 Tray 3/4 (Optional Lower Feeder Unit)...................................................... 4-27 Loading Plain Paper, Single Side Only and Special Paper................. 4-27 About Duplex Printing ................................................................................. 4-30 How do I autoduplex? ............................................................................... 4-30 Output Tray .................................................................................................. 4-32 Media Storage .............................................................................................. 4-33x-10 Contents Original Media .............................................................................................. 4-34 Specifications............................................................................................ 4-34 Documents that can be placed on the original glass .......................... 4-34 Documents that can be loaded into the ADF ...................................... 4-34 Loading a Document ................................................................................... 4-36 Placing a document on the original glass.................................................. 4-36 Loading a document into the ADF............................................................. 4-37 5 Using the Printer Driver ................................................................................ 5-1 Selecting Driver Options/Defaults (for Windows) ....................................... 5-2 Windows Server 2008 R2/7/Vista/Server 2008/XP/Server 2003/ 2000...................................................................................................... 5-2 Uninstalling the Printer Driver (for Windows) ............................................. 5-4 Windows Server 2008 R2/7/Vista/Server 2008/XP/Server 2003/ 2000...................................................................................................... 5-4 Displaying Printer Driver Settings (for Windows) ...................................... 5-5 Windows 7/Server 2008 R2 .................................................................. 5-5 Windows Vista/Server 2008.................................................................. 5-5 Windows XP/Server 2003 ..................................................................... 5-5 Windows 2000 ...................................................................................... 5-5 Using the Postscript, PCL and XPS Printer Driver ..................................... 5-6 Common Buttons ........................................................................................ 5-6 [OK]....................................................................................................... 5-6 [Cancel]................................................................................................. 5-6 [Apply] ................................................................................................... 5-6 [Help]..................................................................................................... 5-6 [Favorite Setting]................................................................................... 5-6 [Printer View]......................................................................................... 5-7 [Paper View].......................................................................................... 5-7 [Quality View] ........................................................................................ 5-7 [Printer Information] .............................................................................. 5-7 [Default]................................................................................................. 5-7 [Advanced] Tab (PostScript Printer Driver Only)......................................... 5-7 [My Tab] ...................................................................................................... 5-8 [Basic] Tab .................................................................................................. 5-8 [Layout] Tab ................................................................................................ 5-9 [Cover Mode] Tab ....................................................................................... 5-9 [Stamp/Composition] Tab............................................................................ 5-9 [Quality] Tab.............................................................................................. 5-10 [Other] Tab................................................................................................ 5-11 Limitations on printer driver functions installed with Point and Print ......... 5-11 6 Proof Print, External memory and ID & Print functions ............................. 6-1 Proof Print ...................................................................................................... 6-2 Printing a job saved on the hard disk.......................................................... 6-2 Deleting a job saved on the hard disk......................................................... 6-2Contents x-11 External Memory ............................................................................................ 6-3 Printing from a connected USB memory device ......................................... 6-3 Selecting the type of files to be displayed................................................... 6-4 ID & Print ........................................................................................................ 6-4 Printing simultaneously with log-in........................................................ 6-4 Specifying a job to print......................................................................... 6-4 Deleting a job........................................................................................ 6-5 7 Performing Copy mode operations .............................................................. 7-1 Basic copy operation .................................................................................... 7-2 [Original Size] ................................................................................................. 7-4 Documents of mixed page sizes ................................................................. 7-4 [Paper] ............................................................................................................ 7-5 [Zoom] ............................................................................................................. 7-6 [Duplex/Combine] .......................................................................................... 7-7 [Density] ......................................................................................................... 7-8 [Original Type] ............................................................................................... 7-9 [Color Mode] ................................................................................................... 7-9 [Finishing] .................................................................................................... 7-10 [Proof Copy] ................................................................................................. 7-10 Proof Copy operation ................................................................................ 7-10 [Separate Scan] ............................................................................................ 7-11 Scanning the document in separate batches............................................ 7-12 [ID Copy] ....................................................................................................... 7-13 [Paper Margin] .............................................................................................. 7-14 [Image Quality] ............................................................................................. 7-15 8 Additional copy operations .......................................................................... 8-1 Interrupting a copy job .................................................................................. 8-2 Copy programs .............................................................................................. 8-3 Storing a copy program............................................................................... 8-3 Deleting a copy program............................................................................. 8-3 Copying using stored settings (copy programs).......................................... 8-4 9 Scanning From a Computer Application ..................................................... 9-1 Basic Scanning Operation ............................................................................ 9-2 Windows TWAIN Driver Settings .................................................................. 9-3 Mode settings.............................................................................................. 9-3 When [Basic Mode] is selected................................................................... 9-3 When [Advanced Mode] is selected............................................................ 9-4 Windows WIA Driver Settings ...................................................................... 9-7 Macintosh TWAIN Driver Settings ................................................................ 9-8 Mode settings.............................................................................................. 9-8 When [Basic Mode] is selected................................................................... 9-8 When [Advanced Mode] is selected............................................................ 9-9x-12 Contents Using a Web Service ................................................................................... 9-12 Settings required to use a Web Service.................................................... 9-12 Installing this machine on the computer.................................................... 9-12 Confirmation before installation .......................................................... 9-12 Installation procedure.......................................................................... 9-12 Specifying the scan command from a computer (Web Service) ............... 9-13 Specifying the scan command from a computer................................. 9-13 10 Scanning with the machine ........................................................................ 10-1 Initial settings ............................................................................................... 10-2 Useful functions ........................................................................................... 10-2 Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations ............................................ 10-3 Basic Scan to E-mail operation................................................................. 10-3 Specifying document settings ................................................................... 10-4 [Simplex/Duplex] ................................................................................. 10-4 [Original Size]...................................................................................... 10-5 [Original Settings] - [Separate Scan]................................................... 10-5 [Original Settings] - [Original Direction]............................................... 10-6 [Original Settings] - [Orig. Binding Position]........................................ 10-6 [Color Mode] ....................................................................................... 10-7 [Original Type]..................................................................................... 10-7 Specifying scan settings............................................................................ 10-8 [Background/Density].......................................................................... 10-8 [Resolution] ......................................................................................... 10-8 [File Settings] - [File Type] .................................................................. 10-9 [File Settings] - [Scan Setting]............................................................. 10-9 [File Settings] - [PDF Encrypt]........................................................... 10-10 Specifying communication settings......................................................... 10-12 [Binary Division] ................................................................................ 10-12 [E-mail Encryption]............................................................................ 10-12 [Send Use Signature]........................................................................ 10-12 [E-mail].............................................................................................. 10-13 Specifying destinations ............................................................................ 10-14 Selecting from registered destinations.................................................... 10-14 Selecting from the Favorites list........................................................ 10-14 Selecting with an index search ......................................................... 10-15 Selecting by searching for a destination type or name ..................... 10-15 Directly typing in the address.................................................................. 10-16 Selecting from the log ............................................................................. 10-16 Selecting a program destination.............................................................. 10-17 Performing Scan to Folder mode operations .......................................... 10-18 Basic Scan to Folder operation............................................................... 10-18 Specifying document settings ................................................................. 10-20 [Simplex/Duplex] ............................................................................... 10-20 [Original Size].................................................................................... 10-20 [Original Settings] - [Separate Scan]................................................. 10-21Contents x-13 [Original Settings] - [Original Direction]............................................. 10-21 [Original Settings] - [Orig. Binding Position]...................................... 10-22 [Color Mode] ..................................................................................... 10-22 [Original Type]................................................................................... 10-23 Specifying scan settings.......................................................................... 10-23 [Background/Density]........................................................................ 10-23 [Resolution] ....................................................................................... 10-24 [File Settings] - [File Type] ................................................................ 10-24 [File Settings] - [Scan Setting]........................................................... 10-25 [File Settings] - [PDF Encrypt]........................................................... 10-25 Specifying the document name............................................................... 10-26 Specifying communication settings......................................................... 10-27 [URL Notification] .............................................................................. 10-27 [URL Notification Destination] ........................................................... 10-27 Specifying destinations ............................................................................ 10-27 Selecting from registered destinations.................................................... 10-27 Selecting from the Favorites list........................................................ 10-28 Selecting with an index search ......................................................... 10-28 Selecting by searching for a destination type or name ..................... 10-28 Directly typing in the address.................................................................. 10-29 With [FTP] ......................................................................................... 10-29 With [PC(SMB)]................................................................................. 10-29 With [WebDAV] ................................................................................. 10-30 With [USB Memory] .......................................................................... 10-30 With [HDD] ........................................................................................ 10-31 With [Web Service Settings] ............................................................. 10-32 Selecting from the log ............................................................................. 10-32 Selecting a program destination.............................................................. 10-33 Registering destinations ........................................................................... 10-34 Destination registration ........................................................................... 10-34 Address Book.................................................................................... 10-34 Group ................................................................................................ 10-34 Program ............................................................................................ 10-34 Registering an address book destination................................................ 10-35 Registering an address book destination (E-mail transmission) ....... 10-35 Registering Address Book (SMB transmission) ...................................... 10-36 Registering a program destination .......................................................... 10-37 11 Replacing Consumables ............................................................................. 11-1 Replacing Consumables ............................................................................. 11-2 About Toner Cartridges............................................................................. 11-2 Replacing a Toner Cartridge..................................................................... 11-4 Replacing a Imaging Unit.......................................................................... 11-9 Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle .......................................................... 11-17 Replacing the Transfer Roller ................................................................. 11-20 Replacing the Transfer Belt Unit ............................................................. 11-22x-14 Contents Replacing the Backup Battery................................................................. 11-30 Replacing the Fuser Unit......................................................................... 11-33 Antistatic Protection .................................................................................. 11-38 12 Maintenance ................................................................................................. 12-1 Maintaining the machine ............................................................................. 12-2 Cleaning the machine .................................................................................. 12-4 Exterior...................................................................................................... 12-4 Media Rollers ............................................................................................ 12-5 Cleaning the Media Feed Rollers (Manual Feed Tray) ....................... 12-5 Cleaning the Media Feed Rollers for Tray 2/3/4 ................................. 12-7 Cleaning the Media Transfer Rollers for Tray 3/4 ............................... 12-8 Cleaning the Media Feed Rollers for the ADF .................................... 12-9 Cleaning the Laser Lens ......................................................................... 12-10 13 Troubleshooting .......................................................................................... 13-1 Introduction .................................................................................................. 13-2 Printing a configuration page ..................................................................... 13-2 Unlocking the Scanner ................................................................................ 13-3 Preventing Media Misfeeds ......................................................................... 13-4 Understanding the Media Path ................................................................... 13-5 Clearing Media Misfeeds ............................................................................. 13-6 Media misfeed indications......................................................................... 13-6 Clearing a Media Misfeed in Tray 2 .................................................... 13-7 Clearing a Media Misfeed in Tray 3/4 ............................................... 13-11 Clearing a Media Misfeed from the ADF........................................... 13-13 Clearing a Media Misfeed from the Duplex....................................... 13-15 Clearing a Media Misfeed from the Fuser Unit ................................. 13-16 Clearing a Media Misfeed from Tray 1 (Manual Feed Tray) and Transfer Roller .................................................................................. 13-20 Solving Problems with Media Misfeeds ................................................... 13-23 Solving Other Problems ............................................................................ 13-26 Solving Problems with Printing Quality .................................................. 13-31 Status, error and service messages ........................................................ 13-38 Status messages..................................................................................... 13-38 Error messages....................................................................................... 13-39 Warning messages ........................................................................... 13-39 Operator messages .......................................................................... 13-41 Service messages................................................................................... 13-47 14 Installing Accessories ................................................................................. 14-1 Introduction .................................................................................................. 14-2 Lower Feeder Unit PF-P08 .......................................................................... 14-3 Kit Contents............................................................................................... 14-3 Installing a Lower Feeder Unit PF-P08 ..................................................... 14-4Contents x-15 Working Table WT-P01 ................................................................................ 14-6 Kit Contents............................................................................................... 14-6 Installing a Working Table WT-P01........................................................... 14-7 15 Authentication device (IC card type) ......................................................... 15-1 Using authentication device (IC card type) ............................................... 15-2 Configuring this machine ........................................................................... 15-2 Registering a user ....................................................................................... 15-4 Registering a user using Data Administrator............................................. 15-4 Checking the version of the installed Data Administrator.......................... 15-4 Setup......................................................................................................... 15-5 User registration...................................................................................... 15-10 Associating the user with card using authentication device.................... 15-15 Logging in to this machine ....................................................................... 15-15 When [Card Authentication] is enabled................................................... 15-16 When [Card Authentication + Password] is enabled............................... 15-16 A Appendix ........................................................................................................A-1 Technical specifications ...............................................................................A-2 Consumable Life Expectancy Chart............................................................A-6 User-Replaceable .................................................................................A-6 Service-Replaceable.............................................................................A-7 Text input ........................................................................................................A-8 Entering text................................................................................................A-8 Our Concern for Environmental Protection ................................................A-9 What is an ENERGY STAR product? ...................................................A-9x-16 Contents1Introduction1-2 Getting Acquainted with Your Machine Getting Acquainted with Your Machine Space Requirements To ensure easy operation, consumable replacement and maintenance, adhere to the recommended space requirements detailed below. Side View Front View 1068 mm (42.0") 100 mm (3.9") 150 mm (5.9") 530 mm (20.9") 288 mm (11.3") 937 mm (36.9") 70 mm (2.8") 508 mm (20.0") 776 mm (30.6") 359 mm (14.1") 226 mm (8.9") 550 mm (21.7")Getting Acquainted with Your Machine 1-3 " The option appears shaded in the above illustrations. Side View with Options 954 mm (37.6") 70 mm (2.8") 508 mm (20.0") 1009 mm (39.7") 359 mm (14.1") 226 mm (8.9") 550 mm (21.7") 376 mm (14.8") 233 mm (9.2")1-4 Getting Acquainted with Your Machine Part Names The following drawings illustrate the parts of your machine referred to throughout this guide, so please take some time to become familiar with them. Front View 1—Control panel 2—Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) 2-a: ADF feed cover 2-b: Document guide 2-c: Document feed tray 2-d: Document output tray 2-e: Document stopper " Lower the document stopper when scanning Legal-size paper with the ADF. 3—USB HOST port " A USB hub can be connected to the USB HOST port. In addition, a USB memory device and an authentication device (IC card type) can be connected to the USB hub at the same time. 4—Tray 1 (Manual feed tray) 5—Tray 2 6—Output tray 7—Scanner lock lever 8—Original glass 9—Original cover pad 10—Scanner unit 10 9 6 7 8 4 3 2-e 2 2-c 2-d 5 1 2-a 2-bGetting Acquainted with Your Machine 1-5 11—Fuser unit 12—Right door 13—Transfer roller 14—Transfer belt unit 15—Imaging unit(s) 16—Front cover 17—Waste toner bottle 18—Toner cartridge(s) 11 12 15 14 13 16 17 18 18 17 13 14 151-6 Getting Acquainted with Your Machine Rear View 1—Power switch 2—Rear cover 3—Power connection 4—LINE (telephone line) jack 5—TEL (telephone) jack 6—10Base-T/100Base-TX/ 1000Base-T Ethernet Interface port 7—USB port Front View with Options 1—Lower feeder unit PF-P08 (Tray 3) 2—Lower feeder unit PF-P08 (Tray 4) 3—Working Table WT-P01 1 3 2 4 6 5 7 2 1 3Getting Acquainted with Your Machine 1-7 Adjusting the angle of the control panel The control panel can be adjusted to any of three angles. Adjust the control panel to the angle that allows for easy operation. 1 Grab the sides of the control panel, and then tilt it up. " Before moving the control panel to a lower angle, tilt it up first, and then slowly tilt it down. " When tilting the control panel, do not press on the touch panel.1-8 Getting Acquainted with Your Machine Drivers CD/DVD Printer Drivers (PostScript Drivers) " A specific PPD file has been prepared for applications (such as Page Maker and Corel Draw) that require that a PPD file be specified when printing. When specifying a PPD file while printing on Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows 7, Vista, Server 2008, XP, Server 2003 and 2000, use the specific PPD file provided on the Drivers CD/DVD. Printer Drivers (PCL Drivers) Printer Drivers (XPS Drivers) Operating System Use/Benefit Windows 7/Vista/Server 2008/XP/ Server 2003/2000 These drivers give you access to all of the printer features, including finishing and advanced layout. For details, refer to “Displaying Printer Driver Settings (for Windows)” on page 5-5. Windows Server 2008 R2/7/Vista/ Server 2008/XP/Server 2003 for 64bit Operating System Use/Benefit Windows 7/Vista/Server 2008/XP/ Server 2003/2000 These drivers give you access to all of the printer features, including finishing and advanced layout. For details, refer to “Displaying Printer Driver Settings (for Windows)” on page 5-5. Windows Server 2008 R2/7/ Vista/ Server 2008/XP/Server 2003 for 64bit Operating System Use/Benefit Windows 7/Vista/Server 2008 These drivers give you access to all of the printer features, including finishing and advanced layout. For details on the installation method and functions, refer to the [Reference Guide] on the Documentation CD/ DVD. Windows Server 2008 R2/7/ Vista/ Server 2008 for 64bitGetting Acquainted with Your Machine 1-9 Printer Drivers (PPD Files) Scanner Drivers PC Fax Drivers " For details on the installation of the drivers, refer to the [Installation Guide] on the Documentation CD/DVD. Operating System Use/Benefit Mac OS X (10.2.8/10.3/10.4/10.5/ 10.6) These files are required in order to use the printer driver for each operating system. For details of the Macintosh and Linux printer driver, refer to the [Reference Guide] on the Documentation CD/DVD. Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 Desktop SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10 Operating System Use/Benefit TWAIN Driver for Windows 7/Vista/ Server 2008/XP/Server 2003/2000 These drivers enable you to set scanning functions, such as the color setting and size adjustments. For details, refer to “Windows WIA Driver Settings” on page 9-7. TWAIN Driver for Mac OS X (10.3.9/ 10.4/10.5/10.6) WIA Driver for Windows 7/Vista/ Server 2008/XP This driver enables you to set scanning functions, such as the color setting and size adjustments. For details, refer to “Windows WIA Driver Settings” on page 9-7. WIA Driver for Windows 7/Vista/ Server 2008/XP for 64bit Operating System Use/Benefit Windows 7/Vista/Server 2008/XP/ Server 2003/2000 These drivers enable you to specify fax settings, such as the paper settings for sending faxes and the settings for editing the address book. For details, refer to the [Facsimile User’s Guide] on the Documentation CD/ DVD. Windows Server 2008 R2/7/Vista/ Server 2008/XP/Server 2003 for 64 bit1-10 Getting Acquainted with Your Machine " For details of the Macintosh and Linux drivers, refer to the Reference Guide on the Documentation CD/DVD. " Windows TWAIN driver does not correspond to 64-bit applications though it corresponds to 32-bit applications on 64-bit OS. Applications CD/DVD Applications Applications Use/Benefit Download Manager (Windows Server 2008 R2/7/Vista/ Server 2008/XP/Server 2003/2000, Mac OS 10.2.8/10.3/10.4/10.5/10.6) This utility enables fonts and overlay data to be downloaded to the hard disk. For details, refer to the online help for all functions of Download Manager. PageScope Net Care Device Manager Printer management functions such as status monitoring and network settings can be accessed. For details, refer to the PageScope Net Care Device Manager User’s Guide on the Applications CD/DVD. PageScope Data Administrator PageScope Data Administrator is an administration tool with which authentication data and addresses registered with the control panel of supported devices (multifunctional OA equipment) can be changed from other computers on the network. For details, refer to the PageScope Data Administrator User Manual on the Applications CD/DVD. Print Status Notifier This application notifies the user as to whether a print job has completed successfully or has encountered an error. For details, refer to the Print Status Notifier User’s Guide on the Applications CD/DVD.Getting Acquainted with Your Machine 1-11 PageScope Direct Print This application provides functions for sending PDF and TIFF files directly to a printer to be printed. For details, refer to the PageScope Direct Print User’s Guide on the Applications CD/DVD. PageScope Enterprise Suite Plug-In This plug-in provides the additional functions of PageScope Enterprise Suite, which enables centralized management of devices and permission management.1-12 Getting Acquainted with Your Machine Documentation CD/DVD Documentation Documentation Use/Benefit Installation Guide This manual provides installation details that must be performed in order to use this machine, such as setting up the machine and installing the drivers. Printer/Copier/Scanner User’s Guide (this manual) This manual provides details on general daily operations, such as using the drivers and control panel and replacing consumables. Facsimile User’s Guide This manual provides details on general fax operations, such as sending and receiving faxes and using the control panel. Reference Guide This manual provides details on installing the Macintosh and Linux drivers and on specifying settings for the network. Quick Guide This manual provides an introduction to, and illustrations for, basic machine operations and frequently used functions.Getting Acquainted with Your Machine 1-13 System Requirements „ Personal computer – Pentium 3: 400MHz or higher (Windows Vista: 1GHz or higher) – PowerPC G3 or later (G4 or later is recommended) – Macintosh equipped with an Intel processor „ Operating System – Microsoft Windows 7 Home Basic/Home Premium/Professional/Enterprise/Ultimate, Windows 7 Home Premium/Professional/Enterprise/ Ultimate, Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard/Enterprise, Windows Server 2008 Standard/Enterprise, Windows Server 2008 Standard/ Enterprise x64 Edition, Windows Vista Home Basic/Home Premium/ Ultimate/Business/Enterprise, Windows Vista Home Basic/Home Premium /Ultimate/Business /Enterprise x64 Edition, Windows XP Home Edition/Professional (Service Pack 2 or later), Windows XP Professional x64 Edition, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition, Windows 2000 (Service Pack 4 or later) – Mac OS X (10.2.8/10.3/10.4/10.5/10.6; We recommend installing the most recent patch.) – Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 Desktop, SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10 „ Free hard disk space 256 MB or more „ RAM 512 MB or more „ CD/DVD drive „ I/O interface – 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T Ethernet interface port – USB 2.0 High-Speed compliant port " The Ethernet cable and USB cable are not included with the machine. " For details of the Macintosh and Linux drivers, refer to the [Reference Guide] on the Documentation CD/DVD.1-14 Getting Acquainted with Your Machine2Control panel and touch panel screens2-2 About the Control Panel About the Control Panel No. Name Function 1 Touch panel Displays various screens and messages. Specify the various settings by directly touching the panel. 2 [Power Save] key/indicator Press to enter Power Save mode. While the machine is in Power Save mode, the indicator on the [Power Save] key lights up in green and the touch panel goes off. To cancel Power Save mode, press the [Power Save] key again. 3 [Fax] key/indicator Press to enter Fax mode. While the machine is in Fax mode, the indicator on the [Fax] key lights up in green. 4 [E-mail] key/indicator Press to enter Scan to E-mail mode. While the machine is in Scan to E-mail mode, the indicator on the [E-mail] key lights up in green. 5 [Folder] key/indicator Press to enter Scan to Folder mode. While the machine is in Scan to Folder mode, the indicator on the [Folder] key lights up in green. 6 [Copy] key/indicator Press to enter Copy mode. While the machine is in Copy mode, the indicator on the [Copy] key lights up in green. 7 [Reset] key Press to clear the settings (except programmed settings) of all displayed functions. Press to delete a job stopped during the scan operation. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 191817 16 14 15 13 121110About the Control Panel 2-3 8 [Interrupt] key/ indicator Press to enter Interrupt mode. While the machine is in Interrupt mode, the indicator on the [Interrupt] key lights up in green. To cancel Interrupt mode, press the [Interrupt] key again. 9 [Stop] key Pressing the [Stop] key while copying, scanning or printing temporarily stops the operation. 10 [Start (Color) ] key Press to start color copying, scanning or faxing. Press to continue interrupted printing. 11 [Start] indicator Lights up in blue when copying, scanning or faxing can be performed. Lights up in orange when copying, scanning or faxing cannot be performed. 12 [Start (B&W) ] key Press to start black-and-white copying, scanning or faxing. Press to continue interrupted printing. 13 Keypad Use to enter the number of copies, a fax number, an E-mail address or a name. Use to type in the various settings. 14 [C] (clear) key Press to erase numbers or text. Press to delete a job stopped during the scan operation. 15 [Error] indicator Flashes in orange if an error occurred. Lights up in orange when the service representative is being called. 16 [Data] indicator Flashes in blue while a print job is being received. Lights up in blue while printing or when a print job is queued. 17 [Utility/Counter] key Press to display the [Utility Settings] screen. From the [Utility Settings] screen, settings can be specified for the parameters in the [Accessibility], [Meter Count], [Address Registration], [User Settings] and [Admin Settings] screens. No. Name Function2-4 About the Control Panel 18 [Mode Memory] key Press to store the desired settings for copy, fax or scan operations. In addition, stored settings can be recalled. 19 [Access] key If user authentication or account track settings have been applied, press the [Access] key after entering the user name and password (for user authentication) or the account name and password (for account track) in order to log on to this machine. While logged on, press the [Access] key to log off. No. Name FunctionTouch panel screens 2-5 Touch panel screens Home screen No. Indication Description 1 Status Displays messages about the current operating status. 2 [Fax] Press to enter Fax mode. For details, refer to the [Facsimile User’s Guide]. 3 [Scan to E-mail] Press to enter Scan to E-mail mode. For details on the Scan to E-mail mode operations, refer to “Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations” on page 10-3. 4 [Scan to Folder] Press to enter Scan to Folder mode. For details on the Scan to Folder mode operations, refer to “Performing Scan to Folder mode operations” on page 10-18. 5 [Copy] Press to enter Copy mode. For details on the Copy mode operations, refer to “Performing Copy mode operations” on page 7-1. 6 Date/time Shows the current date and time. 1 10 6 9 7 8 2 3 4 52-6 Touch panel screens 7 [USB/HDD] Press to print files on a USB memory device. Press to print a print job saved on hard disk. 8 [Status] Press to view information on consumables and devices. 9 [Job] Press to check a print, transmission, reception or stored data job. 10 Toner supply indicators Shows the amount of toner remaining for yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C) and black (K). No. Indication DescriptionTouch panel screens 2-7 Initial Copy mode screen No. Indication Description 1 Number of copies Indicates the specified number of copies. 2 Copy mode operations Press to display the corresponding screen for specifying various settings. 3 [Mode Check] Press to check the currently specified copy settings. 4 Press to return to the home screen. 1 3 2 42-8 Touch panel screens Initial Scan to Folder mode screen No. Indication Description 1 [Favorites] Press to display frequently used destinations. 2 [Direct Input] Press to directly enter an address of the selected destination type. 3 [Log] Press to specify a destination from the log. 4 [Mode Check] Press to check the currently specified Scan to Folder mode settings. 5 [Settings] Press to specify settings such as the document scanning method. 6 Press to return to the home screen. 5 4 1 2 3 6Touch panel screens 2-9 Initial Scan to E-mail mode screen Initial Fax mode screen For details on the initial Fax mode screen, refer to the [Facsimile User’s Guide]. No. Indication Description 1 [Favorites] Press to display frequently used destinations. 2 [Direct Input] Press to directly enter a destination address. 3 [Log] Press to specify a destination from the log. 4 [Mode Check] Press to check the currently specified Scan to E-mail mode settings. 5 [Settings] Press to specify settings such as the document scanning method. 6 Press to return to the home screen. 5 4 1 2 3 62-10 Touch panel screens Job screen No. Indication Description 1 [Print] Press to display a screen listing the print jobs. 2 [Send] Press to display a screen listing the transmission jobs. 3 [Receive] Press to display a screen listing the reception jobs. 4 [Active]/[Log] Press to display screens listing the jobs currently being performed or the job log. 5 Job list Displays the list of jobs. The job number, user name and job status can be checked. 6 [Delete] Press to delete the selected job. Next, press [Yes], then [OK]. "When the job log is displayed, [Details] appears. To view job details, press [Details]. 7 Press to return to the home screen. 1 4 2 3 6 5 7Touch panel screens 2-11 Status screen No. Indication Description 1 [Consumables] Press to display a screen showing the status of consumables. "The percentages remaining for the consumables may be different from the actual amounts and should be used only as reference. 2 [Device info.] Press to display a screen showing the information of devices. 3 Press to return to the home screen. 2 3 12-12 Touch panel screens USB/HDD screen " For details on the Proof Print function, refer to “Proof Print” on page 6-2. " For details on the External Memory Print function, refer to “External Memory” on page 6-3. " For details on the ID & Print function, refer to “ID & Print” on page 6-4. No. Indication Description 1 [Proof Print] Press to print a print job saved on hard disk. [User Name] Select a user. 2 [External Memory] Press to print files on a USB memory device. [File List] Select the file to be printed. In addition, print settings can be specified. [File Type] Select the type of files to be displayed. 3 [ID & Print] Press to print a print job sent as a registered user or public user. [Login User] Press to display and print a job of the user who is currently logged in. [Public User] Press to display and print a job of a public user. 4 Press to return to the home screen. 1 2 3 4Touch panel screens 2-13 Keys and icons that appear in the screens Icon Description If the screen has multiple pages, press [ ] or [ ] to select a different page. If values appear between [ ] and [ ], the current page number/total number of pages is indicated. If there are tabs that are not displayed, press [ ] or [ ] to select a different tab. Press to adjust the image quality during a copy, scan or fax operation. Press [+] or [-] to change the entered value. Press to view the error message when an error occurs. Press to display descriptions of the various functions. A description of the current screen will be displayed. Press to display the address book. From this screen, you can select single destinations and group destinations registered in the address book. Press to return to the home screen. Appears while scanning and printing when making copies. Appears while scanning with fax transmission and scanning operations.2-14 Touch panel screens Appears while printing with PC printing, received fax printing and report printing. Appears when using a G3 fax connection. Appears when there are documents queued for a timer transmission. Appears when there are fax documents received with memory reception or PC faxing. Appears when data or documents are being sent from this unit. Appears when this unit is receiving data or documents. Appears when enhanced security settings have been applied. Appears when a USB memory device is connected. Icon DescriptionUser authentication and account track 2-15 User authentication and account track If user authentication or account track settings have been specified on the machine, the user name or account name and the password must be entered in the Login screen in order to log on. The following procedures describe how to log on when user authentication or account track settings have been specified. " User authentication and account track settings are specified from PageScope Web Connection. For details, refer to the [Reference Guide]. With user authentication Device authentication 1 Specify a name and password for [User Name] and [Password]. – For [User Name], the name can be specified either by directly typing it in or selecting from a list. 2 Press [Login]. If authentication was successful, the functions of this machine can be used. External server authentication 1 Specify a name and password for [User Name] and [Password]. – For [User Name], the name can be specified either by directly typing it in or selecting from a list. 2 Specify a server for [Server]. 3 Press [Login]. If authentication was successful, the functions of this machine can be used. " If account track settings have been applied, account track will be performed after [Login] is pressed. However, if the machine has been set to synchronize user authentication and account track and an account had been specified for the user who is logging on, account track will not be performed. For details, refer to the [Reference Guide].2-16 User authentication and account track Logging in using the authentication device The following describes how to log in to this machine with IC card authentication. „ To perform IC card authentication, register the information recorded in the IC card in advance. „ If an authentication failure recurs, the problem may be due to incorrect registration of IC card information. Register IC card information again. „ Press [Device Authentication] to log in by specifying the user name and password for [User Name] and [Password], without using the authentication device. 1 Press [Card Authentication]. 2 Press [Access Basic Screen]. – For ID & Print jobs, press [Begin Printing] to authenticate the user and start printing. 3 Place the IC card on the authentication device. " For details on how to register an IC card for the user, refer to “Authentication device (IC card type)” on page 15-1. With account track 1 Specify an account and password for [Account] and [Password]. 2 Press [Login]. If authentication was successful, the functions of this machine can be used.3Utility Settings3-2 [Accessibility] [Accessibility] From the [Accessibility] screen, various settings can be specified for the displayed screens and the operation of control panel keys. Invalid Input Sound Input Confirmation Sound Key Repeat/ Interval Sound Set- Set All tings Accessibility Time to Start Enable Enable Key Interval Volume Operation Confirmation Volume Enable Volume Enable Volume Operation Completion Successful Enable Completion Volume Transmission Completion Enable Volume Basic Sound[Accessibility] 3-3 Low Caution Sound (Level 2) Low Caution Sound (Level 1) Completion Preparation Touch Panel Adujstment Message Display Time Enable Enable Volume Caution Sound Volume Enable Volume Enable Volume Severe Caution Sound Enable Volume Low Caution Sound (Level 3) LCD Brightness3-4 [Accessibility] 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Press [Accessibility]. " All factory default values are shown in bold. Item Description [Key Repeat /Interval] The length of time until the value begins to change after a button is held down and the length of time for the value to change can be specified. [Time to Start] Settings 0.1 to 3.0 seconds (Default:0.8) Specify the length of time until a value begins to change after a button is held down. [Key Interval] Settings 0.1 to 3.0 seconds (Default:0.3) Specify the length of time for the value to change. [Sound Settings] Settings can be specified for the various sounds produced with key operations. [Set all] Settings Enable: [ON] / [OFF] Volume: [Low] / [Medium] / [High] To specify that sounds be produced, press [Enable], and then press [ON]. To adjust the volume, press [Volume], and then press [Low], [Medium] or [High]. To specify that sounds not be produced, press [Enable], and then press [OFF]. [Operation Confirmation] Select if confirmation sounds are to be produced with key operations. [Input Confirmation Sound] Settings Enable : [ON] / [OFF] Volume : [Low] / [Medium] / [High] Select whether sounds are produced when keys are pressed to enter data. [Invalid Input Sound] Settings Enable : [ON] / [OFF] Volume : [Low] / [Medium] / [High] Select whether sounds are produced when keys are pressed to enter invalid data. [Basic Sound] Settings Enable : [ON] / [OFF] Volume : [Low] / [Medium] / [High] Select whether sounds are produced when the default setting is selected while scrolling through the settings.[Accessibility] 3-5 [Successful Completion] Select if sounds are to be produced when an operation or communication is completed successfully. [Operation Completion] Settings Enable : [ON] / [OFF] Volume : [Low] / [Medium] / [High] Select whether sounds are produced when an operation is completed successfully. [Transmission Completion] Settings Enable : [ON] / [OFF] Volume : [Low] / [Medium] / [High] Select whether sounds are produced when a communication is completed successfully. [Completion Preparation] Settings Enable : [ON] / [OFF] Volume : [Low] / [Medium] / [High] Select if sounds are to be produced when machine preparations are finished. [Caution Sound] Select if sounds are to be produced when cautions occur. [Low Caution Sound (Level 1)] Settings Enable : [ON] / [OFF] Volume : [Low] / [Medium] / [High] Select whether sounds are produced when a message appears in the touch panel, warning that it is almost time to replace consumables or a replaceable part. [Low Caution Sound (Level 2)] Settings Enable : [ON] / [OFF] Volume : [Low] / [Medium] / [High] Select whether sounds are produced when the user performs an incorrect operation. [Low Caution Sound (Level 3)] Settings Enable : [ON] / [OFF] Volume : [Low] / [Medium] / [High] Select whether sounds are produced when an error occurs that can be corrected by the user by referring to the message that appeared or the User’s Guide. [Severe Caution Sound] Settings Enable : [ON] / [OFF] Volume : [Low] / [Medium] / [High] Select whether sounds are produced when an error occurs that cannot be corrected by the user or requires a service representative.3-6 [Accessibility] [Touch Panel Adujstment] If the touch panel buttons do not respond correctly, the position of buttons in the touch panel may not be correctly aligned with the position of the actual touch sensor and may need to be adjusted. „ Press the four check points ([+]) in the touch panel adjustment screen, making sure that a sound is produced with each, and then press the [Start] key. „ The check points ([+]) can be pressed in any order. „ To reset the adjustment, press the [C] key, and then press the four check points ([+]) again. „ To cancel the touch panel adjustment, press the [Stop] key. „ If the touch panel cannot be adjusted, contact the service representative. [Message Display Time] Settings [3 sec.] / [5 sec.] Specify the length of time for displaying warning messages, which appear, for example, when an incorrect operation is performed. [LCD Brightness] Settings -3 to 3 (Default: 0) Adjust the contrast of the touch panel.[Meter Count] 3-7 [Meter Count] From the [Meter Count] screen, the page count for each function and the total page count can be viewed. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Press [Meter Count]. 3 Press [ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ] to display the desired information. Item Description [Total] Displays the total page count for each operation mode. [Copy] Displays the page count for copy operations. [Print] Displays the page count for print operations. [Scan] Displays the page count for scan operations. [Fax] Displays the page count for fax operations. Scan Total Print Copy Meter Count Fax3-8 [Address Registration] [Address Registration] From the [Address Registration] screen, E-mail and fax destinations can be registered and viewed. 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Press [Address Registration]. " [Address Registration] does not appear if only account track settings have been specified and no user is logged on with an account. Item Description [E-mail] Destinations for E-mail transmissions can be registered and viewed. For details on registering, refer to “Registering an address book destination” on page 10-35. [Mode Check] Press to view the details for the selected destination. [New] Press to register a new destination. Specify settings for [No.], [Name], [E-mail], [Favorites] and [Index]. Fax Address Registration E-mail Mode Check New Mode Check New SMB Mode Check New[Address Registration] 3-9 [Fax] Fax destinations can be registered and viewed. For details on registering, refer to the [Facsimile User’s Guide]. [Mode Check] Press to view the details for the selected destination. [New] Press to register a new destination. Specify settings for [No.], [Name], [Fax number], [Favorites], [Index] and [Line Settings]. [SMB] Destinations for SMB transmissions can be registered and viewed. For details on registering, refer to “Registering an address book destination” on page 10-35. [Mode Check] Press to view the details for the selected destination. [New] Press to register a new destination. Specify settings for [No.], [Name], [Connection] ([Host Name], [File Path], [User ID], [Password]), [Favorites] and [Index]. Item Description3-10 [User Settings] [User Settings] From the [User Settings] screen, various settings are available to be changed by the user. Machine Settings Paper Tray Settings Copy Settings User Settings Language Auto Tray Switch Tray 1 Measurement Unit Setting Enable ATS/ APS ACS Level Tray 2 Tray 3 Default Copy Settings Auto Zoom for Combine Separate Scan Output Method Tray 4 Scan to E-mail Default Tab Fax Default Tab Scan to Folder Default Tab[User Settings] 3-11 Scan Settings Default Scan Settings Print Settings JPEG Compression Level Paper Tray Settings Paper Size Black Compression Level Default Tray Custom Size Paper Settings Tray 1 Tray 2 Duplex Tray 3 Copies Collate Auto Tray Switching Paper Type Paper Size Custom Size Paper Type Paper Size Paper Type Tray 4 Paper Size Paper Type3-12 [User Settings] Tray Mapping Mode Logical Tray 0 Logical Tray 3 Logical Tray 4 Tray Mapping Logical Tray 1 Logical Tray 2 Logical Tray 5 Logical Tray 6 Logical Tray 7 Logical Tray 8 Logical Tray 9 Print Reports Statistics Page PS Font List PCL Configuration Page HDD Directory List Counter List Print[User Settings] 3-13 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Press [User Settings]. " [User Settings] is not displayed when the job log is full. [Machine Settings] " All factory default values are shown in bold. Item Description [Language] Settings [English] / [French] / [Italian] / [German] / [Spanish] / [Portuguese] / [Hangul] / [Simplified Chinese] / [Traditional Chinese] / [Czech] / [Hungarian] / [Polish] / [Slovak] / [Russian] / [Dutch] / [Danish] / [Norwegian] / [Swedish] / [Finnish] / [Greek] / [Turkish] / [Catalan] / [Japanese] Specify the language for the screens that appear in the touch panel. [Measurement Unit Setting] Settings [Inch] / [mm] Select the measurement units for the values that appear in the touch panel screens. "The default setting is [Inch] for 120V model, and [mm] for other models. Fax Settings Default Fax Settings Remote RX Enabled Remote RX No. Display Fax Activity Fax RX Fax TX3-14 [User Settings] [Paper Tray Settings] Specify paper tray settings. [Auto Tray Switch] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not a paper tray loaded with paper of the same size is selected automatically when a paper tray that was selected manually becomes empty while printing copies. [Enable ATS/APS] Specify the paper trays that are selected when the paper tray is automatically changed. "[Tray 3] and [Tray 4] do not appear if the optional lower feeder units have not been installed. [Tray 1] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not [Tray 1] can be selected with the automatic tray-switching feature. [Tray 2] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not [Tray 2] can be selected with the automatic tray-switching feature. [Tray 3] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not [Tray 3] can be selected with the automatic tray-switching feature. [Tray 4] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not [Tray 4] can be selected with the automatic tray-switching feature. [ACS Level] Settings 0 to 4 (Default: 2) Adjust the level for detecting whether a document is in color or in black and white when the [Auto] Color setting is selected.Set to [0] or [1] for a tendency toward black and white, or set to [3] or [4] for a tendency toward color. [Scan to E-mail Default Tab] Settings [Favorites] / [Direct Input] / [Log] Specify the initial screen when changing to the E-mail transmission screen. [Fax Default Tab] Settings [Favorites] / [Direct Input] / [Others] Specify the initial screen when changing to the fax transmission screen.[User Settings] 3-15 [Copy Settings] " All factory default values are shown in bold. [Scan to Folder Default Tab] Settings [Favorites] / [Direct Input] / [Log] Specify the initial screen when changing to the folder transmission screen. Item Description [Auto Zoom for Combine] Settings [Yes] / [No] Select whether or not the zoom ratio is automatically adjusted when the [Auto] Paper setting and a Combine setting are selected. [Default Copy Settings] Settings [Factory Default] / [Current Setting] Select the default copy settings that are selected when the machine is turned on or the [Reset] key is pressed. [Factory Default]: The manufacturer’s default settings are used as the default settings. [Current Setting]: The currently specified settings are used as the default settings. [Separate Scan Output Method] Settings [Batch Print] / [Page Print] Select whether or not printing begins after all document pages have been scanned when the document is divided and the batches are separately loaded into the ADF or when the original glass is being used to scan a document containing multiple pages. [Batch Print]: Printing begins after all pages of the document have been scanned. [Page Print]: Printing of pages that can be printed begins while the document is being scanned.3-16 [User Settings] [Scan Settings] " All factory default values are shown in bold. Item Description [JPEG Compression Level] Settings [High Quality] / [Standard] / [High Compression] Select the compression method for saving an image in full color. [High Quality]: The data size will become large, but the image quality will be high. [Standard]: Both the data size and image quality will be between those of [High Quality] and [High Compression]. [High Compression]: The data size will become small, but the image quality will be low. [Black Compression Level] Settings [MH] / [MMR] Select this machine’s transmission quality when sending data with the TIFF file format selected. [MH]: The data size will become large. [MMR]: The data size will become small. [Default Scan Settings] Settings [Factory Default] / [Current Setting] Select the default scan settings that are selected when the machine is turned on or the [Reset] key is pressed. [Factory Default]: The manufacturer’s default settings are used as the default settings. [Current Setting]: The currently specified settings are used as the default settings.[User Settings] 3-17 [Print Settings] " All factory default values are shown in bold. Item Description [Paper Settings] Specify settings for the paper and paper trays. [Paper Tray Settings] Specify settings for the paper trays. [Default Tray] Settings [Tray 1] / [Tray 2] / [Tray 3] / [Tray 4] Select the paper tray that is given priority. "[Tray 3] and [Tray 4] do not appear if the optional lower feeder units have not been installed. [Tray 1]-[Tray 4] Specify the default settings for [Tray 1] through [Tray 4]. "[Tray 3] and [Tray 4] do not appear if the optional lower feeder units have not been installed.3-18 [User Settings] [Paper Size] Settings [Any] / [Letter] / [Legal] / [Executive] / [A4] / [A5] / [A6] / [B5 (JIS)] / [B6] / [Govt Letter] / [Statement] / [Folio] / [SP Folio] / [UK Quarto] / [Foolscap] / [Govt Legal] / [16K] / [4×6] / [Kai 16] / [Kai 32] / [Env C6] / [Env DL] / [Env Monarch] / [Env Chou#3] / [Env Chou#4] / [B5 (ISO)] / [Env #10] / [J Postcard] / [J Postcard-D] / [8 1/8×13 1/4] / [8 1/ 2×13 1/2] / [Custom Size] Select the size of paper loaded in the selected tray. "The default setting is [Letter] for 120V model, and [A4] for other models. "Depending on the setting selected for [User Settings] - [Machine Settings] - [Measurement Unit Setting], 4 × 6 may change to 10 × 15 cm. "With [Tray 2], [Env C6], [Env DL], [Env Monarch], [Env Chou#3], [Env Chou#4], [B5 (ISO)], [Env #10] do not appear. "With [Tray 3] and [Tray 4], only [Letter], [Legal], [Govt Legal], [Executive], [A4] and [B5 (JIS)] appear. [Custom Size] Press [Width] and [Length], and then type in the paper size. "These settings can be specified if [Paper Size] is set to [Custom]. "Settings for [Custom Size] cannot be specified for [Tray 3] and [Tray 4].[User Settings] 3-19 [Paper Type] Settings [Any] / [Plain Paper] / [Recycled] / [Thick 1] / [Thick 2] / [Label] / [Envelope] / [Postcard] / [Letterhead] / [Glossy 1] / [Glossy 2] / [1 Side Only] / [Special Paper] Select the type of paper loaded in the selected tray. "[Envelope] appears only with [Tray 1]. "With [Tray 3] and [Tray 4], only [Any], [Plain Paper], [Recycled], [1 Side Only] and [Special Paper] appear. [Duplex] Settings [OFF] / [Long Edge] / [Short Edge] Select whether pages are printed double-sided. If [Long Edge] is selected, the pages will be printed on both sides of the paper for long-edge binding. If [Short Edge] is selected, the pages will be printed on both sides of the paper for short-edge binding. [Copies] Settings 1 to 9999 (Default: 1) Specify the number of copies to be printed. [Collate] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not to enable collated (sort) printing. [Auto Tray Switching] Settings [ON] / [OFF] If [ON] is selected and the specified tray runs out of paper during printing, a tray loaded with paper of the same size is automatically selected so printing can continue. If [OFF] is selected and the specified tray runs out of paper, printing stops.3-20 [User Settings] [Fax Settings] Specify the fax settings. For details on specifying the fax settings, refer to the [Facsimile User’s Guide]. [Select Default Start App] This screen appears when an available application is registered while Enhanced Server Authentication is enabled. [Tray Mapping] Specify the Tray Mapping settings. [Tray Mapping Mode] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not the Tray Mapping function is used. [Logical Tray 0]- [Logical Tray 9] Settings [Physical Tray 1] / [Physical Tray 2] / [Physical Tray 3] "For [Logical Tray 1], the default value is [Physical Tray 1]. Select the tray that is used for printing when a print job is received from another manufacturer’s printer driver. [Print Reports] Specify settings for printing the various reports. [Configuration Page] Prints information and status of this machine. [Statistics Page] Prints the statistics page. [Font List] Prints the font list. [PS] Prints the PostScript font list. [PCL] Prints the PCL font list. [HDD Directory List] Prints the directory list for the hard disk. [Counter List Print] Prints the list of counters.[Admin Settings] 3-21 [Admin Settings] From the Admin Settings screen, various settings are available to be changed by the machine administrator. In order to display the Admin Settings screen, the user must log on using the administrator password. Administrator Registration Administrator Registration Extension No. E-mail Address Auto Reset Settings Enable Auto Reset Priority Mode Machine Settings Date & Time Settings Admin Settings Date (XX.XX.XX) Sleep Time Setting Time Daylight Saving Time List/Counter Report Input Tray Time Zone Enable Job Settings List Name Offset3-22 [Admin Settings] Address Registration Address Book Address Book Fax E-mail List Output Number of Addresses List Output FTP Start Number Number of Addresses List Output WebDAV Start Number Number of Addresses List Output Start Number Number of Addresses Start Number SMB Start Number Number of Addresses List Output Machine Settings Device Name Address[Admin Settings] 3-23 Program Fax E-mail FTP Group Start Number Number of Addresses List Output Start Number Number of Addresses List Output Start Number Number of Addresses List Output Start Number Number of Addresses List Output Internet Fax Start Number Number of Addresses List Output3-24 [Admin Settings] WebDAV Start Number Number of Addresses List Output SMB Address Book Start Number Number of Addresses List Output Start Number Number of Addresses List Output Group Address Start Number Number of Addresses List Output Internet Fax Start Number Number of Addresses List Output[Admin Settings] 3-25 Ethernet TCP/IP Enable BOOTP ARP/PING HTTP FTP IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway DHCP Telnet Bonjour Dynamic DNS RAW Port Enable Bidirectional IPP Authentication Setting Logout Confirmation Display User List Display Setting Card Authentication3-26 [Admin Settings] SNMP IPv6 WSD Print IPSec IP Address Filter Netware AppleTalk Network Speed Binary Division IEEE802. 1X Permit Access Deny Access Enable Auto Setting Link Local Global Address Gateway Address SLP SMTP[Admin Settings] 3-27 Encryption Method Auto. Obtain Certificates S/MIME Enabled Digital Signature S/MIME Comm.Setting Print S/MIME Information Copy Settings Specify Tray When APS OFF Paper Priority Job Timeout External Memory Print Print Settings Startup Page Setting Auto Continue Paper Default Paper Paper Size Custom Size Paper Type Measurement Unit Setting Width Length3-28 [Admin Settings] Hold Job Timeout Edge Enhancement Color Mode Brightness Halftone Edge Strength Economy Print PCL Settings Text Printing Image Printing Text Printing Graphics Printing Image Printing Text Printing Graphics Printing Image Printing Quality Settings Contrast RGB Source RGB Intent RGB Gray RGB Source RGB Intent RGB Gray[Admin Settings] 3-29 Graphics Printing RGB Source RGB Intent RGB Gray PS Settings Graphics Printing Text Printing Image Printing RGB Source RGB Intent RGB Gray RGB Source RGB Intent RGB Gray Simulation Simulation Profile Sim. Intent CMYK Gray RGB Source RGB Intent RGB Gray Destination Profile Destination Profile Destination Profile3-30 [Admin Settings] Gradation Adjustment Tone Calibration Cyan Magenta Yellow Black AIDC Process CMYK Density Highlight Middle Shadow Highlight Middle Shadow Highlight Middle Shadow Highlight Middle Shadow[Admin Settings] 3-31 Emulation PCL Default Emulation CR/LF Mapping Line/Page Wait Timeout Print PS Errors PS Protocol Auto Trapping Color Separation PS Black Overprint Font Setting Font Number Pitch Size Symbol Set XPS Digital Signature Print XPS Errors Fax Settings Sender Settings Sender Sender Fax No.3-32 [Admin Settings] Header/ Footer Settings Header Position Fax TX Header Name Footer Position Comm. Settings PB/DP RX Mode Number of RX Call Rings Redial Redial Interval Line Monitor Line Monitor Volume Ring Pattern Manual RX V.34 OFF[Admin Settings] 3-33 Fax Function Settings Function Settings Inch Paper Priority Paper Priority Print Paper Size Tray Selection for RX Print Min. Reduction for RX Print Print Separate Fax Pages Duplex Print(RX) F-Code TX Dest. Check Display Func. Confirm Addr (TX) Confirm Addr (Register) Restrict Fax TX Restrict Fax RX Restrict PC-Fax TX Memory RX Memory RX Password Restrict Internet Fax RX Restrict Internet Fax TX3-34 [Admin Settings] Closed Network RX Password Enable Password Forward TX Settings Forward TX Setting Forwarding Address Forward & Print Remote RX Settings Remote RX Enabled Remote RX No. PC-Fax RX Settings PC-Fax RX Setting PC-Fax RX Print PBX Connection Settings PBX Function PBX Number Nighttime RX Settings Night Fax RX Print Night RX Start Time Night RX End Time Fax Report Activity Report TX Result Report TX Result Report Image Output Settings Output Time Setting Output Limit Setting[Admin Settings] 3-35 List Print Fax Setup Pg Broadcast Result Report TX Result Report Screen PC-Fax TX Error Report Broadcast Report TX Reserve Fax Target Fax Factory Default Fax Image initialized Maintenance Menu Event Log Halftone 64 Cyan 64 Magenta 64 Yellow 64 Black 64 Halftone 128 Cyan 128 Magenta 128 Yellow 128 Black 128 I-Fax RX Error Report Print Menu3-36 [Admin Settings] Halftone 256 Cyan 256 Magenta 256 Yellow 256 Black 256 Gradation Activity Report Scan Send Report Print Scan Event Log Printer Adjustment Leading Edge Adjustment Plain Paper Thick 1 Thick 2 Envelope Side Edge Adjustment Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4[Admin Settings] 3-37 Left ADJ Duplex Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 2nd Image Transfer Current Simplex Pass Plain Paper Thick 1 Thick 2 Postcard Envelope Label Glossy 1 Glossy 2 Manual Duplex Plain Paper Thick 1 Thick 2 Postcard Envelope Label3-38 [Admin Settings] Thick Paper Image Density Cyan Magenta Yellow Black Monochrome Density Adj. Engine DipSW 1 Engine DipSW 2 Engine DipSW 3 Engine DipSW 26 Glossy 1 Glossy 2 Fine Line ADJ AIDC Mode Thick Mode Engine DipSW Engine DipSW 27 Engine DipSW 28 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~[Admin Settings] 3-39 Yellow Magenta Main Scan Page Scan Adjust Value Main Scan Adjust Cyan Folder Settings Auto Del Interval Auto Document Delete Time Security Settings Administrator Password Security Details Password Rules Tranfer Belt Unit Transfer Roller Unit Consumables Replace Supplies Fusing Unit Document Hold Setting Registering and Changing Addr. Manual Destination lnput Hide Personal Data Disable Job History Display Restrict Scan to USB3-40 [Admin Settings] Restore Defaults Restore NetWork Restore System Mode Check HDD Capacity HDD Settings Execute Restore All Enhanced Security Mode Overwrite All Data SSD Low-level Format HDD Format User Area (Print) User Area (Scan) All Paper Empty Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 Restriction Code Settings Erase Job Log[Admin Settings] 3-41 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Press [Admin Settings]. 3 Type in the administrator password (default:12345678). " If the administrator password (default:12345678) is incorrectly entered three times, machine operations are locked. If this occurs, turn the machine off, then on again. 4 Press [OK]. [Machine Settings] " All factory default values are shown in bold. Item Description [Sleep Time Setting] Settings [5 min.] / [6 min.] / [7 min.] / [8 min.] / [9 min.] / [10 min.] / [11 min.] / [12 min.] / [13 min.] / [14 min.] / [15 min.] / [30 min.] / [1 Hour] / [3 Hours] Specify the length of time until the machine enters Power Save mode. [Date & Time Settings] Specify the date, time and time zone. [Date (XX.XX.XX)] Specify the current date. "The default setting is set in the order month, day, then year (MM.DD.YY) for 120V model, month, then year (DD.MM.YY) for 220V model (Europe), and year, month, then day (YY.MM.DD) for 220V model (Asia and China). [Time] Specify the current time. [Time Zone] Settings -12:00 to +13:00 (Default: 00:00) The time zone can be set between -12:00 and +13:00 (in 30-minute increments).3-42 [Admin Settings] [Daylight Saving Time] Specify settings for daylight saving time. [Enable] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not the machine’s internal clock observes daylight saving time. If [ON] is selected, the specified time offset from the current time appears. [Offset] Settings 1 to 150 (Default: 60) Specify the length of time applied for daylight saving time between 1 and 150 minutes (in 1-minute increments). [List/Counter] The machine settings can be printed. [Job Settings List] Settings [Print] / [Cancel] Prints the list of machine settings. [Report Input Tray] Settings [Tray 1] / [Tray 2] / [Tray 3] / [Tray 4] Select the paper tray loaded with the paper used to print reports. [Auto Reset Settings] Specify settings to automatically reset copy settings after the specified time period has lapsed. [Enable] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not to reset after the specified time period has lapsed. [Auto Reset] Settings 1 to 9 (Default: 1) Specify the time required to reset. [Priority Mode] Settings [Home] / [Copy] / [E-mail] / [Folder] / [Fax] Select the function to be displayed on the screen after resetting.[Admin Settings] 3-43 [Administrator Registration] [Address Registration] Item Description [Administrator Registration] Specify administrator information. [Name] Specify the name of the administrator. [Extension No.] Specify the extension number for the administrator. [E-mail Address] Specify the E-mail address for the administrator. "This is the From address for E-mail messages sent from this machine and the address where machine status notifications will be sent. [Machine Settings] Specify machine information. [Device Name] Specify the name of the machine. The name specified for [Device Name] will be used as the file name for scan data. [Address] Specify the E-mail address for the machine. Item Description [Address Book] The destination lists for [Address Book], [Group] and [Program] can be printed or viewed. [Address Book] Specify settings for printing the list of address book destinations. [Fax]/[E-mail]/[FTP]/ [WebDAV]/[SMB]/ [Internet Fax] [Start Number]: Specify the starting address book destination number. [Number of Addresses]: Specify the number of address book destinations. [List Output]: Prints the list of address book destinations.3-44 [Admin Settings] [Authentication Setting] " All factory default values are shown in bold. [Group] Specify settings for printing the list of group destinations. [Start Number]: Specify the starting group destination number. [Number of Addresses]: Specify the number of group destinations. [List Output]: Prints the list of group destinations. [Program] Specify settings for printing the list of program destinations. [Fax]/[E-mail]/[FTP]/ [WebDAV]/[SMB]/ [Internet Fax]/ [Address Book]/ [Group Address] [Start Number]: Specify the starting program destination number. [Number of Addresses]: Specify the number of program destinations. [List Output]: Prints the list of program destinations. Item Description [User List Display Setting] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not to display a user list. [Logout Confirmation Display] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not a logoff confirmation message appears after the [Access] key is pressed. [Card Authentication] Displayed only when the authentication device is connected, and used to register IC card information for the user. For details, refer to “Authentication device (IC card type)” on page 15-1.[Admin Settings] 3-45 [Ethernet] " All factory default values are shown in bold. Item Description [TCP/IP] Specify network settings for the machine. [Enable] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select the setting for connecting to this machine through a network. "If [OFF] is selected, the TCP/IP parameters do not appear. [IP Address] Settings [0.0.0.0] Specify the IP address used by this machine on the network. [Subnet Mask] Settings [0.0.0.0] Specify the subnet mask. [Gateway] Settings [0.0.0.0] Specify the gateway address. [DHCP] Settings [ON] / [OFF] If there is a DHCP server on the network, specify whether the IP address and other network information are automatically assigned by the DHCP server. [BOOTP] Settings [ON] / [OFF] If there is a BOOTP server on the network, specify whether the IP address and other network information are automatically assigned by the BOOTP server. [ARP/PING] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not the ARP/PING command is used when the IP address is assigned. [HTTP] Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Select whether or not to enable HTTP. [FTP] Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Select whether or not to enable the FTP server.3-46 [Admin Settings] [Telnet] Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Select whether or not to enable Telnet transmissions. [Bonjour] Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Select whether or not to enable Bonjour. [Dynamic DNS] Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Select whether or not to enable Dynamic DNS. [IPP] Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Select whether or not to enable IPP. [RAW Port] Specify the RAW port settings. [Enable] Settings [Yes] / [No] Select whether or not to enable the RAW port. [Bidirectional] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not to enable RAW port bidirectional communication. [SLP] Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Select whether or not to enable SLP. [SMTP] Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Select whether or not to enable E-mail transmission operations for this machine. [SNMP] Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Select whether or not to enable SNMP. [WSD Print] Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Select whether or not to enable WSD printing. [IPSec] Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Select whether or not to enable IPsec. [IP Address Filter] Specify IP address filtering settings. [Permit Access] Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Specify access permissions for IP address filtering. [Deny Access] Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Specify access blocking for IP address filtering.[Admin Settings] 3-47 [IPv6] Specify IPv6 settings. [Enable] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not to enable IPv6. [Auto Setting] Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Select whether or not to enable the IPv6 auto setting. [Link Local] Displays the link-local address. [Global Address] Displays the global address. [Gateway Address] Displays the gateway address. [Netware] Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Select whether or not to enable NetWare. [AppleTalk] Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Select whether or not to enable AppleTalk. [Network Speed] Settings [Auto] / [10 Mbps Full Duplex] / [10 Mbps Half Duplex] / [100 Mbps Full Duplex] / [100 Mbps Half Duplex] / [1 Gbps Full Duplex] Specifies the transmission speed for the network and the transmission method for bidirectional transmission. [IEEE802.1X] Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Select whether or not to enable IEEE802.1X. [Binary Division] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not transmission data is divided. [S/MIME Comm.Setting] Specify S/MIME communication settings. [S/MIME Enabled] Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Select whether or not to enable S/MIME. [Digital Signature] Settings [Always add signature] / [Do not add signature] / [Select when sending] Select the setting for digital signatures. [Encryption Method] Settings [RC2-40] / [RC2-64] / [RC2-128] / [DES] / [3DES] / [AES-128] / [AES-192] / [AES-256] Select the encryption method for the body of E-mail messages.3-48 [Admin Settings] [External Memory Print] [Job Timeout] [Copy Settings] " All factory default values are shown in bold. [Auto. Obtain Certificates] Settings [Yes] / [No] Select whether or not to automatically obtain certificates. [Print S/MIME Information] Settings [Yes] / [No] Select whether or not to print S/MIME information. Description Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Select whether or not to enable the External Memory Print function. Description Settings 5 to 300(Default:15) Specify the length of time until a job timeout occurs. Item Description [Specify Tray When APS OFF] Settings [Tray Before APS ON] / [Default Tray] Select which paper tray is selected when the automatic tray-switching feature (APS) is disabled. [Paper Priority] Settings [Tray 1] / [Tray 2] / [Tray 3] / [Tray 4] Specify the paper tray that is normally used. "[Tray3] and [Tray4] do not appear if the optional lower feeder units have not been installed.[Admin Settings] 3-49 [Print Settings] " All factory default values are shown in bold. Item Description [Startup Page Setting] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not a startup page is printed when the machine is turned on. [Auto Continue] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not printing continues when a size error occurs during printing.3-50 [Admin Settings] [Paper] Specify settings for the paper used for printing. [Default Paper] Specify settings for the paper that is normally used. [Paper Size] Settings [Letter] / [Legal] / [Executive] / [A4] / [A5] / [A6] / [B5 (JIS)] / [B6] / [Govt Letter] / [Statement] / [Folio] / [SP Folio] / [UK Quarto] / [Foolscap] / [Govt Legal] / [16K] / [4×6] / [Kai 16] / [Kai 32] / [Env C6] / [Env DL] / [Env Monarch] / [Env Chou#3] / [Env Chou#4] / [B5 (ISO)] / [Env#10] / [J Postcard] / [J Postcard-D] / [8 1/8×13 1/4] / [8 1/2×13 1/2] / [Custom Size] Select the paper size. "The default setting is [Letter] for USA and Canada, and [A4] for other countries. "Depending on the setting selected for [User Settings] - [Machine Settings] - [Measurement Unit Setting], 4 × 6 may change to 10 × 15 cm. [Custom Size] Press [Width] and [Length], and then type in the paper size. Setting range for Width For inches: 3.63 to 8.50 inches For millimeters: 92 to 216 mm Setting range for Length For inches: 5.83 to 14.00 inches For millimeters: 148 to 256 mm "These settings can be specified if [Paper Size] is set to [Custom Size]. [Paper Type] Settings [Plain Paper] / [Recycled] / [Thick 1] / [Thick 2] / [Label] / [Envelope] / [Postcard] / [Letterhead] / [Glossy 1] / [Glossy 2] / [1 Side Only] / [Special Paper] Select the paper type.[Admin Settings] 3-51 [Measurement Unit Setting] Settings [Inch] / [mm] Select the measurement units. [Hold Job Timeout] Settings [Disable] / [1 Hour] / [4 Hours] / [1 Day] / [1 Week] Specify the length of time until print jobs saved on the hard disk are deleted. If [Disable] is selected, print jobs are not deleted at a specific time. [Quality Settings] Specify settings for the print quality. [Color Mode] Settings [Color Mode] / [Gray Scale] [Color Mode]: The pages are printed in full color. [Gray Scale]: The pages are printed in black and white. [Brightness] Settings -15 to 15% (Default: 0%) The brightness of the printed image can be adjusted. [Halftone] Select how halftones in images, text and graphics are reproduced. [Image Printing] Settings [Line Art] / [Detail] / [Smooth] Select how halftones in images are reproduced. [Line Art]: Halftones are reproduced with high precision. [Detail]: Halftones are reproduced with detail. [Smooth]: Halftones are reproduced with smoothness. [Text Printing] Settings [Line Art] / [Detail] / [Smooth] Select how halftones in text are reproduced. [Line Art]: Halftones are reproduced with high precision. [Detail]: Halftones are reproduced with detail. [Smooth]: Halftones are reproduced with smoothness.3-52 [Admin Settings] [Graphics Printing] Settings [Line Art] / [Detail] / [Smooth] Select how halftones in graphics are reproduced. [Line Art]: Halftones are reproduced with high precision. [Detail]: Halftones are reproduced with detail. [Smooth]: Halftones are reproduced with smoothness. [Edge Enhancement] Select how edges in images, text and graphics are emphasized. [Image Printing] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether image edges are emphasized. [ON]: The edges are emphasized. [OFF]: The edges are not emphasized. [Text Printing] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether text edges are emphasized. [ON]: The edges are emphasized. [OFF]: The edges are not emphasized. [Graphics Printing] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether graphics edges are emphasized. [ON]: The edges are emphasized. [OFF]: The edges are not emphasized. [Edge Strength] Settings [OFF] / [Low] / [Middle] / [High] Select the desired amount that edges are emphasized. [OFF]: The edges are not emphasized. [Low]: The edges are slightly emphasized. [Middle]: The edges are emphasized by an average amount. [High]: The edges are highly emphasized.[Admin Settings] 3-53 [Economy Print] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether to print graphics with a reduced density by reducing the amount of toner that is used. [ON]: The amount of toner used is reduced when printing. [OFF]: The amount of toner used is not reduced when printing. [PCL Settings] Specify settings for PCL printing. [Contrast] Settings -15 to 15%(Default: 0%) The contrast of the image can be adjusted. [Image Printing] Specify settings for RGB image data. [RGB Source] Settings [Device Color] / [sRGB] Select the color space for RGB image data. If [Device Color] is selected, no color space is specified. RGB source profiles downloaded with Download Manager or PageScope Web Connection are available as RGB Source. [RGB Intent] Settings [Vivid] / [Photographic] Select the characteristic applied when converting RGB image data to CMYK data. [Vivid]: A vivid output is produced. [Photographic]: A brighter output is produced. [RGB Gray] Settings [Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK] / [Bk=K Gray=K] / [Bk=K Gray=CMYK] Select how black and grays are reproduced in RGB image data. [Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced using the CMYK colors. [Bk=K Gray=K]: Black and gray are reproduced using black only. [Bk=K Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced using only black.3-54 [Admin Settings] [Text Printing] Specify settings for RGB text data. [RGB Source] Settings [Device Color] / [sRGB] Select the color space for RGB text data. If [Device Color] is selected, no color space is specified. RGB source profiles downloaded with Download Manager or PageScope Web Connection are available as RGB Source. [RGB Intent] Settings [Vivid] / [Photographic] Select the characteristic applied when converting RGB text data to CMYK data. [Vivid]: A vivid output is produced. [Photographic]: A brighter output is produced. [RGB Gray] Settings [Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK] / [Bk=K Gray=K] / [Bk=K Gray=CMYK] Select how black and grays are reproduced in RGB text data. [Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced using the CMYK colors. [Bk=K Gray=K]: Black and gray are reproduced using black only. [Bk=K Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced using only black. [Graphics Printing] Specify settings for RGB graphics data. [RGB Source] Settings [Device Color] / [sRGB] Select the color space for RGB graphics data. If [Device Color] is selected, no color space is specified. RGB source profiles downloaded with Download Manager or PageScope Web Connection are available as RGB Source. [RGB Intent] Settings [Vivid] / [Photographic] Select the characteristic applied when converting RGB graphics data to CMYK data. [Vivid]: A vivid output is produced. [Photographic]: A brighter output is produced.[Admin Settings] 3-55 [RGB Gray] Settings [Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK] / [Bk=K Gray=K] / [Bk=K Gray=CMYK] Select how black and grays are reproduced in RGB graphics data. [Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced using the CMYK colors. [Bk=K Gray=K]: Black and gray are reproduced using black only. [Bk=K Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced using only black. [PS Settings] Specify settings for PostScript printing. [Image Printing] Specify settings for RGB image data. [RGB Source] Settings [Device Color] / [sRGB] / [AppleRGB] / [AdobeRGB1998] / [ColorMatchRGB] / [BlueAdjustRGB] Select the color space for RGB image data. If [Device Color] is selected, no color space is specified. RGB source profiles downloaded with Download Manager or PageScope Web Connection are available as RGB Source. [RGB Intent] Settings [Vivid] / [Photographic] / [Relative Color] / [Absolute Color] Select the characteristic applied when converting RGB image data to CMYK data. [Vivid]: A vivid output is produced. [Photographic]: A brighter output is produced. [Relative Color]: Relative color is applied to the RGB source profile. [Absolute Color]: Absolute color is applied to the RGB source profile.3-56 [Admin Settings] [RGB Gray] Settings [Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK] / [Bk=K Gray=K] / [Bk=K Gray=CMYK] Select how black and grays are reproduced in RGB image data. [Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced using the CMYK colors. [Bk=K Gray=K]: Black and gray are reproduced using black only. [Bk=K Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced using only black. [Destination Profile] Settings [Auto] Select the destination profile. [Auto]: A destination profile that the machine automatically adapts is selected based on a combination of the specified color matching, halftones and other profiles. Destination profiles downloaded with Download Manager or PageScope Web Connection are available as Destination Profile. [Text Printing] Specify settings for RGB text data. [RGB Source] Settings [Device Color] / [sRGB] / [AppleRGB] / [AdobeRGB1998] / [ColorMatchRGB] / [BlueAdjustRGB] Select the color space for RGB text data. If [Device Color] is selected, no color space is specified. RGB source profiles downloaded with Download Manager or PageScope Web Connection are available as RGB Source.[Admin Settings] 3-57 [RGB Intent] Settings [Vivid] / [Photographic] / [Relative Color] / [Absolute Color] Select the characteristic applied when converting RGB text data to CMYK data. [Vivid]: A vivid output is produced. [Photographic]: A brighter output is produced. [Relative Color]: Relative color is applied to the RGB source profile. [Absolute Color]: Absolute color is applied to the RGB source profile. [RGB Gray] Settings [Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK] / [Bk=K Gray=K] / [Bk=K Gray=CMYK] Select how black and grays are reproduced in RGB text data. [Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced using the CMYK colors. [Bk=K Gray=K]: Black and gray are reproduced using black only. [Bk=K Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced using only black. [Destination Profile] Settings [Auto] Select the destination profile. [Auto]: A destination profile that the machine automatically adapts is selected based on a combination of the specified color matching, halftones and other profiles. Destination profiles downloaded with Download Manager or PageScope Web Connection are available as Destination Profile.3-58 [Admin Settings] [Graphics Printing] Specify settings for RGB graphics data. [RGB Source] Settings [Device Color] / [sRGB] / [AppleRGB] / [AdobeRGB1998] / [ColorMatchRGB] / [BlueAdjustRGB] Select the color space for RGB graphics data. If [Device Color] is selected, no color space is specified. RGB source profiles downloaded with Download Manager or PageScope Web Connection are available as RGB Source. [RGB Intent] Settings [Vivid] / [Photographic] / [Relative Color] / [Absolute Color] Select the characteristic applied when converting RGB graphics data to CMYK data. [Vivid]: A vivid output is produced. [Photographic]: A brighter output is produced. [Relative Color]: Relative color is applied to the RGB source profile. [Absolute Color]: Absolute color is applied to the RGB source profile. [RGB Gray] Settings [Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK] / [Bk=K Gray=K] / [Bk=K Gray=CMYK] Select how black and grays are reproduced in RGB graphics data. [Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced using the CMYK colors. [Bk=K Gray=K]: Black and gray are reproduced using black only. [Bk=K Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced using only black.[Admin Settings] 3-59 [Destination Profile] Settings [Auto] Select the destination profile. [Auto]: A destination profile that the machine automatically adapts is selected based on a combination of the specified color matching, halftones and other profiles. Destination profiles downloaded with Download Manager or PageScope Web Connection are available as Destination Profile. [Simulation] Specify settings for the simulation profile. [Simulation Profile] Settings [NONE] / [SWOP] / [Euroscale] / [CommercialPress] / [JapanColor] / [TOYO] / [DIC] Select the simulation profile. If [NONE] is selected, no simulation profile is specified. Simulation profiles downloaded with Download Manager or PageScope Web Connection are available as Simulation Profile. [Sim. Intent] Settings [Relative Color] / [Absolute Color] Select the characteristic applied to the simulation profile. [Relative Color]: Relative color is applied to the simulation profile. [Absolute Color]: Absolute color is applied to the simulation profile. [CMYK Gray] Settings [Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK] / [Bk=K Gray=K] / [Bk=K Gray=CMYK] Select how black and grays are reproduced using the four CMYK colors. [Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced using the CMYK colors. [Bk=K Gray=K]: Black and gray are reproduced using black only. [Bk=K Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced using only black.3-60 [Admin Settings] [Gradation Adjustment] Specify settings for gradation level adjustments. [Tone Calibration] Settings [ON] / [OFF] [ON]: Image adjustments are applied. [OFF]: Image adjustments are not applied. [AIDC Process] Settings [Execute] / [Cancel] [Execute]: Image adjustments are performed immediately. [Cancel]: Image adjustments are not performed. "AIDC processing consumes toner. [CMYK Density] Specify fine adjustment settings for cyan, magenta, yellow and black. [Cyan]/ [Magenta]/ [Yellow]/ [Black] Settings -3 to 3 (Default: 0) [Highlight]: The density of the highlight color in images can be adjusted. [Middle]: The density of the middle color in images can be adjusted. [Shadow]: The density of the shadow color in images can be adjusted. [Color Separation] Settings [ON] / [OFF] [ON]: Color separation is performed. The contents of a color page is separated into the color pages for yellow, magenta, cyan and black, and each is printed with black gradations as individual pages. The printing order is yellow, magenta, cyan, then black. [OFF]: Color separation is not performed. A normal color separation is performed. [Emulation] Specify the processing method for data received by this machine. [Default Emulation] Settings [Auto] / [PS] / [PCL] Select the machine emulation language. If [Auto] is selected, the machine automatically selects the machine emulation language from the data stream.[Admin Settings] 3-61 [PS] Specify settings for PostScript errors and data transmissions. [Wait Timeout] Settings 0 to 300 (Default: 0) Specify the time until an error is determined to be a PostScript error. If [0] is selected, no timeout is performed. [Print PS Errors] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not an error page is printed when a Postscript error occurs. [PS Protocol] Settings [Auto] / [Normal] / [Binary] Select the protocol for data transmissions with a PostScript data stream. If [Auto] is selected, the machine automatically selects an applicable protocol from the data stream. [Auto Trapping] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not neighboring colors are printed superimposed in order to prevent white space around images. [Black Overprint] Settings [Text/Graphic] / [Text] / [OFF] Specify whether black objects are printed (superimposed) on a neighboring color in order to prevent white space around black characters or figures. If [Text/Graphic] is selected, superimposed printing is applied to text and graphics. If [Text] is selected, superimposed printing is applied to text. [PCL] Specify settings for the PCL language. [CR/LF Mapping] Settings [CR = CR LF = LF] / [CR = CRLF LF = LF] / [CR = CR LF = LFCR] / [CR = CRLF LF = LFCR] Select the definitions of the CR/LF codes in the PCL language. [Line/Page] Settings 5 to 128 (Default: 60) Specify the number of lines per page in the PCL language.3-62 [Admin Settings] [Font Setting] Specify font settings for the PCL language. [Font Number] Settings 0 to 102 (Default: 000) Specify the default font in the PCL language. The font numbers that appear correspond to the PCL font list. For details on printing the font list, refer to “[Print Settings]” on page 3-17. [Pitch Size] Settings 0.44 to 99.99 (Default: 10.00) Specify the font size in the PCL language. If the setting selected for [Font Number] is for a bitmap font, [Pitch Size] appears. If the setting selected for [Font Number] is for an outline font, [Point Size] appears. [Symbol Set] Settings [PC8] / [Desktop] / [IOS4] / [ISO6] / [ISO11] / [ISO15] / [ISO17] / [ISO21] / [ISO60] / [ISO69] / [ISOL1] / [ISOL2] / [ISOL5] / [ISOL6] / [ISOL9] / [Legal] / [Math8] / [MCText] / [MSPUBL] / [PC775] / [PC850] / [PC852] / [PC858] / [PC8DN] / [PC8TK] / [PC1004] / [Pi Font] / [PS math] / [PS Text] / [Roman 8] / [WIN30] / [WIN Balt] / [WINL1] / [WINL2] / [WINL5] / [ARABIC8] / [HPWARA] / [PC864ARA] / [HEBREW7] / [HEBREW8] / [ISOHEB] / [PC862HEB] / [ISOCYR] / [PC866CYR] / [WINCYR] / [PC866UKR] / [Greek 8] / [WINGRK] / [PC851GRK] / [PC8GRK] / [ISOGRK] Specify the symbol set used with the PCL language.[Admin Settings] 3-63 [Fax Settings] Specify the fax settings. For details on specifying the fax settings, refer to the [Facsimile User’s Guide]. [Maintenance Menu] " All factory default values are shown in bold. [XPS] Specify XPS settings. [Digital Signature] Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Select whether or not to enable XPS digital signatures. [Enable]: XPS digital signatures are enabled. [Disable]: XPS digital signatures are disabled. [Print XPS Errors] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not an error report is printed after an XPS error has occurred. [ON]: The error report is printed. [OFF]: The error report is not printed. Item Description [Print Menu] Specify settings for printing event logs and gradations. [Event Log] Settings [Print] / [Cancel] Prints the event log. [Halftone 64] Settings [Print] / [Cancel] Prints the halftone pattern using a 25% density for each CMYK color. [Cyan 64]/ [Magenta 64]/ [Yellow 64]/ [Black 64] [Halftone 128] Settings [Print] / [Cancel] Prints the halftone pattern using a 50% density for each CMYK color. [Cyan 128]/ [Magenta 128]/ [Yellow 128]/ [Black 128]3-64 [Admin Settings] [Halftone 256] Settings [Print] / [Cancel] Prints the halftone pattern using a 100% density for each CMYK color. [Cyan 256]/ [Magenta 256]/ [Yellow 256]/ [Black 256] [Gradation] Settings [Print] / [Cancel] Prints the gradation pattern. [Activity Report] Settings [Print] / [Cancel] Prints the communications activity report. [Scan Send Report Print] Settings [Print] / [Cancel] Prints the scanning operations activity report. [Scan Event Log] Settings [Print] / [Cancel] Prints the scanning event log. [Printer Adjustment] Specify various machine adjustments. [Leading Edge Adjustment] Adjust the top margin for various types of media. [Plain Paper] Settings -15 to 15 Adjust the top margin of plain paper for simplex (single-sided) printing. [Thick 1] Settings -15 to 15 Adjust the top margin of thick paper for simplex (single-sided) printing. [Thick 2] Settings -15 to 15 Adjust the top margin of Thick 2 paper for simplex (single-sided) printing. [Envelope] Settings -15 to 15 Adjust the top margin of envelopes for simplex (single-sided) printing. [Side Edge Adjustment] Adjust the left margin for media fed from each paper tray. [Tray1] Settings -15 to 15 Adjust the left margin of media fed from Tray 1 for simplex (single-sided) printing.[Admin Settings] 3-65 [Tray2] Settings -15 to 15 Adjust the left margin of media fed from Tray 2 for simplex (single-sided) printing. [Tray3] Settings -15 to 15 Adjust the left margin of media fed from Tray 3 for simplex (single-sided) printing. [Tray4] Settings -15 to 15 Adjust the left margin of media fed from Tray 4 for simplex (single-sided) printing. [Left ADJ Duplex] Adjust the left margin for media fed from each paper tray with duplex (double-sided) printing. [Tray1] Settings -15 to 15 Adjust the left margin of media fed from Tray 1 for duplex (double-sided) printing. [Tray2] Settings -15 to 15 Adjust the left margin of media fed from Tray 2 for duplex (double-sided) printing. [Tray3] Settings -15 to 15 Adjust the left margin of media fed from Tray 3 for duplex (double-sided) printing. [Tray4] Settings -15 to 15 Adjust the left margin of media fed from Tray 4 for duplex (double-sided) printing. [2nd Image Transfer Current] Adjust the 2nd image transfer current. [Simplex Pass] Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) for simplex (single-sided) printing. [Plain Paper] Settings -8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) for simplex (single-sided) printing of plain paper. [Thick 1] Settings -8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) for simplex (single-sided) printing of Thick 1 paper.3-66 [Admin Settings] [Thick 2] Settings -8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) for simplex (single-sided) printing of Thick 2 paper. [Postcard] Settings -8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) for simplex (single-sided) printing of postcards. [Envelope] Settings -8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) for simplex (single-sided) printing of envelopes. [Label] Settings -8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) for simplex (single-sided) printing of labels. [Glossy 1] Settings -8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) for simplex (single-sided) printing of Glossy 1 media. [Glossy 2] Settings -8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) for simplex (single-sided) printing of Glossy 2 media. [Manual Duplex] Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) for duplex (double-sided) printing. [Plain Paper] Settings -8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) for printing on the back side of plain paper that has already been printed on. [Thick 1] Settings -8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) for printing on the back side of Thick 1 paper that has already been printed on. [Thick 2] Settings -8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) for printing on the back side of Thick 2 paper that has already been printed on.[Admin Settings] 3-67 [Postcard] Settings -8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) for printing on the back side of postcards that has already been printed on. [Envelope] Settings -8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) for printing on the back side of envelopes that has already been printed on. [Label] Settings -8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) for printing on the back side of labels that has already been printed on. [Glossy 1] Settings -8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) for printing on the back side of Glossy 1 media that has already been printed on. [Glossy 2] Settings -8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) for printing on the back side of Glossy 2 media that has already been printed on. [Thick Paper Image Density] Adjust the density of images printed on thick paper. [Cyan] Settings -5 to 5 (Default: 0) Finely adjust the density of cyan for images printed on thick paper. [Magenta] Settings -5 to 5 (Default: 0) Finely adjust the density of magenta for images printed on thick paper. [Yellow] Settings -5 to 5 (Default: 0) Finely adjust the density of yellow for images printed on thick paper. [Black] Settings -5 to 5 (Default: 0) Finely adjust the density of black for images printed on thick paper. [Monochrome Density Adj.] Settings -2 to 2 (Default: 0) Finely adjust the density of printed images with grayscale printing.3-68 [Admin Settings] [Fine Line ADJ] Settings -3 to 2 (Default: 0) Adjust how fine lines are reproduced by changing the applied voltage (VC) to the electrostatic roller. [AIDC Mode] Settings [Mode 1] / [Mode 2] Select the AIDC operation mode. [Mode 1]: Standard mode [Mode 2]: Low mode [Thick Mode] Settings [Quality Mode] / [Speed Mode] In order to prevent toner from clogging within the developer unit as a result of it being driven at half-speed, select the timing for driving the developer unit at full speed for a fixed length of time when thick paper is being fed. [Quality Mode]: While printing on thick paper, printing is periodically paused, and the developer unit is driven at full speed for a fixed length of time. Since printing is paused, the quality is not affected; however, a standby time of approximately 70 seconds occurs every 400 seconds or so of half-speed operation. [Speed Mode]: While printing on thick paper, only the drive of the developer unit periodically switches to full speed for a fixed length of time. Since printing continues during full-speed drive, the print quality is slightly affected, however the standby time is short. [Engine DipSW] Change the DIP switches to control machine operation. [Engine DipSW 1] - [Engine DipSW 28] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Use to change engine settings. "Normally, there is no need to change the settings. If it becomes necessary to change the settings, do so according to the instructions from the service representative.[Admin Settings] 3-69 [Folder Settings] " All factory default values are shown in bold. [Main Scan Adjust] Adjust the scanning settings. [Main Scan Page] Settings [Print] / [Cancel] Print the test pattern for fine adjustment of the color ratios in the main scanning direction. [Scan Adjust Value] Specify color adjustments for yellow, magenta and cyan. [Yellow] Settings -42 to 42 (Default: 0) Finely adjust the ratio of yellow in the main scanning direction. [Magenta] Settings -42 to 42 (Default: 0) Finely adjust the ratio of magenta in the main scanning direction. [Cyan] Settings -42 to 42 (Default: 0) Finely adjust the ratio of cyan in the main scanning direction. [Supplies] Reset the service life counters for various consumables. [Consumables Replace] [Transfer Belt Unit] Settings [Yes] / [No] Reset the transfer belt counter. [Transfer Roller Unit] Settings [Yes] / [No] Reset the transfer roller counter. [Fusing Unit] Settings [Yes] / [No] Reset the fuser unit counter. Item Description [Auto Del Interval] Settings [Erase Disabled] / [12 Hours] / [1 Day] / [2 Days] / [3 Days] / [7 Days] / [30 Days] Select the length of time until files saved on the hard disk are automatically deleted.3-70 [Admin Settings] [Security Settings] " All factory default values are shown in bold. [Auto Document Delete Time] Settings [Erase Disabled] / [12 Hours] / [1 Day] / [2 Days] / [3 Days] / [7 Days] / [30 Days] Select the length of time that files are saved on the hard disk. [Document Hold Setting] Settings [Enable] / [Disable] Select whether or not a file is deleted after it is retrieved. Item Description [Administrator Password] Settings [12345678] Change the administrator password. Specify the administrator password as a 0 to 8 digit number. "If password rules have been applied, an 8-digit password must be specified. "If the administrator password is incorrectly entered three times, machine operations are locked. If this occurs, turn the machine off, then on again. [Password] (top): Type in the current password. [Password] (bottom): Type in the new password. [Security Details] Specify detailed security settings to limit machine functions. Security can be enhanced if machine functions are limited. [Password Rules] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not password rules are applied. [Registering and Changing Addr.] Settings [Allow] / [Restrict] Select whether or not to prohibit editing of the address book. If [Restrict] is selected, the address book cannot be edited.[Admin Settings] 3-71 [Manual Destination Input] Settings [Allow] / [Restrict] Select whether or not to prohibit manual input of a destination. If [Restrict] is selected, destinations for fax and scan operations cannot be entered directly. [Hide Personal Data] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not to display transmission destinations in the job log. If [ON] is selected, transmission destinations are not displayed. [Disable Job History Display] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not to display the communication log. If [ON] is selected, the communication log is not displayed. [Restrict Scan to USB] Settings [Allow] / [Restrict] Select whether or not to prohibit the Scan to USB function. If [Restrict] is selected, the Scan to USB function cannot be used. [Enhanced Security Mode] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not to apply enhanced security settings. If [ON] is selected, the enhanced security settings are applied. [HDD Settings] Check the capacity of the hard disk or delete data by overwriting. [Check HDD Capacity] Check the total capacity of the hard disk, the amount of space used and the amount of space available. [Overwrite All Data] Delete all data on the hard disk by overwriting it.3-72 [Admin Settings] [Mode] Settings [Mode 1] / [Mode 2] / [Mode 3] / [Mode 4] / [Mode 5] / [Mode 6] / [Mode 7] / [Mode 8] Select the method for overwriting the data on the hard disk. [Mode 1]: Overwritten with 0x00 [Mode 2]: Overwritten with 1-byte random numbers Overwritten with 1-byte random numbers Overwritten with 0x00 [Mode 3]: Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 1-byte random numbers Verified [Mode 4]: Overwritten with 1-byte random numbers Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff [Mode 5]: Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff [Mode 6]: Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with specified 512-byte data [Mode 7]: Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0xaa [Mode 8]: Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0xaa Verified[Admin Settings] 3-73 [Execute] Press to delete all data on the hard disk by overwriting it, and then press [OK]. "Perform this operation when disposing of this machine. "While the data is being deleted by being overwritten, do not use the power switch to turn the machine off and on. "After the machine is restarted, all data is deleted by being overwritten. The following data is deleted. – Registered user and account data – Registered information for secured printing and saved files – Image files [SSD Low-level Format] Press to delete all data on the SSD by overwriting it, and then press [OK]. "Perform this operation when disposing of this machine. "While the data is being deleted by being overwritten, do not use the power switch to turn the machine off and on. "After the machine is restarted, all data is deleted by being overwritten. The following data is deleted. – Sent and received fax data – Address book (E-mail address and telephone number destination data) – S/MIME certificates – Image files3-74 [Admin Settings] Changing the administrator password The following procedure describes how to change the administrator password. 1 Press [Administrator Password]. 2 Press [Password] (top). 3 Type in the current administrator password, and then press [OK]. 4 Press [Password] (bottom). 5 Type in the new administrator password, and then press [OK]. 6 Press [OK]. Limitations of the password rules If password rules have been applied, limitations are placed on certain passwords. Specified passwords must be changed to meet the conditions. Passwords regulated by the password rules – Administrator password – User passwords – Account passwords – Passwords for secure documents[Admin Settings] 3-75 Conditions of the password rules – Specify a password of 8 or more digits. – Uppercase and lowercase letters are differentiated. – Half-width symbols are used. The use of symbols such as the quotation mark ("), plus sign (+) and spaces are limited with some settings. – A password that consists of a repetition of the same character cannot be specified. – When changing the password, the same password as that before it is changed cannot be specified. Enhanced security settings If settings have been specified that are incompatible with the enhanced security settings, the enhanced security settings cannot be applied. The settings that must be specified or are forcibly set cannot be changed after the enhanced security settings have been applied. Required settings The following settings must first be specified in order to apply the enhanced security settings. Administrator mode parameters Required settings [Security Settings] - [Administrator Password] Specify a password that meets the conditions of the password rules. [Security] tab in PageScope Web Connection - [Authentication Setting] - [General Settings] - [User Authentication] Select [Device] or [External Server]. [Security] tab in PageScope Web Connection - [PKI Settings] - [Device Certificate] Register a self-signed certificate in order to perform SSL communications. [Network] tab in PageScope Web Connection - [SNMP Settings] - [SNMP v3 Settings] - [auth-password] Specify passwords for [auth-password] and [priv-password] that meet the conditions of the password rules. [SSL] in PageScope Web Connection Select [AES-256] or [AES-256, 3DES-168]. [S/MIME] in PageScope Web Connection Select [3DES], [AES-128], [AES-192] or [AES-256].3-76 [Admin Settings] Changed settings For increased security, the following settings are set when enhanced security settings are applied. " A changed setting cannot be changed when [Enhanced Security Mode] is set to [OFF]. " If password rules have been applied, a password that does not meet the conditions of the password rules is considered a failed attempt during authentication. *1 Set to [AES/3DES] when [Enhanced Security Mode] is set to [OFF]. Administrator mode parameters Changed settings [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Password Rules] Set to [ON]. [Security] tab in PageScope Web Connection - [Authentication Setting] - [General Settings] - [Public Access] Set to [Restrict]. [Security] tab in PageScope Web Connection - [PKI Settings] - [SSL/ TLS Settings] - [SSL/TLS] Set to [Enable]. [Security] tab in PageScope Web Connection - [PKI Settings] - [SSL/ TLS Settings] - [Encryption Strength] Set to [AES-256] or [AES-256, 3DES-168]. *1 [Network] tab in PageScope Web Connection - [E-mail Settings] - [S/MIME] - [E-mail Text Encryption Method] Set to [3DES], [AES-128], [AES-192] or [AES-256]. *1 [Network] tab in PageScope Web Connection - [FTP Settings] - [FTP Server Settings] - [FTP Server] Set to [Disable]. [Network] tab in PageScope Web Connection - [SNMP Settings] - [SNMP v1/v2c Settings] - [Write] Set to [Disable]. [Network] tab in PageScope Web Connection - [SNMP Settings] - [SNMP v3 Settings] - [Write User Name] - [Security Level], [auth-password] and [priv-password] Set to [Auth-password/Priv-password]. [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Registering and Changing Addr.] Set to [Restrict].[Admin Settings] 3-77 [Restore Defaults] [HDD Format] Item Description [Restore Network] Resets the network settings to their defaults. After this is pressed, the printer is automatically restarted. [Restore System] Resets the system settings to their defaults. After this is pressed, the printer is automatically restarted. [Restore All] Resets all settings to their defaults. After this is pressed, the printer is automatically restarted. Item Description [User Area (Print)] Initializes the user area (printing) of the hard disk. After the reformatting operation is finished, turn the machine off, then on again. [User Area (Scan)] Initializes the user area (scanning) of the hard disk. After the reformatting operation is finished, turn the machine off, then on again. [All] Initializes the hard disk. After the reformatting operation is finished, turn the machine off, then on again.3-78 [Admin Settings] [Paper Empty] " All factory default values are shown in bold. [Restriction Code Settings] [Erase Job Log] Item Description [Tray 1] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not a message appears when Tray 1 has run out of paper. [Tray 2] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not a message appears when Tray 2 has run out of paper. [Tray 3] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not a message appears when Tray 3 has run out of paper. [Tray 4] Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not a message appears when Tray 4 has run out of paper. Item Description Restriction Code Settings Displays the list of inhibited codes of the OpenAPI connection applications. [New]: Registers new inhibited codes for the Index Code, Vendor Code, and Application Code. Item Description Erase Job Log If [OK] is selected, Accounting Log, Counting Log and Audit Log are deleted.4Media Handling4-2 Print Media Print Media Specifications Media Media Size Tray* Duplex Copy Scan FAX Inch Millimeter Letter 8.5 × 11.0 215.9 × 279.4 1/2/3/4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Letter Plus 8.5 × 12.69 215.9 × 322.3 1/2 Yes Yes Yes No Government letter 8.0 × 10.5 203.2 × 266.7 1/2 Yes Yes Yes No Legal 8.5 × 14.0 215.9 × 355.6 1/2/3/4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Executive 7.25 × 10.5 184.2 × 266.7 1/2/3/4 Yes Yes Yes No Statement 5.5 × 8.5 139.7 × 215.9 1/2 No Yes Yes No 16 K 7.7 × 10.6 195.0 × 270.0 1/2 Yes Yes Yes No UK Quarto 8.0 × 10.0 203.2 × 254.0 1/2 Yes Yes Yes No Foolscap 8.0 × 13.0 203.2 × 330.2 1/2 Yes Yes Yes No Government Legal 8.5 × 13.0 215.9 × 330.2 1/2/3/4 Yes Yes Yes No Folio 8.25 × 13.0 210.0 × 330.0 1/2 Yes Yes Yes No 8 1/2 × 13 1/2 8.5 × 13.5 215.9 × 342.9 1/2 Yes Yes Yes Yes 8 1/8 × 13 1/4 8.125 × 13.25 206.4 × 336.6 1/2 Yes Yes Yes No A4 8.2 × 11.7 210.0 × 297.0 1/2/3/4 Yes Yes Yes Yes A5 5.9 × 8.3 148.0 × 210.0 1/2 No Yes Yes No B5 (JIS) 7.2 × 10.1 182.0 × 257.0 1/2/3/4 Yes Yes Yes No A6 4.1 × 5.8 105.0 × 148.0 1/2 No Yes** Yes** No B6 5.0 × 7.2 128.0 × 182.0 1/2 No Yes** Yes** No Photo size 4 × 6" 4.0 × 6.0 101.6 × 152.4 1/2 No Yes** Yes** No Photo size 10 × 15 4.0 × 6.0 101.6 × 152.4 1/2 No Yes** Yes** No Photo size E size 3.2 × 4.6 82.5 × 117.0 - No Yes** Yes** No Photo size L size 3.5 × 5.0 89.0 × 127.0 - No Yes** Yes** No Photo size 9 × 13 3.5 × 5.1 90.0 × 130.0 - No Yes** Yes** No Photo size 13 × 18 5.1 × 7.1 130.0 × 180.0 - No Yes** Yes** No Photo size 3 × 5" 3.0 × 5.0 76.2 × 127.0 - No Yes** Yes** No Photo size 2 1/4 × 3 1/4" 2.25 × 3.29 57.1 × 82.5 - No Yes** Yes** No J-Postcard 3.9 × 5.8 100.0 × 148.0 1/2 No Yes** Yes** No Double Postcard 5.8 × 7.9 148.0 × 200.0 1/2 No Yes Yes No B5 (ISO) 6.9 × 9.8 176.0 × 250.0 1 No Yes Yes No Envelope Com10 4.125 × 9.5 104.8 × 241.3 1 No No No No Envelope Monarch 7.5 × 3.875 190.5 × 98.4 1 No No No NoPrint Media 4-3 Envelope You #6 7.5 × 3.875 190.5 × 98.4 1 No No No No Envelope DL 8.7 × 4.3 220.0 × 110.0 1 No No No No Envelope C6 6.4 × 4.5 162.0 × 114.0 1 No No No No Envelope You #2 6.4 × 4.5 162.0 × 114.0 1 No No No No Envelope Chou #3 4.7 × 9.2 120.0 × 235.0 1 No No No No Envelope Chou #4 3.5 × 8.1 90.0 × 205.0 1 No No No No Kai 16 7.3 × 10.2 185.0 × 260.0 1/2 Yes Yes Yes No Kai 32 5.1 × 7.3 130.0 × 185.0 1/2 No Yes** Yes** No Custom, Minimum 3.6 - 8.5 × 5.8 - 14.0 92.0 - 216.0 × 148.0 - 356.0 1/2*** Yes**** Yes Yes Yes Custom, Maximum 7.2 - 8.5 × 10.0 - 14.0 182.0 - 216.0 × 254.0 - 356.0 1/2 Yes No No No Notes: *Tray 1 = Multipurpose Tray 3/4 = Plain paper only **Original glass only ***Numerical value input ****Only a size within the range 182.0 - 216.0 × 254.0 - 356.0 is allowed. Media Media Size Tray* Duplex Copy Scan FAX Inch Millimeter4-4 Print Media Types " Keep media on a flat, level surface in its original wrapper until it is time to load it. " Before printing a large number of copies on special paper (other than plain paper), perform a trial print to check the quality of the print result. Plain Paper (Recycled Paper) Use plain paper that is „ Suitable for plain paper printers and copiers, such as standard or recycled office paper. DO NOT use media that is „ Coated with a processed surface (such as carbon paper and colored paper that has been treated) „ Unapproved iron-on transfer media (such as heat-pressure paper, and heat-press transfer paper) „ Cold-water-transfer paper „ Pressure sensitive „ Designed specifically for inkjet printers (such as superfine paper, glossy film, and postcards) „ Already been printed on by another printer, copier, or fax machine „ Dusty „ Wet (or damp) Capacity Tray 1 Up to 100 sheets, depending on the media weight Tray 2 Up to 250 sheets, depending on the media weight Tray 3/4 Up to 500 sheets, depending on the media weight Orientation Tray 1 Face down Tray 2/3/4 Face up Driver Media Type Plain Paper (Recycled) Weight 60 to 90 g/m² Duplexing Refer to “Specifications” on page 4-2.Print Media 4-5 " Keep media between 15% and 85% relative humidity. Toner does not adhere well to moist or wet media. „ Layered „ Adhesive „ Folded, creased, curled, embossed, warped, or wrinkled „ Perforated, three-hole punched, or torn „ Too slick, too coarse, or too textured „ Different in texture (roughness) on the front and back „ Too thin or too thick „ Stuck together with static electricity „ Composed of foil or gilt; too luminous „ Heat sensitive or cannot withstand the fusing temperature (180°C [356°F]) „ Irregularly shaped (not rectangular or not cut at right angles) „ Attached with glue, tape, paper clips, staples, ribbons, hooks, or buttons „ Acidic „ Any other media that is not approved Thick Stock Paper thicker than 90 g/m2 (24 lb bond) is referred to as thick stock. You can print continuously with thick stock. However, this could affect the media feed, depending on the media quality and printing environment. If problems occur, stop the continuous printing and print one sheet at a time. Capacity Tray 1/2 Up to 20 sheets, depending on their thickness Tray 3/4 Not supported Orientation Tray 1 Face down Tray 2 Face up Driver Media Type Thick 1 (91–150 g/m²) Thick 2 (151–210 g/m²) Weight 91 to 210 g/m² Duplexing Refer to “Specifications” on page 4-2.4-6 Print Media Envelope Print on the front (address) side only. Some parts of the envelope consist of three layers of paper—the front, back, and flap. Anything printed in these layered regions may be lost or faded. You can print continuously with envelope. However, this could affect the media feed, depending on the media quality and printing environment. If problems occur, stop the continuous printing and print one sheet at a time. Use envelopes that are „ Common office envelopes approved for laser printing with diagonal joints, sharp folds and edges, and ordinary gummed flaps " Because the envelopes pass through heated rollers, the gummed area on the flaps may seal. Using envelopes with emulsion-based glue avoids this problem. „ Approved for laser printing „ Dry DO NOT use envelopes that have „ Sticky flaps „ Tape seals, metal clasps, paper clips, fasteners, or peel-off strips for sealing „ Transparent windows „ Too rough of a surface „ Material that will melt, vaporize, offset, discolor, or emit dangerous fumes „ Been presealed Capacity Tray 1 Up to 10 sheets, depending on their thickness Tray 2/3/4 Not supported Orientation Face down Driver Media Type Envelope Duplexing Not supportedPrint Media 4-7 Label A sheet of labels consists of a face sheet (the printing surface), adhesive, and a carrier sheet: „ The face sheet must follow the plain paper specification. „ The face sheet surface must cover the entire carrier sheet, and no adhesive should come through on the surface. You can print continuously with label sheets. However, this could affect the media feed, depending on the media quality and printing environment. If problems occur, stop the continuous printing and print one sheet at a time. Check your application documentation for more information on printing labels. Use label sheets that are „ Recommended for laser printing DO NOT use label sheets that „ Have labels that easily peel off or have parts of the label already removed „ Have backing sheets that have peeled away or have exposed adhesive " Labels may stick to the fuser, causing them to peel off and media misfeeds to occur. Capacity Tray 1/2 Up to 20 sheets, depending on their thickness Tray 3/4 Not supported Orientation Tray 1 Face down Tray 2 Face up Driver Media Type Label Duplexing Not supported4-8 Print Media „ Are precut or perforated Letterhead You can print continuously with letterhead. However, this could affect the media feed, depending on the media quality and printing environment. If problems occur, stop the continuous printing and print one sheet at a time. Check your application documentation for more information on printing letterhead. Postcard You can print continuously with postcard. However, this could affect the media feed, depending on the media quality and printing environment. If problems occur, stop the continuous printing and print one sheet at a time. Check your application documentation for more information on printing postcards. Capacity Tray 1/2 Up to 20 sheets, depending on their size and thickness Tray 3/4 Not supported Orientation Tray 1 Face down Tray 2 Face up Driver Media Type Letterhead Duplexing Not supported Capacity Tray 1/2 Up to 20 sheets, depending on their thickness Tray 3/4 Not supported Do not use OK to use Shiny backed paper Full-page labels (uncut)Print Media 4-9 Use postcards that are „ Approved for laser printing DO NOT use postcards that are „ Coated „ Designed for inkjet printers „ Precut or perforated „ Preprinted or multicolored " If the postcard is warped, press on the warped area before putting it in the tray 1/2. „ Folded or wrinkled Glossy Media You can print continuously with glossy media. However, this could affect the media feed, depending on the media quality and printing environment. If problems occur, stop the continuous printing and print one sheet at a time. Check your application documentation for more information on printing glossy media. Orientation Tray 1 Face down Tray 2 Face up Driver Media Type Postcard Duplexing Not supported Capacity Tray 1/2 Up to 20 sheets, depending on their thickness Tray 3/4 Not supported4-10 Print Media Single Side Only Print on the single side only. You can print continuously with single side only paper. However, this could affect the media feed, depending on the media quality and printing environment. If problems occur, stop the continuous printing and print one sheet at a time. Select this setting when paper that should not be used with double sided copying (for example, when on side has already been printed on) is loaded as plain paper with a weight of 60–90 g/m². Use single side only paper that is „ Suitable for plain paper laser printers, such as standard or recycled office paper „ Plain paper that has been printed on with same printer DO NOT use single side only paper that is „ Not approved for use as plain paper Orientation Tray 1 Face down Tray 2 Face up Driver Media Type Glossy 1 (100–128 g/m2 ) Glossy 2 (129–158 g/m2 ) Weight 100 to 158 g/m2 Duplexing Not supported Capacity Tray 1 Up to 100 sheets, depending on the paper weight. Tray 2 Up to 250 sheets, depending on the paper weight. Tray 3/4 Up to 500 sheets, depending on the paper weight. Orientation Tray 1 Face down Tray 2/3/4 Face up Driver Media Type Single Side Only (60–90 g/m²) Weight 60–90 g/m² Duplexing Not supportedPrint Media 4-11 Special Paper You can print continuously with special paper. However, this could affect the media feed, depending on the media quality and printing environment. If problems occur, stop the continuous printing and print one sheet at a time. Select this setting when special paper, for example, color high-quality paper (color paper), is loaded as plain paper with a weight of 60–90 g/m². Use special paper that is „ Approved for laser printers DO NOT use special paper that is „ Not approved for use as plain paper Capacity Tray 1 Up to 100 sheets, depending on the paper weight. Tray 2 Up to 250 sheets, depending on the paper weight. Tray 3/4 Up to 500 sheets, depending on the paper weight. Orientation Tray 1 Face down Tray 2/3/4 Face up Driver Media Type Special Paper (60–90 g/m2 ) Weight 60–90 g/m² Duplexing Refer to “Specifications” on page 4-2.4-12 Print Media Printable Area The printable area on all media sizes is up to 4.2 mm (0.165") from the edges of the media. Each media size has a specific imageable area, the maximum area on which the printer can print clearly and without distortion. This area is subject to both hardware limits (the physical media size and the margins required by the printer) and software constraints (the amount of memory available for the full-page frame buffer). The guaranteed imageable (printable) area for all media sizes is the page size minus 4.2 mm (0.165") from all edges of the media. " When printing in color on legal-size media, the following limitations apply. z The printable area is 347.2 (13.7") mm from the leading edge of the paper. (However, there is a non-printable area up to 4.2 mm (0.165") from the leading edge.) z The bottom margin is 14.2 mm (0.56"). a a a a Printable Area a = 4.2 mm (0.165")Print Media 4-13 Envelopes Envelopes can only be printed on their front sides (side where the recipient’s address is written). In addition, printing on the front side in the area overlapping the back flap cannot be guaranteed. The location of this area differs depending on the envelope type. " The envelope print orientation is determined by your application. Page Margins Margins are set through your application. Some applications allow you to set custom page sizes and margins while others have only standard page sizes and margins from which to choose. If you choose a standard format, you may lose part of your image (due to imageable area constraints). If you can custom-size your page in your application, use those sizes given for the imageable area for optimum results. a=4.2 mm (0.165") Non-printable area Non-guaranteed printable area Guaranteed printable area Front side (can be printed) Back side (cannot be printed) a a a a4-14 Loading Media Loading Media How do I load media? Note Do not mix media of different types and sizes, as this will cause media misfeeds or machine trouble. Note Paper edges are sharp and may cause injuries. When refilling media, first remove any media remaining in the tray. Stack it with the new media, even the edges, then reload it. Tray 1 (Manual Feed Tray) For details on the types and sizes of media that can be printed from Tray 1, refer to “Specifications” on page 4-2. Loading Plain Paper, Single Side Only and Special Paper 1 Open Tray 1.Loading Media 4-15 2 Slide the media guides to provide more space between them. 3 Press down on the center of the paper-lifting plate until the left and right locking tabs (white) lock into place. 4 Load the paper face down in the tray.4-16 Loading Media " Do not load so much paper that the top of the stack is higher than the maximum limit guide. Up to 100 sheets (80 g/m2 ) of plain paper can be loaded into the tray at one time. 5 Slide the media guides against the edges of the paper. 6 Select [Copy]/[Paper]/[Tray 1]/[Change Tray Set]/[Paper Size] and [Paper Type] in the configuration menu, and then select the setting for the size and type of paper that are loaded. See also “[Paper]” on page 7-5. Other Media When loading media other than plain paper, set the media mode (Envelope, Label, Letterhead, Thick 1, Thick 2, Glossy 1, Glossy 2, or Postcards) in the driver for optimum print quality.Loading Media 4-17 Loading Envelopes 1 Open Tray 1. 2 Slide the media guides to provide more space between them. 3 Press down on the center of the paper-lifting plate until the left and right locking tabs (white) lock into place.4-18 Loading Media 4 Load the envelopes flap side up in the tray. " Before loading envelopes, press them down to make sure that all air is removed, and make sure that the folds of the flaps are firmly pressed; otherwise the envelopes may become wrinkled or a media misfeed may occur. " Up to 10 envelopes can be loaded into the tray at one time. " For envelopes with the flap along the long edge (Envelope C6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope You #6, Envelope You #2, and Envelope DL), load the envelopes with the flap side up. 5 Slide the media guides against the edges of the envelopes.Loading Media 4-19 6 Select [Copy]/[Paper]/[Tray 1]/[Change Tray Set]/[Paper Size] and [Paper Type] in the configuration menu, and then select the setting for the size and type of paper that are loaded. See also. Loading Label Sheets/Letterhead/Postcards/Thick Stock and Glossy Media 1 Open Tray 1. 2 Slide the media guides to provide more space between them.4-20 Loading Media 3 Press down on the center of the paper-lifting plate until the left and right locking tabs (white) lock into place. 4 Load the media face down in the tray. " Up to 20 sheets can be loaded into the tray at one time. 5 Slide the media guides against the edges of the media. 6 Select [Copy]/[Paper]/[Tray 1]/[Change Tray Set]/[Paper Size] and [Paper Type] in the configuration menu, and then select the setting for the size and type of paper that are loaded. See also “[Paper]” on page 7-5.Loading Media 4-21 Tray 2 Loading Plain Paper, Single Side Only and Special Paper 1 Pull out Tray 2. 2 Press down the media pressure plate to lock it into place. 3 Slide the media guides to provide more space between them.4-22 Loading Media 4 Turn the paper selection dial to select the size of paper to be loaded. 5 Load the paper face up in the tray. " Do not load above the ▼ mark. Up to 250 sheets (80 g/m2 ) of plain paper can be loaded into the tray at one time.Loading Media 4-23 6 Slide the media guides against the edges of the paper. 7 Close Tray 2. 8 Select [Copy]/[Paper]/[Tray 2]/[Change Tray Set]/[Paper Size] and [Paper Type] in the configuration menu, and then select the setting for the size and type of paper that are loaded. See also “[Paper]” on page 7-5.4-24 Loading Media Loading Label Sheets/Letterhead/Postcards/Thick Stock and Glossy Media 1 Pull out Tray 2. 2 Press down the media pressure plate to lock it into place. 3 Slide the media guides to provide more space between them.Loading Media 4-25 4 Turn the paper selection dial to select the size of paper to be loaded. 5 Load the paper face up in the tray. " Up to 20 sheets can be loaded into the tray at one time.4-26 Loading Media 6 Slide the media guides against the edges of the paper. 7 Close Tray 2. 8 Select [Copy]/[Paper]/[Tray 2]/[Change Tray Set]/[Paper Size] and [Paper Type] in the configuration menu, and then select the setting for the size and type of paper that are loaded. See also “[Paper]” on page 7-5.Loading Media 4-27 Tray 3/4 (Optional Lower Feeder Unit) Loading Plain Paper, Single Side Only and Special Paper 1 Pull out Tray 3 or Tray 4. 2 Press down the media pressure plate to lock it into place. 3 Slide the media guides to provide more space between them.4-28 Loading Media 4 Load the paper face up in the tray. " Do not load above the ▼ mark. Up to 500 sheets (80 g/m2 ) of plain paper can be loaded into the tray at one time. 5 Slide the media guides against the edges of the paper.Loading Media 4-29 6 Close Tray 3 or Tray 4. 7 Select [Copy]/[Paper]/[Tray 3]/[Change Tray Set]/[Paper Size] and [Paper Type] in the configuration menu, and then select the setting for the size and type of paper that are loaded. See also “[Paper]” on page 7-5.4-30 About Duplex Printing About Duplex Printing Duplex (double-sided) printing can be done with this printer, which has the duplex unit built in as a standard. If the paper has low opacity (high translucency), then the printed data from one side of the page will show through to the other side. Check your application for margin information. For best results, print a small quantity to make sure the opacity is acceptable. Note Only plain paper, special paper and thick stock, 60–210 g/m2 can be autoduplexed. See “Types” on page 4-4. Duplexing envelopes, labels, letterheads, postcards, glossy media or single side only papers is not supported. How do I autoduplex? Check your application to determine how to set your margins for duplex (double-sided) printing. The following Binding Position settings are available. If [Long Edge (Left)] is selected, the pages will be laid out to flip at the left. If [Long Edge (Right)] is selected, the pages will be laid out to flip at the right. If [Short Edge (Top)] is selected, the pages will be laid out to flip at the top. 1 1 1 2 3 1 1 1 2 3 1 3 1 2 1About Duplex Printing 4-31 In addition, if [Booklet] is selected, autoduplex printing is performed. The following Order settings are available when [Booklet] is selected. 1 Load paper into the tray. 2 From the printer driver, specify duplex (double-sided) printing (Layout tab in Windows). 3 Click [OK]. " With autoduplexing, the back side is printed first, and then the front side is printed. If [Long Edge (Bottom)] is selected, the pages will be laid out to flip at the bottom. If [Left Binding] is selected, the pages can be folded as a left-bound booklet. If [Right Binding] is selected, the pages can be folded as a right-bound booklet. 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 2 3 3 3 1 1 24-32 Output Tray Output Tray All media is fed out facing down into the output tray of the machine. This tray has a capacity of approximately 250 sheets (A4/Letter) of 80 g/m2 paper. " If the media is stacked too high in the output tray, your machine may experience media misfeeds, excessive media curl, or static buildup. Media Storage 4-33 Media Storage „ Keep media on a flat, level surface in its original wrapper until it is time to load it. Media that has been stored for a long time out of its packaging may dry up too much and cause misfeeding. „ If media has been removed from its wrapper, place it in its original packaging and store in a cool, dark place on a level surface. „ Avoid moisture, excessive humidity, direct sunlight, excessive heat, and dust Store paper in a location with a temperature between 0 °C and 30 °C and humidity between 30% and 85%. „ Avoid leaning against other objects or placing it in an upright position. Before using stored media, do a trial print and check print quality. 4-34 Original Media Original Media Specifications Documents that can be placed on the original glass The following types of documents can be placed on the original glass. Observe the following precautions when placing a document on the original glass. „ Do not place objects weighing more than 3 kg on the original glass; otherwise the glass may be damaged. „ Do not press down extremely hard on a book spread on the original glass; otherwise the original glass may be damaged. Documents that can be loaded into the ADF The following types of documents can be loaded into the ADF. Document type Sheets, books, three-dimensional object Document size Maximum size : Legal Copy and Scan : 30–216 × 30–356 mm Fax : 140–216 × 148–356 mm Weight Maximum weight : 3 kg Document media type / Weight Plain paper / 50 to 128 g/m² Document size Maximum size : Legal Mixed document sizes : Legal, Letter Copy and Scan : 140–216 × 148–356 mm (Single-sided/Double-sided) Fax : 140–216 × 148–1000 mm (Single-sided) 140–216 × 148–356 mm (Double-sided) Media capacity 50 sheets (media weight: 80 g/m2 )Original Media 4-35 Do not load the following types of documents into the ADF. „ Documents containing pages of different sizes „ Wrinkled, folded, curled, or torn documents „ Highly translucent or transparent documents, such as overhead transparencies or diazo photosensitive paper „ Coated documents such as carbon-backed paper „ Documents printed on paper thicker than 128 g/m² „ Documents with pages bound together with paper clips or staples „ Documents that are bound in a book or booklet „ Documents with pages bound together with glue „ Documents with pages that have had cutouts removed or are cutouts „ Label sheets „ Offset printing masters „ Documents with binder holes4-36 Loading a Document Loading a Document Placing a document on the original glass 1 Lift to open the ADF cover. 2 Position the document on the original glass. " Align the document with the arrow on the left side toward the rear of the machine. DocumentLoading a Document 4-37 3 Gently close the ADF cover. Loading a document into the ADF 1 Put the document into the ADF document feed tray face up. " Before loading a document into the ADF, check that no document pages remain on the original glass. " Load the document pages so that the top of the document is toward the back or the right side of the machine. 2 Adjust the document guides to the document size. " For details on copying the loaded document, refer to “Performing Copy mode operations” on page 7-1. For details on scanning, refer to “Scanning From a Computer Application” on page 9-1. Document4-38 Loading a Document5Using the Printer Driver5-2 Selecting Driver Options/Defaults (for Windows) Selecting Driver Options/Defaults (for Windows) Before you start working with your printer, you are advised to verify/change the default driver settings. Also, in case you have options installed, you should “declare” the options in the driver. Windows Server 2008 R2/7/Vista/Server 2008/XP/Server 2003/2000 1 Choose the driver’s properties as follows: – (Windows 7/Server 2008 R2) From the [Start] menu, choose [Devices and Printers] to display the [Devices and Printers] directory. Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PCL6, KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PS or KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 XPS printer icon, and then click [Printer Properties]. – (Windows Vista/Server 2008) From the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel], then [Hardware and Sound], and then click [Printers] to open the Printers directory. Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PCL6, KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PS or KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 XPS printer icon, and then click [Properties]. – (Windows XP/Server 2003) From the [Start] menu, choose [Printers and Faxes] to display the [Printers and Faxes] directory. Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PCL6 or KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PS printer icon and choose [Properties]. – (Windows 2000) From the [Start] menu, choose [Settings] and then [Printers] to display the [Printers] directory. Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PCL6 or KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PS printer icon and choose [Properties]. 2 If you have installed options, proceed with the next step. Otherwise, skip to step 9. 3 Select the [Configure] tab. 4 Check that the installed options are correctly listed. If not, proceed with the next step. Otherwise, continue with step 8. 5 Click the [Acquire Device Information] to automatically configure installed options.Selecting Driver Options/Defaults (for Windows) 5-3 " The [Acquire Device Information] is available only if bi-directional communication is available with the printer; otherwise it is grayed out. If Windows Server 2008 R2/7/Vista/Server 2008 is being used, [Acquire Device Information] can also be clicked when the machine is connected via USB. 6 From the [Device Option] list, select an option, one at a time, and then select [Installed] or [None] from the [Setting] menu. 7 Click [Apply]. " Depending on the version of the operating system, [Apply] may not appear. If this is the case, continue with the next step. 8 Select the [General] tab. 9 Click [Printing Preferences]. Printing Preference dialog box appears. 10 Select the default settings for your printer, such as the default media format you use, in the appropriate tabs. 11 Click [Apply]. 12 Click [OK] to exit from the Print preference dialog box. 13 Click [OK] to exit from the Properties dialog box.5-4 Uninstalling the Printer Driver (for Windows) Uninstalling the Printer Driver (for Windows) This section describes how to uninstall the printer driver if necessary. Windows Server 2008 R2/7/Vista/Server 2008/XP/Server 2003/2000 1 Close all applications. 2 Choose the Uninstall Program as follows: – (Windows Server 2008 R2/7/Vista/Server 2008/XP/Server 2003) From the [Start] menu, choose [All programs], [KONICA MINOLTA], [bizhub C35], and then [Uninstall Printer Driver]. – (Windows 2000) From the [Start] menu, choose [Programs], [KONICA MINOLTA], [bizhub C35], and then [Uninstall Printer Driver]. 3 When the Uninstall dialog box appears, select the name of the driver to be deleted, and then click the [Uninstall] button. 4 Click [Uninstall]. 5 Click [OK], and restart your computer. 6 The printer driver will be uninstalled from your computer.Displaying Printer Driver Settings (for Windows) 5-5 Displaying Printer Driver Settings (for Windows) Windows 7/Server 2008 R2 1 From the [Start] menu, choose [Devices and Printers] to display the [Devices and Printers] directory. 2 Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PCL6, KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PS or KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 XPS printer icon, and then click [Printing Preferences]. Windows Vista/Server 2008 1 From the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel], then [Hardware and Sound], and then click [Printers] to open the Printers directory. 2 Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PCL6, KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PS or KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 XPS printer icon, and then click [Printing Preferences]. Windows XP/Server 2003 1 From the [Start] menu, choose [Printers and Faxes] to display the [Printers and Faxes] directory. 2 Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PCL6 or KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PS printer icon and choose [Printing Preferences]. Windows 2000 1 From the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers] to display the [Printers] directory. 2 Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PCL6 or KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PS printer icon and choose [Printing Preferences].5-6 Using the Postscript, PCL and XPS Printer Driver Using the Postscript, PCL and XPS Printer Driver Common Buttons The buttons described below appear on each tab. [OK] Click to exit the Properties dialog box, saving any changes made. [Cancel] Click to exit the Properties dialog box without saving any changes made. [Apply] Click to save all changes without exiting the Properties dialog box. [Help] Click to view the help. [Favorite Setting] This allows the current settings to be saved. To save the current settings, specify the desired settings, and then click [Add]. Specify the settings described below, and then click [OK]. „ [Name]: Type in the name of the settings to be saved. „ [Icon]: Select an icon from the icon list to easily identify the settings. The selected icon appears in the drop-down list. „ [Sharing]: Specify whether or not the settings to be saved can be used by other users logged onto the computer. „ [Comment]: Add a simple comment to the settings to be saved. Afterward, the saved settings can be selected from the drop-down list. To change the registered setting, click [Edit]. In addition, predefined settings can be selected. The predefined settings are those for [2 in 1], [Photo] and [Gray Scale]. Select [Default Setting] from the drop-down list to reset the functions in all tabs to their default values.Using the Postscript, PCL and XPS Printer Driver 5-7 [Printer View] Click the button to display an image of the printer in the figure area. When this button is clicked, it changes to the [Paper View] button (when a tab other than the [Quality] tab is selected) or the [Quality View] button (when the [Quality] tab is selected). " This button does not appear on the [Advanced] tab. [Paper View] Click the button to display a sample of the page layout in the figure area. When this button is clicked, it changes to the [Printer View] button. " This button does not appear on the [Quality] tab. [Quality View] Click the button to display a sample of the settings selected in the [Quality] tab. When this button is clicked, it changes to the [Printer View] button. " This button appears only when the [Quality] tab is selected. [Printer Information] Click this button to start up PageScope Web Connection. " This button is available only if a network connection has been established. [Default] Click the button to reset the settings to their defaults. " This button does not appear on the [Advanced] tab. " When this button is clicked, the settings in the displayed dialog box are reset to their defaults. The settings on other tabs are not changed. [Advanced] Tab (PostScript Printer Driver Only) The [Advanced] Tab allows you to „ Select whether to enable or disable the settings for advanced printing functions (such as booklet printing)5-8 Using the Postscript, PCL and XPS Printer Driver „ Specify the PostScript output method „ Specify whether or not the error messages of a print job are printed „ Print a mirror image „ Specify whether or not the application can directly output PostScript data [My Tab] [My Tab] allows you to „ Display the most frequently used functions (from each tab) whose settings are often changed „ Add or remove displayed functions by clicking [Edit My Tab]. In addition, functions can be added to [My Tab] by right-clicking them on their original tabs. [Basic] Tab The [Basic] Tab allows you to „ Specify the orientation of the media „ Specify the size of the original document „ Select the output media size „ Zoom (expand/reduce) documents „ Specify the paper tray „ Specify the type of media „ Specify the number of copies „ Turn on/off job collation „ Save a print job on the printer and print it later (Job Retention) „ Save a confidential job on the printer and protect it with a password „ Print a single copy for proofing „ Specify user authentication and account track settings „ Print on the back side of paper that has already been printed on " Use paper that has been printed on with this printer. In addition, the page printed with this setting is not guaranteed. " Do not use the following types of paper. - Paper that has been printed on with an inkjet printer - Paper that has been printed on with a monochrome/color laser printer/copier - Paper that has been printed on with any other printer or fax machineUsing the Postscript, PCL and XPS Printer Driver 5-9 " To display a list of jobs saved with a [Job Retention] setting, press [USB/HDD] in the home screen, and then press [Proof Print]. Print the document by selecting the job in the list. The password must be entered if one has been specified for the job. [Layout] Tab The [Layout] Tab allows you to „ Print several pages of a document on the same page (N in 1 printing) „ Print a single copy for enlargement and print several pages (PCL printer driver only) „ Rotate the print image 180 degrees „ Specify whether or not blank pages are printed (PCL and XPS printer driver only) „ Specify duplex (double-sided) printing „ Specify booklet printing „ Specify binding position „ Adjust the binding margin „ Specify the position on the paper where the document is to be printed (PCL printer driver only) [Cover Mode] Tab The [Cover Mode] Tab allows you to „ Print front and back cover pages and separator pages „ Specify the tray that contains the paper for the front and back cover pages and separator pages [Stamp/Composition] Tab " Be sure to use overlays with print jobs with a paper size and orientation that matches the overlay form. In addition, if settings have been specified for [N in 1] or [Booklet] in the printer driver, the overlay form cannot be adjusted to match the specified settings. The settings in the Watermark function of the [Stamp/Composition] tab allows you to „ Select the watermark to be used „ Create, edit or delete watermarks „ Adjust the watermark position5-10 Using the Postscript, PCL and XPS Printer Driver „ Print a frame around watermarks „ Print transparent (shaded) watermarks „ Print the watermark on only the first page „ Print the watermark repeatedly throughout the all pages The [Copy Protect] function prevents unauthorized copying. „ The document is printed with the specified text or pattern in the background. The background pattern is normally inconspicuous, but becomes visible when the document is copied. (PCL printer driver only) The settings in the Overlay function of the [Stamp/Composition] tab allows you to „ Select the form to use „ Add or delete overlay files „ Launch Download Manager to download a form (PostScript printer driver only) " Download Manager Application should be installed earlier. „ Create a form (PCL and XPS printer driver only) „ Specify that the document and form are printed overlapping (PCL and XPS printer driver only) „ Display the form information (PCL and XPS printer driver only) „ Print the form on [All Pages], [1st Page Only], [Even Page] and [Odd Page] „ Place the form in back of the document or in front on the printed document (PCL and XPS printer driver only) [Quality] Tab The [Quality] Tab allows you to „ Switch between color and grayscale printing „ Control the darkness of an image (Brightness) „ Specify the printer color settings „ Perform color separation „ Select whether or not economy printing is used „ Set the edge strength to [Low], [Middle] or [High] „ Specify the amount of details in graphic patterns (PCL and XPS printer driver only) „ Specify the format of fonts that are to be downloaded (PCL and Postscript printer driver only)Using the Postscript, PCL and XPS Printer Driver 5-11 „ Print using the printer’s fonts (PCL and Postscript printer driver only) „ Control the tones of an image (Contrast) (PCL printer driver only) „ Specify the image compression method (PCL printer driver only) „ Select whether or not Auto Trapping function is used (Postscript printer driver only) „ Specify the Black Over Print function (Postscript printer driver only) [Other] Tab The [Other] Tab allows you to „ Select that Microsoft Excel sheets are not to be divided when printing (32bit printer driver only) „ Select that the white background of Microsoft PowerPoint data does not hide overlay files (32bit PCL and XPS printer driver only) „ Send a notification by E-mail when printing is finished „ Shows the version information for the printer driver „ Prevent loss when printing fine lines (PCL printer driver only) Limitations on printer driver functions installed with Point and Print If Point and Print is performed with the following server and client combinations, there are limitations on some printer driver functions. „ Server and client combinations Server: Windows Server 2008 R2/Server 2008/Server 2003 Client: Windows 7/Vista/XP/2000 „ Functions with limitations applied Booklet, Skip Blank Pages, Front Cover, Back Cover, Separator Page, Create Overlay File, Print in Overlay, Watermark *JOBNAME, USERNAME, and HOSTNAME output of PJL5-12 Using the Postscript, PCL and XPS Printer Driver6Proof Print, External memory and ID & Print functions6-2 Proof Print Proof Print Print jobs saved on hard disk can be printed or deleted. " If [Store Job], [Print and Hold], [Secured Job], [Secured Job(Encryption)] or [Proof then Print] was selected for [Job Retention] in the printer driver, the job file is saved on the hard disk. Printing a job saved on the hard disk 1 In the home screen, press [USB/HDD]. 2 Press [Proof Print]. 3 Select a user. 4 Press [OK]. 5 Select the job to be printed. 6 Press [Print]. " If the job was saved with the [Secured Job] or [Secured Job(Encryption)] setting, type in the password. 7 Type in the number of copies to be printed, and then press [OK]. Deleting a job saved on the hard disk 1 In the home screen, press [USB/HDD]. 2 Press [Proof Print]. 3 Select a user. 4 Press [OK]. 5 Select the job to be deleted. 6 Press [Delete]. " If the job was saved with the [Secured Job] or [Secured Job(Encryption)] setting, type in the password. 7 Press [Yes], and then press [OK].External Memory 6-3 External Memory PDF, XPS, JPEG and TIFF files saved on USB memory devices can be printed by plugging the USB memory device into the machine. Printing from a connected USB memory device 1 Plug the USB memory device into the USB HOST port. appears at the bottom of the screen. 2 In the home screen, press [USB/ HDD]. 3 Press [External Memory]. 4 Press [File List]. 5 Select the file to be printed. If the file to be printed is in a folder, select the folder, and then press [Open]. To return to the folder containing the one that is currently displayed, press [Up]. " At each folder level, a maximum of 99 folders and files can be displayed. " The names of folders are displayed given priority over the names of files. " A maximum of eight folder levels can be displayed. " If JPEG and TIFF files are not displayed, select the file type with [File Type]. 6 Press [OK]. 7 Specify the print settings. 8 Press [Print]. " Do not unplug the USB memory device from the USB HOST port during printing.6-4 ID & Print Selecting the type of files to be displayed 1 In the home screen, press [USB/HDD]. 2 Press [External Memory]. 3 Press [File Type]. 4 Select the type of files to be displayed. 5 Press [OK]. ID & Print If a job is printed on this machine with user authentication through the printer driver using the registered user or public user privilege, it is saved as an ID & Print job on the hard disk of this machine. " When using batch printing for an ID & Print job, the copying cannot be interrupted. Printing simultaneously with log-in 1 Specify a name and password for [User Name] and [Password]. – For [User Name], the name can be specified either by directly typing it in or selecting from a list. 2 Press [Begin Printing]. 3 Press [Login]. The user is authenticated and printing starts. Specifying a job to print 1 Specify a name and password for [User Name] and [Password]. – For [User Name], the name can be specified either by directly typing it in or selecting from a list. 2 Press [Access Basic Screen]. 3 Press [Login]. This authenticates the user and returns to the home screen. 4 In the home screen, press [USB/HDD]. 5 Press [ID & Print]. 6 Select [Login User] or [Public User] as the user who sends a job. 7 Select the job to be printed. 8 Press [Print].ID & Print 6-5 Deleting a job 1 Specify a name and password for [User Name] and [Password]. – For [User Name], the name can be specified either by directly typing it in or selecting from a list. 2 Press [Access Basic Screen]. 3 Press [Login]. This authenticates the user and returns to the home screen. 4 In the home screen, press [USB/HDD]. 5 Press [ID & Print]. 6 Select [Login User] or [Public User] as the user who sends a job. 7 Select the job to be deleted. 8 Press [Delete]. 9 Press [Yes], and then press [OK].6-6 ID & Print7Performing Copy mode operations7-2 Basic copy operation Basic copy operation The general procedure for making copies is described below. 1 Place the document on the original glass or load it into the ADF. " For details on positioning the document, refer to “Placing a document on the original glass” on page 4-36 and “Loading a document into the ADF” on page 4-37. 2 In the home screen, press [Copy]. " When the [Start (Color)] or [Start (B&W)] key is pressed in the home screen, the job can be copied with the defaults. 3 Specify the desired copy settings. " For details on specifying document size settings, refer to “[Original Size]” on page 7-4. For details on specifying paper size settings, refer to “[Paper]” on page 7-5. For details on specifying zoom ratio settings, refer to “[Zoom]” on page 7-6. For details on specifying double-sided copy settings, refer to “[Duplex/ Combine]” on page 7-7. For details on specifying density settings, refer to “[Density]” on page 7-8. For details on specifying document type settings, refer to “[Original Basic copy operation 7-3 Type]” on page 7-9. For details on specifying color settings, refer to “[Color Mode]” on page 7-9. For details on specifying Finishing settings, refer to “[Finishing]” on page 7-10. For details on performing the Proof Copy operation, refer to “[Proof Copy]” on page 7-10. For details on performing the Separate Scan operation, refer to “[Separate Scan]” on page 7-11. For details on performing the ID Copy operation, refer to “[ID Copy]” on page 7-13. For details on specifying a binding margin, refer to “[Paper Margin]” on page 7-14. For details on adjusting the image quality, refer to “[Image Quality]” on page 7-15. 4 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies. " If the number of copies was incorrectly entered, press the [C] key, and then type in the correct number of copies. 5 To make a color copy, press the [Start (Color)] key. To make a black-and-white copy, press the [Start (B&W)] key. " This machine cannot automatically detect the size of an original document that will be scanned. Before scanning the document, specify its size. If the size of the original document is not correctly specified, some parts of the image may be lost. For details on specifying the size of an original document, refer to “[Original Size]” on page 7-4. " When sorting or making double-sided or combined copies using the original glass, press [Finish] after all pages of the document have been scanned. " A screen showing the scanned document appears after the [Start (Color)] key or the [Start (B&W)] key is pressed. Check that the document was scanned as desired. [Number Of Originals]: Number of scanned document pages [Number Of Sets]: Number of scanned copies/specified number of copies [Printed/TTL Pgs]: Number of copy pages printed/total number of pages to be printed (Does not appear during a Separate Scan operation.) " For details on interrupted printing (Interrupt Mode), refer to “Interrupting a copy job” on page 8-2.7-4 [Original Size] " For details on copying using stored settings, refer to “Copy programs” on page 8-3. " A document containing pages of different sizes can be loaded into the ADF. For details on copying documents with pages of different sizes, refer to “[Original Size]” on page 7-4. [Original Size] The document size can be specified. Documents of mixed page sizes A document containing pages of different sizes (Letter and Legal) can be loaded into the ADF. Each document page will be copied onto paper of the same size as the original. " Load all document pages so that they are aligned on the left side of the ADF. Item Description [Standard Size] Select the size of the document. Select [Letter/Legal] to copy a document containing different page sizes. [Custom Size] Specify the size of the document if it is a non-standard size. Press [X] and [Y], and then type in the document size. [X] can be set between 30 mm and 356 mm (1.18 inches and 14.00 inches); [Y] can be set between 30 mm and 216 mm (1.18 inches and 8.50 inches).[Paper] 7-5 [Paper] The size and type of the paper to be printed on can be selected, and the size and type settings for the paper loaded into each paper tray can be changed. The paper size can be selected automatically according to the document size or it can be specified manually. " For details on the paper types and sizes, refer to “Print Media” on page 4-2. " When paper is loaded in the bypass tray, the [Paper] screen appears while the bypass tray (tray 1) is selected automatically. Item Description [1]-[4] Manually select the paper tray. [3] and [4] are available if the optional lower feeder units have been installed. [Auto] The paper is selected automatically according to the size of the original document. [Change Tray Set] Specify the type and size of the paper loaded in the selected paper tray. [Paper Size] Specify the paper size. [Standard Size] Select the paper size. [Custom Size] Enter the size of the paper. [Paper Type] Select the paper type.7-6 [Zoom] [Zoom] The image size for the document can be enlarged or reduced. Item Description [+]/[-] Specify the zoom ratio of the copy (25.0% to 400.0%). With documents loaded into the ADF, the zoom ratio can be set between 25% and 200%. [Set Zoom] The various preset zoom ratios and the zoom ratio for the [Minimal] setting can be changed. The zoom ratios can be set between 25.0% and 200.0%. Zoom settings Select a preset zoom ratio or a programmed zoom ratio. [Auto]: Select this setting for the most appropriate zoom ratio to be automatically selected based on the size of the loaded document and the specified paper size. [Full Size]: Select this setting to produce a copy that is the same size as the document (100.0%). [Manual]: Press [+] or [-] to enter a custom zoom ratio. [Minimal]: Select this setting to print a copy of the document image so that it is slightly smaller than the original document size.[Duplex/Combine] 7-7 [Duplex/Combine] Whether the scanned document and the printed copy are printed on just one side or both sides can be specified. In addition, document images of multiple pages (2 or 4 pages) can be combined and printed on a single page. Item Description [Duplex] Select whether simplex (single-sided) or duplex (double-sided) copies are to be printed. [1 > 1]: Select this setting to produce single-sided copies from single-sided documents. [1>2]: Select this setting to produce one double-sided copy from two single-sided documents. [2>1]: Select this setting to produce two single-sided copies from one double-sided document. [2 > 2]: Select this setting to produce double-sided copies from double-sided documents. [Combine] Select whether to make combined copies. [No]: Select this setting to not produce combined copies. [2 in 1]: Select this setting to copy two document pages onto one page. [4 in 1 Horizontal]: Select this setting to copy four document pages onto one page. The document images will be arranged horizontally. [4 in 1 Vertical]: Select this setting to copy four document pages onto one page. The document images will be arranged vertically.7-8 [Density] [Density] Specify the copy density. [Binding Position] Specify the binding positions for the document and the copies. [Orig. Binding Position] Select [Left Bind], [Right Bind], [Top Bind] or [Auto] as the binding position for the document. If the binding position for the document is set to [Auto], the binding position is set at the left or at the top. [Output Binding Position] Select [Left Bind], [Right Bind], [Top Bind] or [Auto] as the binding position for the copies. If the binding position for the copy is set to [Auto], the binding position is set at the left or at the top. [Original Direction] Select [Top], [Bottom], [Left] or [Right] as the orientation of the document loaded into the ADF or placed on the original glass. Item Description [+]/[-] Adjust the copy density to one of nine levels. [Standard] Select this setting to return the copy density to the standard setting. Item Description[Original Type] 7-9 [Original Type] Select the document quality (text or image documents). [Color Mode] Specify the printing color used for copies. Copies will be printed with the specified Color setting when the [Start (Color)] key is pressed. Item Description [Text] Select this setting when copying documents containing only text. [Text/Photo] Select this setting when copying documents containing both text and photos. Black text, color text and shading are automatically recognized, and the most appropriate image processing is performed. In addition, processing appropriate for printed photo documents will be applied to any photos. [Photo] Select this setting when copying documents containing printed photos. Item Description [Auto] Select this setting to detect whether the scanned document is in color or in black and white, then automatically print copies in either color or black and white. [Full Color] Select this setting to print the copy in full color, regardless of whether the scanned document is in color or in black and white.7-10 [Finishing] [Finishing] Specify any settings for finishing outputted copies. [Proof Copy] Before printing a large number of copies, a single finished proof copy can be printed in order to be checked. Select whether or not to print a proof copy. Proof Copy operation " When printing a proof copy, specify multiple copies. 1 In the home screen, press [Copy]. 2 Place the document on the original glass or load it into the ADF. " For details on positioning the document, refer to “Placing a document on the original glass” on page 4-36 and “Loading a document into the ADF” on page 4-37. 3 Specify the copy settings. 4 Press [Proof Copy]. Item Description [Sort] Select this setting when making multiple copies of documents containing multiple pages so that they will be automatically separated into sets of the full document. [Group] Select this setting when making multiple copies of documents containing multiple pages so that they will be automatically separated into sets of each page. [Auto] Select this option to automatically switch between [Sort] and [Group] depending on the number of printable sheets per copy. [Group] is set when printing a single sheet in the 1-sided or 2-sided mode, and [Sort] is set when printing multiple sheets. Item Description [ON] Select this setting to print a proof copy. [OFF] Select this setting to not print a proof copy.[Separate Scan] 7-11 5 Press [ON]. 6 Press [OK]. 7 Press the [Start (Color)] key or the [Start (B&W)] key. A single proof copy is printed. 8 Check the proof copy. If the proof copy was printed as desired, continue with step 9. " Using the keypad, the number of copies can be changed. " To print another proof copy, press [Proof Copy]. " To change the settings, press [Cancel], and then perform steps 2 through 8. 9 Press [Print]. The remaining number of copies is printed. [Separate Scan] The scan operation can be divided into several sessions, for example, when all pages of a document cannot be loaded into the ADF, and then the scanned pages can be treated as a single copy job. In addition, the scanning location can be switched between the original glass and the ADF during the scanning operation. Item Description [ON] Select this setting to perform a Separate Scan operation. [OFF] Select this setting to not perform a Separate Scan operation.7-12 [Separate Scan] Scanning the document in separate batches " Do not load more pages into the ADF than the maximum number of pages allowed, otherwise a document misfeed or damage to the document may occur. " When sorting or making double-sided or combined copies using the original glass, instead of using the Separate Scan operation, the document can be scanned as a multiple-page document. 1 In the home screen, press [Copy]. 2 Place the document on the original glass or load it into the ADF. " For details on positioning the document, refer to “Placing a document on the original glass” on page 4-36 and “Loading a document into the ADF” on page 4-37. 3 Specify the copy settings. 4 Press [Separate Scan]. 5 Press [ON]. 6 Press [OK]. 7 Press the [Start (Color)] key or the [Start (B&W)] key. Scanning of the document begins. " To change the scanning settings, press [Change Settings]. 8 Position the next document page or pages, and then press the [Start (Color)] key or the [Start (B&W)] key. Scanning of the document begins. 9 Repeat step 7 until all document pages have been scanned. 10 After all document pages have been scanned, press [Finish].[ID Copy] 7-13 [ID Copy] The back and front of a card, such as an insurance card, driver’s license or business card, can be scanned separately and printed together on a single page. " With the ID Copy operation, the zoom ratio is set to 100%. " The paper sizes that are available for copying are Letter, Legal and A4. " The card can only be placed on the original glass. Position the card to be scanned aligned at the upper-left corner of the original glass. Since the image is printed 4 mm from the top and left side, reposition the card as necessary 1 In the home screen, press [Copy]. 2 Place the card, front side down, on the original glass. " For details on positioning the document, refer to “Placing a document on the original glass” on page 4-36. 3 Specify the copy settings. 4 Press [ID Copy]. 5 Press the [Start (Color)] key or the [Start (B&W)] key. Scanning of the front side begins. 6 Position the card, back side down, at the same location on the original glass. " To copy only the front side, press [Print]. 7 Press the [Start (Color)] key or the [Start (B&W)] key. Scanning of the back side begins. The copy is fed out. A B7-14 [Paper Margin] [Paper Margin] Copies can be printed with a binding margin so they can easily be stored in filing binders. " If part of the image is lost due to the binding margin setting, reduce the zoom ratio before printing copies. Item Description [+]/[-] Specify the width of the binding margin between 0.1 mm and 20.0 mm (0.001 inches and 0.787 inches). [None] Select this setting to leave no binding margin.[Image Quality] 7-15 [Image Quality] The quality can be adjusted for the document to be scanned. Item Description [Background removal] Adjust the background density when copying documents with a colored background (such as newspapers or recycled paper) or thin documents where the back side is visible from the front side. Adjust the background density to one of nine levels. Select a setting in the + direction to darken the background, or select a setting in the - direction to lighten the background. Press [Standard] to return the density to the standard setting. [Contrast] The image can be adjusted to make it softer or sharper. Adjust the contrast to one of nine levels. Select a setting in the + direction to make the image sharper, or select a setting in the - direction to make the image softer. Press [Std.] to return the contrast to the standard setting. [Sharpness] The sharpness of text and image outlines can be adjusted. Adjust the sharpness to one of seven levels. Select a setting in the + direction to increase the sharpness, or select a setting in the - direction to decrease the sharpness. Press [Std.] to return the sharpness to the standard setting.7-16 [Image Quality]8Additional copy operations8-2 Interrupting a copy job Interrupting a copy job The current jobs can be temporarily interrupted so a document can be copied with different copy settings. This is convenient for quickly making a copy. " The [Interrupt] key cannot be pressed while a document is being scanned. " When the [Interrupt] key is pressed, the copy settings return to their defaults. 1 In the home screen, press [Copy]. 2 Place the document on the original glass or load it into the ADF. " For details on positioning the document, refer to “Placing a document on the original glass” on page 4-36 and “Loading a document into the ADF” on page 4-37. 3 Press the [Interrupt] key. The indicator on the [Interrupt] key lights up in green, and printing of the current job stops. 4 Specify the copy settings. 5 To make a color copy, press the [Start (Color)] key. To make a black-and-white copy, press the [Start (B&W)] key. 6 After the interrupting job has finished printing, press the [Interrupt] key. The indicator on the [Interrupt] key goes off, and Interrupt mode is canceled. Printing of the job that was interrupted continues.Copy programs 8-3 Copy programs Frequently used copy settings can be stored together as a program to easily be recalled later. Storing a copy program " A maximum of 15 copy programs can be stored. 1 In the home screen, press [Copy]. 2 Specify the copy settings. 3 Press the [Mode Memory] key. The copy programs screen appear. 4 Press [Register]. 5 Press [Name]. 6 Type in the name of the copy program, and then press [OK]. " For details on entering text, refer to “Entering text” on page A-8. 7 Press [OK]. 8 Press [Cancel]. The initial Copy mode screen appears again. Deleting a copy program 1 In the home screen, press [Copy]. 2 Press the [Mode Memory] key. The copy programs screen appear. 3 Select the copy program to be deleted. 4 Press [Delete]. 5 Press [Yes]. 6 Press [OK]. 7 Press [Cancel]. The initial Copy mode screen appears again.8-4 Copy programs Copying using stored settings (copy programs) 1 In the home screen, press [Copy]. 2 Place the document on the original glass or load it into the ADF. " For details on positioning the document, refer to “Placing a document on the original glass” on page 4-36 and “Loading a document into the ADF” on page 4-37. 3 Press the [Mode Memory] key. The copy programs screen appear. 4 Select the copy program to be recalled. 5 Press [Detail]. The settings screen appears. 6 Check the copy settings stored with the selected copy program. 7 Press [Close]. 8 Press [OK]. The initial Copy mode screen appears again. 9 Press the [Start (Color)] key or the [Start (B&W)] key.9Scanning From a Computer Application9-2 Basic Scanning Operation Basic Scanning Operation Documents can be scanned from a computer connected to this machine via a network. Scanning settings can be specified and the scanning operation can be performed from TWAIN- or WIA-compatible applications. From the scanner driver, a preview can be displayed and various adjustments, such as the size of the scan area, can be specified. " For details on the installation of the scanner driver or network TWAIN settings, refer to the Installation Guide on the Documentation CD/ DVD. 1 Position the document to be scanned. " For details on positioning the document, refer to “Placing a document on the original glass” on page 4-36 and “Loading a document into the ADF” on page 4-37. 2 Start the application to be used for scanning. 3 Start the scanner driver according to the application settings. 4 Specify the necessary scanner driver settings. 5 Click the [Scan] button in the scanner driver.Windows TWAIN Driver Settings 9-3 Windows TWAIN Driver Settings Mode settings „ [Mode Settings] Select [Basic Mode] for specifying basic settings, or select [Advanced Mode] for specifying detailed settings. The settings that can be specified differ for each mode. When [Basic Mode] is selected The following parameters can be set when [Basic Mode] is selected. „ [Help] icon Click to display Help information. „ [About] icon Click to display the software version information. „ [Scan Objective] Specify the document type. „ [Scan Type] Specify the scan type. „ [Resolution] Specify the resolution. „ [Auto Color Adjustment] Specify the auto color adjustment settings. „ [Auto Deskew] Specify settings for correcting the skew of the image. „ [Paper source] Specify the paper source. When scanning documents from the ADF, select whether to scan only the front side or both sides of the document. „ [Original Size] Specify the original size. „ [Rotation] Select the orientation of the image to be scanned.9-4 Windows TWAIN Driver Settings " If the [Rotate back side] check box is selected, the back side of the image is rotated 180° and scanned. (Applies only if [ADF (2-sided)] is selected.) „ [Image size] Shows the data size of the scan image. „ [Close] Click to close the TWAIN driver window. „ [Prescan] Click to begin scanning a preview image. „ [Scan] Click to begin scanning. „ [Clear] icon Click to erase the preview image. When [Advanced Mode] is selected The following parameters can be set when [Advanced Mode] is selected. „ [Load] Specify a saved settings file (dat file) for scanning. „ [Save] Save the current settings as a settings file (dat file). „ [Default] Return all settings to their defaults. „ [Help icon] Click to display the Help. „ [About icon] Click to display the software version information. „ [Paper source] Specify the paper source. With scanning documents from the ADF, select whether to scan only the front side or both sides of the document. „ [Original Size] Specify the original size. „ [Scan Type] Specify the scan type.Windows TWAIN Driver Settings 9-5 „ [Resolution] Specify the resolution. „ [Scale] Specify the enlargement or reduction ratio for the selected area. " If the resolution is set at 1200 × 1200dpi or higher, a setting larger than 100% cannot be specified. „ Scanning Mode Select [Auto] or [Manual]. When [Manual] is selected, a tab appears so that detailed settings can be specified, for example, for [Brightness/Contrast], [Filter], [Curves], [Levels], [Color Balance], and [Hue/Saturation]. " The parameters that can be set differ depending on the scanning mode that is selected. " The detailed settings that appear differ depending on the setting selected for [Scan Type]. " If [Auto] is selected as the scanning mode, scanning from the original glass is performed after a prescan is performed so that a preview image can be checked. „ [Image size] Shows the data size of the scan image. „ [Rotation] Select the orientation of the image to be scanned. " If the [Rotate back side] check box is selected, the back side of the image is rotated 180° and scanned. (Applies only if [ADF (2-sided)] is selected) „ [Auto Deskew] Specify settings for correcting the skew of the image. „ [Close] Click to close the TWAIN driver window. „ [Prescan] Click to begin scanning a preview image. „ [Scan] Click to begin scanning. „ [AutoCrop] icon Click to automatically detect the scanning position based on the preview image.9-6 Windows TWAIN Driver Settings „ [Zoom Prescan] icon Click to rescan the area selected in the preview window and enlarge it to fit the window. „ [Mirror] icon Click to display a mirror image of the preview image. „ [Tone Reversal] icon Click to reverse the colors of the preview image. „ [Clear] icon Click to erase the preview image. „ [Preview] window Displays a preview image. Drag the rectangle over the image to select an area. „ [Before (RGB)]/[After] Move the pointer in the preview window to display the color tones at the pointer’s position before and after adjustments. „ [Width]/[Height] Displays the width and height for the selected area in the selected measurement units.Windows WIA Driver Settings 9-7 Windows WIA Driver Settings „ [Paper source] Select the paper source. „ [Color picture] Select this setting when scanning in color. „ [Grayscale picture] Select this setting when scanning in grayscale. „ [Black and white picture or text] Select this setting when scanning in black and white. „ [Custom Settings] Select this setting when scanning with [Adjust the quality of the scanned picture] settings applied. " If settings have been specified with [Adjust the quality of the canned picture], [Custom Settings] is automatically selected. „ [Adjust the quality of the scanned picture] Click this message to display the Advanced Properties dialog box. In the Advanced Properties dialog box, settings can be specified for [Brightness], [Contrast], [Resolution(DPI)], and [Picture type] (select from color, grayscale or black and white). " These settings are applied when [Custom Settings] is selected. „ [Page size] Specify the paper size when [Page source] is set to [Document Feeder]. „ Preview window Displays a preview image. Drag the rectangle over the image to select an area. „ [Preview] Click to begin scanning a preview image. „ [Scan] Click to begin scanning. „ [Cancel] Click to close the WIA driver window.9-8 Macintosh TWAIN Driver Settings Macintosh TWAIN Driver Settings Mode settings „ [Mode Settings] Select [Basic Mode] for specifying basic settings, or select [Advanced Mode] for specifying detailed settings. The settings that can be specified differ for each mode. When [Basic Mode] is selected The following parameters can be set when [Basic Mode] is selected. „ [Help] icon Click to display Help information. „ [About] icon Click to display the software version information. „ [Scan Objective] Specify the document type. „ [Scan Type] Specify the scan type. „ [Resolution] Specify the resolution. „ [Auto Color Adjustment] Specify the auto color adjustment settings. „ [Auto Deskew] Specify settings for correcting the skew of the image. „ [Paper source] Specify the paper source. When scanning documents from the ADF, select whether to scan only the front side or both sides of the document. „ [Original Size] Specify the original size. „ [Rotation] Select the orientation of the image to be scanned.Macintosh TWAIN Driver Settings 9-9 " If the [Rotate back side] check box is selected, the back side of the image is rotated 180° and scanned. (Applies only if [ADF (2-sided)] is selected.) „ [Image size] Shows the data size of the scan image. „ [Close] Click to close the TWAIN driver window. „ [Prescan] Click to begin scanning a preview image. „ [Scan] Click to begin scanning. „ [Clear] icon Click to erase the preview image. When [Advanced Mode] is selected The following parameters can be set when [Advances Mode] is selected. „ [Load] Specify a saved settings file (dat file) for scanning. „ [Save] Save the current settings as a settings file (dat file). „ [Default] Return all settings to their defaults. „ Help icon Click to display the Help. „ About icon Click to display the software version information. „ [Paper source] Specify the paper source. With scanning documents from the ADF, select whether to scan only the front side or both sides of the document. „ [Original Size] Specify the original size. „ [Scan Type] Specify the scan type.9-10 Macintosh TWAIN Driver Settings „ [Resolution] Specify the resolution. „ [Scale] Specify the enlargement or reduction ratio for the selected area. " If the resolution is set at 1200 × 1200dpi or higher, a setting larger than 100% cannot be specified. „ [Scanning Mode] Select [Auto] or [Manual]. When [Manual] is selected, a tab appears so that detailed settings can be specified, for example, for [Brightness/Contrast], [Filter], [Curves], [Levels], [Color Balance], and [Hue/Saturation]. " The parameters that can be set differ depending on the scanning mode that is selected. " The detailed settings that appear differ depending on the setting selected for [Scan Type]. " If [Auto] is selected as the scanning mode, scanning from the original glass is performed after a prescan is performed so that a preview image can be checked. „ [Image size] Shows the data size of the scan image. „ [Rotation] Select the orientation of the image to be scanned. " If the [Rotate back side] check box is selected, the back side of the image is rotated 180° and scanned. (Applies only if [ADF (2-sided)] is selected) „ [Auto Deskew] Specify settings for correcting the skew of the image. „ [Close] Click to close the TWAIN driver window. „ [Prescan] Click to begin scanning a preview image. „ [Scan] Click to begin scanning. „ [AutoCrop] icon Click to automatically detect the scanning position based on the preview image.Macintosh TWAIN Driver Settings 9-11 „ [Zoom Prescan] icon Click to rescan the area selected in the preview window and enlarge it to fit the window. „ [Mirror] icon Click to display a mirror image of the preview image. „ [Tone Reversal] icon Click to reverse the colors of the preview image. „ [Clear] icon Click to erase the preview image. „ Preview window Displays a preview image. Drag the rectangle over the image to select an area. „ [Before (RGB)]/[After] Move the pointer in the preview window to display the color tones at the pointer’s position before and after adjustments. „ [Width]/[Height] Displays the width and height for the selected area in the selected measurement units.9-12 Using a Web Service Using a Web Service The scan command can be sent from a computer (Windows 7/Vista/Server 2008) on the network or this machine can scan using a specified operation, and the scan data can be sent to a computer. The settings that must be specified in advance on the computer are described below. Settings required to use a Web Service The following settings are required in order to use a Web Service. „ Install this machine on the computer. „ Specify settings on the machine for using a Web Service. " Specify the Web Service settings on the machine from the Admin Settings screen. For details, refer to the [Reference Guide]. Installing this machine on the computer Confirmation before installation Before installation, make sure that “Network Discovery” (Network and Sharing Center in Control Panel) is enabled. Installation procedure 1 In the Start button menu, click “Network”. The devices connected to the network appear. 2 Right-click the scanner icon for this machine, and then click “Install”. – Depending on the settings specified on the computer, a UAC (User Account Control) message may appear. Check the information described in the message, and then continue with the procedure. – If both scanning and printing using a Web Service have been enabled on this machine, this machine appears as a printer icon. – The driver software is automatically installed. After a confirmation message appears, click [Close]. 3 From the control panel of the machine, select [Scan to Folder] - [Direct Input] - [Web Service Settings], and then check that a destination appears.Using a Web Service 9-13 Specifying the scan command from a computer (Web Service) A computer can send the scan command to this machine, then receive the scan data. As an example, the procedure for scanning from the Windows Photo Gallery is described below. " The scan command can also be sent from this machine, where the data will be saved. For details, refer to “With [Web Service Settings]” on page 10-32. Specifying the scan command from a computer 1 Start up the application used for scanning. 2 In the “File” menu, click “From Scanner or Camera”. 3 From the “Select Device” list, select this machine, and then click [OK]. The New Scan window appears. 4 Position the document on this machine. – Specify the scan settings, and then click [Scan]. Scanning begins, and the scan data is added to the list of image files.9-14 Using a Web Service10 1Scanning with the machine10-2 Initial settings Initial settings This machine is equipped with scanning functions for saving data on this machine’s hard disk or on a USB memory device, and with network scanning functions for sending scanned image data through the network with E-mail transmissions, FTP transmissions, SMB transmissions, WebDAV transmissions and Web Service transmissions. „ In order to perform an FTP transmission, a connection to the network is required, and parameters must be specified on the [TCP/IP] and [FTP] screens. „ In order to perform an SMB transmission, a connection to the network is required, and parameters must be specified on the [TCP/IP] and [SMB] screens. „ In order to perform a WebDAV transmission, a connection to the network is required, and parameters must be specified on the [TCP/IP] and [WebDAV] screens. „ In order to perform a Web Service transmission, a connection to the network is required, and parameters must be specified on the [TCP/IP] and [WSD Print] screens. „ In order to perform an E-mail transmission, a connection to the network is required, parameters must be specified on the [TCP/IP] and [SMTP] screens, and an E-mail address must be registered for [Administrator Registration]. „ For details on specifying network settings, refer to the [Reference Guide]. Useful functions „ The destinations (recipients) for scan data can be registered as address book destinations or group destinations. „ The destination and scan settings can be registered together as a single program. This is convenient for frequently scanning documents and sending data under the same conditions.Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations 10-3 Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations Basic Scan to E-mail operation The basic procedure for the Scan to E-mail operation, which sends scan data with an E-mail transmission, is described below. 1 Press [Scan to E-mail] to display the initial Scan to E-mail mode screen. 2 Place the document in the ADF or on the original glass. – For details on loading the original document, refer to “Loading a Document” on page 4-36. " If the document contains more pages than can be loaded into the ADF, set [Settings] - [Original Settings] - [Separate Scan] to [ON] so that the document can be divided and scanned separately. For details, refer to “[Original Settings] - [Separate Scan]” on page 10-5. " To scan multiple document pages using the original glass and send them as combined scan data, set [Settings] - [Original Settings] - [Separate Scan] to [ON]. For details on [Separate Scan], refer to “[Original Settings] - [Separate Scan]” on page 10-5. 3 Specify the destination. – For details on specifying destinations, refer to “Specifying destinations” on page 10-14. – In the initial Scan to E-mail mode screen, press [Mode Check] to check or change the specified destinations. 4 If necessary, specify settings for other parameters in the [Settings] screen. – For details on the [Simplex/Duplex], [Original Size], [Original Settings], [Color Mode] and [Original Type] parameters available from the [Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying document settings” on page 10-4. – For details on the [Background/Density], [Resolution] and [File Settings] parameters available from the [Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying scan settings” on page 10-8. – For details on the [Communication] parameters available from the [Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying communication settings” on page 10-12.10-4 Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations 5 Press the [Start] key. – Press the [Start (Color)] key to scan in color, or press the [Start (B&W)] key to scan in black and white. " This machine cannot automatically detect the size of an original document that will be scanned. Before scanning the document, specify its size. If the size of the original document is not correctly specified, some parts of the image may be lost. For details on specifying the size of an original document, refer to “[Original Size]” on page 10-5. " If the memory becomes full while the document is being scanned, scanning cannot continue. To send the document pages that have already been scanned, press the [Start] key. To stop the transmission, press the [Stop] key. Specifying document settings The [Simplex/Duplex], [Original Size], [Original Settings], [Color Mode] and [Original Type] parameters available from the [Settings] screen can be used to specify document settings. [Simplex/Duplex] Select whether double-sided documents are to be scanned when the ADF is used. Item Description [1-sided] Select this setting when scanning a single-sided document. [2-sided] Select this setting when scanning a doublesided document. [Cover + 2-sided] Select this setting when scanning a doublesided document with a cover page. Only the front side of the cover page will be scanned, and then both the front and back sides of the remaining pages will be scanned.Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations 10-5 [Original Size] Specify the size of the document that is to be sent. [Original Settings] - [Separate Scan] A document can be divided and scanned separately. The scan operation can be divided into several sessions, for example, when the document contains more pages than can be loaded into the ADF or when the original glass is being used to scan a document containing multiple pages, and then all scanned pages can be sent as a single document. 1 Place the document in the ADF or on the original glass. 2 Press [Scan to E-mail] to display the initial Scan to E-mail mode screen. 3 With [Original Settings] in the [Settings] screen, set [Separate Scan] to [ON]. 4 Press the [Start] key. The document is scanned. 5 Place the next document page on the original glass, and then press the [Start] key. – Repeat this step until all document pages have been scanned. 6 After all pages of the document have been scanned, press [Finish]. Item Description [Standard Size] Select the size of the document. Select [Letter/Legal] to scan a document containing different page sizes. [Custom Size] Specify the size of the document if it is a non-standard size. Press [X] and [Y], and then type in the document size. [X] can be set between 30 mm and 356 mm (1.18 inches and 14.00 inches); [Y] can be set between 30 mm and 216 mm (1.18 inches and 8.50 inches).10-6 Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations [Original Settings] - [Original Direction] Specify the orientation of the document. [Original Settings] - [Orig. Binding Position] Specify the binding position when scanning a double-sided document using the ADF. The orientation of the back sides of the pages differs depending on whether the double-sided document will be bound at the top or at the left. Item Description [Top] Select this setting when the document is loaded with its top edge at the top. [Bottom] Select this setting when the document is loaded with its top edge at the bottom. [Left] Select this setting when the document is loaded with its top edge at the left (at the right when placed on the original glass). [Right] Select this setting when the document is loaded with its top edge at the right (at the left when placed on the original glass). Item Description [Left Bind] Select this setting to specify a binding position at the left. [Top Bind] Select this setting to specify a binding position at the top. [Auto] Select this setting to automatically specify the binding position. If the document length is 297 mm (11.69 inches) or less, a binding position along the long side of the paper is selected. If the document length is more than 297 mm (11.69 inches), a binding position along the short side of the paper is selected.Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations 10-7 [Color Mode] Select whether the document will be scanned in color or black and white. " [Black] may not be available, depending on the setting selected for [File Type]. [Original Type] Select the appropriate image quality setting according to content of the document. Item Description [Color] [Auto] Select this setting to automatically detect the color of the document and scan it with the corresponding setting. [Full Color] Select this setting to scan in full color. [Monochrome] [Gray Scale] Select this setting for documents with many halftones, such as in black-and-white photos. [Black] Select this setting for documents with distinct black and white areas, such as in line drawings. Item Description [Text] Select this setting when scanning documents containing only text. [Text/Photo] Select this setting when scanning documents containing a combination of text and photos. [Photo] Select this setting when scanning documents containing only photos.10-8 Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations Specifying scan settings The [Background/Density], [Resolution] and [File Settings] parameters available from the [Settings] screen can be used to specify scan settings. [Background/Density] Specify the appropriate image quality settings for the document. [Resolution] Select the resolution at which the document is to be scanned. " A finer scan has more information to be sent, therefore, the transmission time increases. " If [File Type] is set to [Compact PDF], [Resolution] can only be set to [300×300dpi]. Item Description [Background Removal] Select the density of the background color at which documents with a background color are to be scanned. Nine density levels are available for the background color. [Density] Select the density at which the document is to be scanned. Nine density levels are available. Select the appropriate density setting according to your document. [Sharpness] Select the strength of outlines, for example, on characters and lines, for scanning the document. To scan characters and lines with greater sharpness, select a setting in the + direction. Seven sharpness levels are available. Item Description [150×150dpi] Select this setting to scan the document at 150 × 150 dpi. [200×200dpi] Select this setting to scan the document at 200 × 200 dpi. [300×300dpi] Select this setting to scan the document at 300 × 300 dpi. [600×600dpi] Select this setting to scan the document at 600 × 600 dpi.Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations 10-9 [File Settings] - [File Type] Select the file format for the scan data to be saved. " The [File Type] parameter may not be available, depending on the settings selected for [Color Mode] and [Resolution]. " If [File Type] is set to [Compact PDF], [Resolution] can only be set to [300×300dpi]. [File Settings] - [Scan Setting] Select whether the data is divided into individual pages or multi-page data is created when multiple pages are scanned. Item Description [PDF] Select this setting to save the data in the PDF format. [Compact PDF] Select this setting to save the data compressed more than with the PDF format. [TIFF] Select this setting to save data in the TIFF format. [JPEG] Select this setting to save the data in the JPEG format. [XPS] Select this setting to save data in the XPS format. Item Description [Single Page] Select this setting to save the data divided into individual pages. [Multi Page] Select this setting to save the scan as multi-page data.10-10 Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations [File Settings] - [PDF Encrypt] Specify the encryption settings when [PDF] or [Compact PDF] is selected. Item Description [Encryption Level] [Yes] Select this setting to enable encryption. After selecting this setting, set the encryption level to [Low], [Middle] or [High]. [No] Select this setting to disable encryption. [Password] Type in the password required to open encrypted data. (up to 32 characters) [Document Permissions] Type in the password required to change the permissions for a document. (up to 32 characters)Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations 10-11 [Details] If encryption has been enabled, detailed permission settings can be specified. "This appears only if [Encryption Level] is set to [Yes] and a password has been specified for [Document Permissions]. [Printing Allowed] Select whether to allow the data to be printed ([Allow]), to prohibit printing ([Restrict]), or to allow printing only at a low resolution ([Low Resolution]). [Changes Allowed] Select whether to allow or prohibit document editing, such as signing, entering text and annotating the data, and select the permission level if it is allowed. [Level 1]: Pages can be inserted, deleted and rotated. [Level 2]: Annotations can be created, data can be entered in form fields, and signatures can be added to existing signature fields. [Level 3]: All operations, except page extracting, can be performed. [Level 4]: Data can be entered in form fields, and signatures can be added to existing signature fields. [Level 5]: The page layout can be changed, data can be entered in form fields, and signatures can be added to existing signature fields. "Levels 1, 2, 3 and 5 appear only when [Encryption Level] is set to [Low]. Levels 1, 2, 3 and 4 appear when [Encryption Level] is set to [Middle] or [High]. [Enable Copying] Select whether to allow text and images in a document to be copied ([Allow]) or to prohibit it ([Restrict]). Item Description10-12 Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations Specifying communication settings The [Communication] parameters available from the [Settings] screen can be used to specify settings for E-mail transmissions. [Binary Division] Select whether or not transmission data is divided. [E-mail Encryption] [Send Use Signature] Item Description [ON] Select this setting to divide transmission data. [OFF] Select this setting to not divide transmission data. [Admin. Setting] The setting specified with [Admin Settings] - [Ethernet] - [Binary Division] is given priority. Description Settings [ON] / [OFF] Specify settings for E-mail encryption. Description Settings [ON] / [OFF] Select whether or not a digital signature is applied to E-mail messages.Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations 10-13 [E-mail] Specify the subject and address of E-mail messages. Item Description [File Name] Type in the document name for the scan data. [Subject] Type in the subject for E-mail messages. [From] Specify the sender’s address. Select [Administrator E-mail Addr.] or [User Address], or type it in directly. [Body] Type in the body text for the E-mail message.10-14 Specifying destinations Specifying destinations Use any of the following methods to specify destinations. „ “Selecting from registered destinations” on page 10-27 „ “Directly typing in the address” on page 10-29 „ “Selecting from the log” on page 10-32 Selecting from registered destinations An address book destination or group destination can be selected from those previously registered on the machine. " In order to select a registered destination, address book destinations and group destinations must first be registered on the machine. For details, refer to “Registering destinations” on page 10-34. " In [User Settings] - [Machine Settings] - [Scan to E-mail Default Tab], you can specify the default destination tab in the Scan to E-mail mode screen. For details, refer to “[Machine Settings]” on page 3-13. Selecting from the Favorites list When destinations are registered, they can be specified as [Favorites]. As a default, the [Favorites] destination list appears when the initial Scan to E-mail mode screen is displayed. Select a destination from the list. To specify multiple destinations for a broadcast transmission, specify all destinations where the data is to be sent. " The setting for the Favorites list can be specified for a destination when it is registered. For details, refer to “Registering an address book destination” on page 10-35.Specifying destinations 10-15 Selecting with an index search Destinations can be selected by searching for the index characters specified when each destination was registered. 1 In the initial Scan to E-mail mode screen, press . 2 Press the desired index tab to search for destinations. – If the desired index tab is not displayed, press [ ] or [ ] until the desired tab appears. – To select a group destination, press [Group]. 3 Select the destination, and then press [OK]. " To specify multiple destinations, specify all destinations where the data is to be sent. Selecting by searching for a destination type or name Destinations can be selected by searching for their type or name. 1 In the initial Scan to E-mail mode screen, press . 2 Press [Search]. 3 Select the method to search for destinations. – [Type]: Select the destination type (“Fax”, “E-mail”, etc.). – [Name]: Directly enter the name of the destination to be searched for. Type in the name to be searched for, and then press [OK] to display a list of the search results. 4 Select the destination, and then press [OK]. – To specify multiple destinations, select all destinations where the data is to be sent. 5 Press [OK].10-16 Specifying destinations Directly typing in the address To specify a destination that is not registered with the machine, directly type in the address. 1 In the initial Scan to E-mail mode screen, press [Direct Input]. 2 Press [E-mail]. 3 Type in the E-mail address. 4 Press [OK]. " To specify multiple destinations, specify all destinations where the data is to be sent. " If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Manual Destination Input] is set to [Restrict], an address cannot be directly typed in. For details on [Manual Destination Input], refer to “[Security Settings]” on page 3-70. Selecting from the log A destination can be selected from the log of the last five transmissions. 1 In the initial Scan to E-mail mode screen, press [Log]. 2 Select the destination from the list, and then press the [Start] key. " Only one destination can be selected from the log. " The only destinations that appear in the log are those specified after pressing [Direct Input]. In addition, destinations specified with broadcast transmissions do not appear in the log. " When the machine is turned off, the log is cleared. " If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Disable Job History Display] is set to [ON], a destination cannot be selected from the log.Specifying destinations 10-17 Selecting a program destination Data can be sent with a program destination previously registered on the machine. Program destinations are registered with destinations where data is frequently sent together with scan settings allowing data to easily be sent without the trouble of specifying the various settings. " In order to select a program destination, the program destination must first be registered on the machine. For details, refer to “Registering a program destination” on page 10-37. 1 Press [Scan to E-mail] to display the initial Scan to E-mail mode screen. – For details on the initial Fax screen, refer to “Initial Scan to E-mail mode screen” on page 2-9. 2 Position the document to be scanned. – For details on loading the original document, refer to “Loading a Document” on page 4-36. 3 Press the [Mode Memory] key. 4 Select the desired program destination from the list, and then press [OK]. The settings and destination addresses are recalled. " Only one program destination can be selected. 5 Press the [Start] key. – Press the [Start (Color)] key to scan in color, or press the [Start (B&W)] key to scan in black and white.10-18 Performing Scan to Folder mode operations Performing Scan to Folder mode operations Basic Scan to Folder operation The basic procedure for the Scan to Folder operation, which sends scan data to the machine’s hard disk, a USB memory device or to a folder on the network, is described below. 1 Press [Scan to Folder] to display the initial Scan to Folder mode screen. 2 Place the document in the ADF or on the original glass. – For details on loading the original document, refer to “Loading a Document” on page 4-36. " If the document contains more pages than can be loaded into the ADF, set [Settings] - [Original Settings] - [Separate Scan] to [ON] so that the document can be divided and scanned separately. For details, refer to “[Original Settings] - [Separate Scan]” on page 10-21. " To scan multiple document pages using the original glass and send them as combined scan data, set [Settings] - [Original Settings] - [Separate Scan] to [ON]. For details on “Separate Scan”, refer to “[Original Settings] - [Separate Scan]” on page 10-21. 3 Specify the destination. – For details on specifying destinations, refer to “Specifying destinations” on page 10-27. – In the initial Scan to Folder mode screen, press [Mode Check] to check or change the specified destinations. 4 If necessary, specify settings for other parameters in the [Settings] screen. – For details on the [Simplex/Duplex], [Original Size], [Original Settings], [Color Mode] and [Original Type] parameters available from the [Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying document settings” on page 10-20. – For details on the [Background/Density], [Resolution] and [File Settings] parameters available from the [Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying scan settings” on page 10-23. – For details on the [File Name] parameter available from the [Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying the document name” on page 10-26. – For details on the [Communication] parameters available from the [Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying communication settings” on page 10-27.Performing Scan to Folder mode operations 10-19 5 Press the [Start] key. – Press the [Start (Color)] key to scan in color, or press the [Start (B&W)] key to scan in black and white. " This machine cannot automatically detect the size of an original document that will be scanned. Before scanning the document, specify its size. If the size of the original document is not correctly specified, some parts of the image may be lost. For details on specifying the size of an original document, refer to “[Original Size]” on page 10-20. " If the memory becomes full while the document is being scanned, scanning cannot continue. To send the document pages that have already been scanned, press the [Start] key. To stop the transmission, press the [Stop] key. " To check a scan job, press [Job], and then press [Save] in the [Log] screen.10-20 Performing Scan to Folder mode operations Specifying document settings The [Simplex/Duplex], [Original Size], [Original Settings], [Color Mode] and [Original Type] parameters available from the [Settings] screen can be used to specify document settings. [Simplex/Duplex] Select whether double-sided documents are to be scanned when the ADF is used. [Original Size] Specify the size of the document that is to be sent. Item Description [1-sided] Select this setting when scanning a single-sided document. [2-sided] Select this setting when scanning a doublesided document. [Cover + 2-sided] Select this setting when scanning a doublesided document with a cover page. Only the front side of the cover page will be scanned, and then both the front and back sides of the remaining pages will be scanned. Item Description [Standard Size] Select the size of the document. Select [Letter/Legal] to scan a document containing different page sizes. [Custom Size] Specify the size of the document if it is a non-standard size. Press [X] and [Y], and then type in the document size. [X] can be set between 30 mm and 356 mm (1.18 inches and 14.00 inches); [Y] can be set between 30 mm and 216 mm (1.18 inches and 8.50 inches).Performing Scan to Folder mode operations 10-21 [Original Settings] - [Separate Scan] A document can be divided and scanned separately. The scan operation can be divided into several sessions, for example, when the document contains more pages than can be loaded into the ADF or when the original glass is being used to scan a document containing multiple pages, and then all scanned pages can be sent as a single document. 1 Place the document in the ADF or on the original glass. 2 Press [Scan to Folder] to display the initial Scan to Folder mode screen. 3 With [Original Settings] in the [Settings] screen, set [Separate Scan] to [Yes]. 4 Press the [Start] key. The document is scanned. 5 Place the next document page on the original glass, and then press the [Start] key. Repeat this step until all document pages have been scanned. 6 After all pages of the document have been scanned, press [Finish]. [Original Settings] - [Original Direction] Specify the orientation of the document. Item Description [Top] Select this setting when the document is loaded with its top edge at the top. [Bottom] Select this setting when the document is loaded with its top edge at the bottom. [Left] Select this setting when the document is loaded with its top edge at the left (at the right when placed on the original glass). [Right] Select this setting when the document is loaded with its top edge at the right (at the left when placed on the original glass).10-22 Performing Scan to Folder mode operations [Original Settings] - [Orig. Binding Position] Specify the binding position when scanning a double-sided document using the ADF. The orientation of the back sides of the pages differs depending on whether the double-sided document will be bound at the top or at the left. [Color Mode] Select whether the document will be scanned in color or black and white. " [Black] may not be available, depending on the setting selected for [File Type]. Item Description [Left Bind] Select this setting to specify a binding position at the left. [Top Bind] Select this setting to specify a binding position at the top. [Auto] Select this setting to automatically specify the binding position. If the document length is 297 mm (11.69 inches) or less, a binding position along the long side of the paper is selected. If the document length is more than 297 mm (11.69 inches), a binding position along the short side of the paper is selected. Item Description [Color] [Auto] Select this setting to automatically detect the color of the document and scan it with the corresponding setting. [Full Color] Select this setting to scan in full color. [Monochrome] [GrayScale] Select this setting for documents with many halftones, such as in black-and-white photos. [Black] Select this setting for documents with distinct black and white areas, such as in line drawings.Performing Scan to Folder mode operations 10-23 [Original Type] Select the appropriate image quality setting according to the content of the document. Specifying scan settings The [Background/Density], [Resolution] and [File Settings] parameters available from the [Settings] screen can be used to specify scan settings. [Background/Density] Specify the appropriate image quality settings for the document. Item Description [Text] Select this setting when scanning documents containing only text. [Text/Photo] Select this setting when scanning documents containing a combination of text and photos. [Photo] Select this setting when scanning documents containing only photos. Item Description [Background Removal] Select the density of the background color at which documents with a background color are to be scanned. Nine density levels are available for the background color. [Density] Select the density at which the document is to be scanned. Nine density levels are available. Select the appropriate density setting according to your document. [Sharpness] Select the strength of outlines, for example, on characters and lines, for scanning the document. To scan characters and lines with greater sharpness, select a setting in the + direction. Seven sharpness levels are available.10-24 Performing Scan to Folder mode operations [Resolution] Select the resolution at which the document is to be scanned. " A finer scan has more information to be sent, therefore, the transmission time increases. " If [File Type] is set to [Compact PDF], [Resolution] can only be set to [300×300dpi]. [File Settings] - [File Type] Select the file format for the scan data to be saved. " The [File Type] parameter may not be available, depending on the settings selected for [Color Mode] and [Resolution]. " If [File Type] is set to [Compact PDF], [Resolution] can only be set to [300×300dpi]. Item Description [150×150dpi] Select this setting to scan the document at 150 × 150 dpi. [200×200dpi] Select this setting to scan the document at 200 × 200 dpi. [300×300dpi] Select this setting to scan the document at 300 × 300 dpi. [600×600dpi] Select this setting to scan the document at 600 × 600 dpi. Item Description [PDF] Select this setting to save the data in the PDF format. [Compact PDF] Select this setting to save the data compressed more than with the PDF format. [TIFF] Select this setting to save data in the TIFF format. [JPEG] Select this setting to save the data in the JPEG format. [XPS] Select this setting to save data in the XPS format.Performing Scan to Folder mode operations 10-25 [File Settings] - [Scan Setting] Select whether the data is divided into individual pages or multi-page data is created when multiple pages are scanned. [File Settings] - [PDF Encrypt] Specify the encryption settings when [PDF] or [Compact PDF] is selected. Item Description [Single Page] Select this setting to save the data divided into individual pages. [Multi Page] Select this setting to save the scan as multi-page data. Item Description [Encryption Level] [Yes] Select this setting to enable encryption. After selecting this setting, set the encryption level to [Low], [Middle] or [High]. [No] Select this setting to disable encryption. [Password] Type in the password required to open encrypted data. (up to 32 characters) [Document Permissions] Type in the password required to change the permissions for a document. (up to 32 characters)10-26 Performing Scan to Folder mode operations Specifying the document name Specify the document name for the scan data. [Details] If encryption has been enabled, detailed permission settings can be specified. "This appears only if [Encryption Level] is set to [Yes] and a password has been specified for [Document Permissions]. [Printing Allowed] Select whether to allow the data to be printed ([Allow]), to prohibit printing ([Restrict]), or to allow printing only at a low resolution ([Low Resolution]). [Changes Allowed] Select whether to allow or prohibit document editing, such as signing, entering text and annotating the data, and select the permission level if it is allowed. [Level 1]: Pages can be inserted, deleted and rotated. [Level 2]: Annotations can be created, data can be entered in form fields, and signatures can be added to existing signature fields. [Level 3]: All operations, except page extracting, can be performed. [Level 4]: Data can be entered in form fields, and signatures can be added to existing signature fields. [Level 5]: The page layout can be changed, data can be entered in form fields, and signatures can be added to existing signature fields. "Levels 1, 2, 3 and 5 appear only when [Encryption Level] is set to [Low]. Levels 1, 2, 3 and 4 appear when [Encryption Level] is set to [Middle] or [High]. [Enable Copying] Select whether to allow text and images in a document to be copied ([Allow]) or to prohibit it ([Restrict]). Item Description [File Name] Type in the document name for the scan data.Specifying destinations 10-27 Specifying communication settings The [Communication] parameters available from the [Settings] screen can be used to specify settings for sending job completion notifications by E-mail. [URL Notification] [URL Notification Destination] Specifying destinations Use any of the following methods to specify destinations. „ “Selecting from registered destinations” on page 10-27 „ “Directly typing in the address” on page 10-29 „ “Selecting from the log” on page 10-32 Selecting from registered destinations An address book destination or group destination can be selected from those previously registered on the machine. " In order to select a registered destination, address book destinations and group destinations must first be registered on the machine. For details, refer to “Registering destinations” on page 10-34. " In [User Settings] - [Machine Settings] - [Scan to Folder Default Tab], you can specify the default destination tab in the Scan to Folder mode screen. For details, refer to “[Machine Settings]” on page 3-13. Description Settings [ON] / [OFF] Specify whether or not notifications of completion of a job are to be sent by E-mail. Description Specify the E-mail address where notifications of completion of a job are to be sent.10-28 Specifying destinations Selecting from the Favorites list When destinations are registered, they can be specified as [Favorites]. As a default, the [Favorites] destination list appears when the initial Scan to Folder mode screen is displayed. Select a destination from the list. To specify multiple destinations for a broadcast transmission, specify all destinations where the data is to be sent. " The setting for the Favorites list can be specified for a destination when it is registered. For details, refer to “Registering an address book destination” on page 10-35. Selecting with an index search Destinations can be selected by searching for the index characters specified when each destination was registered. 1 In the initial Scan to Folder mode screen, press . 2 Press the desired index tab to search for destinations. – If the desired index tab is not displayed, press [ ] or [ ] until the desired tab appears. – To select a group destination, press [Group]. 3 Select the destination, and then press [OK]. – To specify multiple destinations, specify all destinations where the data is to be sent. Selecting by searching for a destination type or name Destinations can be selected by searching for their type or name. 1 In the initial Scan to Folder mode screen, press . 2 Press [Search]. 3 Select the method to search for destinations. – [Type]: Select the destination type (“FTP”, “SMB”, “WebDAV”, etc.). – [Name]: Directly enter the name of the destination to be searched for. Type in the name to be searched for, and then press [OK] to display a list of the search results. 4 Select the destination, and then press [OK]. – To specify multiple destinations, select all destinations where the data is to be sent. 5 Press [OK].Specifying destinations 10-29 Directly typing in the address To specify a destination that is not registered with the machine, directly type in the address. With [FTP] 1 In the initial Scan to Folder mode screen, press [Direct Input]. 2 Press [FTP]. 3 Specify settings for [Host Name], [File Path], [User Name] and [Password] for the destination computer. 4 If necessary, specify settings for other parameters in the [Details] screen. – [Pasv]: Select whether or not the PASV mode is used. – [Proxy]: Select whether or not a proxy server is used. – [Port No.]: Type in the port number. (Range: 1 to 65535) 5 Press [OK]. " To specify multiple destinations, specify the various settings, press [Next Dest.], and then specify the settings for the next FTP destination. " If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Manual Destination Input] is set to [Restrict], an address cannot be directly typed in. For details on [Manual Destination Input], refer to “[Security Settings]” on page 3-70. With [PC(SMB)] 1 In the initial Scan to Folder mode screen, press [Direct Input]. 2 Press [PC(SMB)]. 3 Specify settings for [Host Name], [File Path], [User Name] and [Password] for the destination computer. 4 If necessary, press [Browse], and then browse to a shared folder to specify it.10-30 Specifying destinations 5 Press [OK]. " To specify multiple destinations, specify the various settings, press [Next Dest.], and then specify the settings for the next SMB destination. " If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Manual Destination Input] is set to [Restrict], an address cannot be directly typed in. For details on [Manual Destination Input], refer to “[Security Settings]” on page 3-70. With [WebDAV] 1 In the initial Scan to Folder mode screen, press [Direct Input]. 2 Press [WebDAV]. 3 Specify settings for [Host Name], [File Path], [User Name] and [Password] for the destination computer. 4 If necessary, specify settings for other parameters in the [Details] screen. – [Port No.]: Type in the port number. (Range: 1 to 65535) – [Proxy]: Select whether or not a proxy server is used. – [SSL Setting]: Select whether or not SSL is used. 5 Press [OK]. " To specify multiple destinations, specify the various settings, press [Next Dest.], and then specify the settings for the next WebDAV destination. " If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Manual Destination Input] is set to [Restrict], an address cannot be directly typed in. For details on [Manual Destination Input], refer to “[Security Settings]” on page 3-70. With [USB Memory] 1 Plug the USB memory device into the USB HOST port. 2 In the initial Scan to Folder mode screen, press [Direct Input]. 3 Press [USB Memory]. " If a USB memory device has not already been plugged in, [USB Memory] is not available. 4 Specify a setting for [Document Name].Specifying destinations 10-31 5 Press [OK]. " If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Manual Destination Input] is set to [Restrict], an address cannot be directly typed in. For details on [Manual Destination Input], refer to “[Security Settings]” on page 3-70. " If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Restrict Scan to USB] is set to [Restrict], [USB Memory] is not available. For details on [Restrict Scan to USB], refer to “[Security Settings]” on page 3-70. " With a USB Memory transmission, only one destination can be specified. With [HDD] 1 In the initial Scan to Folder mode screen, press [Direct Input]. 2 Press [HDD]. 3 Press [Save Document]. 4 If user authentication settings have been specified, select [Public] or [Private]. 5 Specify a setting for [Document Name]. 6 Press [OK]. " If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Manual Destination Input] is set to [Restrict], an address cannot be directly typed in. For details on [Manual Destination Input], refer to “[Security Settings]” on page 3-70. " With an HDD transmission, only one destination can be specified. " Scan data saved on the hard disk can be saved to a computer by copying it with PageScope Web Connection. For details, refer to the [Reference Guide].10-32 Specifying destinations With [Web Service Settings] With a Web Service transmission, scan data can be sent to a previously registered network computer. Network computers where this machine is registered as a Web Service scanner appear as destinations. Select a destination. 1 In the initial Scan to Folder mode screen, press [Direct Input]. 2 Press [Web Service Settings]. 3 Select the destination. – If the desired destination is not displayed, press [Search], and then type in the destination name to be searched for. " If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Manual Destination Input] is set to [Restrict], an address cannot be directly typed in. For details on [Manual Destination Input], refer to “[Security Settings]” on page 3-70. " With a Web Service transmission, only one destination can be specified. " With WSD scanning on Windows Server 2008 R2/7/Vista/Server 2008, it may not be possible to specify a resolution or document size. Selecting from the log A destination can be selected from the log of the last five transmissions. 1 In the initial Scan to Folder mode screen, press [Log]. 2 Select the destination from the list, and then press the [Start] key. " Only one destination can be selected from the log. " The only destinations that appear in the log are those specified after pressing [Direct Input]. In addition, destinations specified with broadcast transmissions do not appear in the log. " When the machine is turned off, the log is cleared. " If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Disable Job History Display] is set to [ON], a destination cannot be selected from the log.Specifying destinations 10-33 Selecting a program destination Data can be sent with a program destination previously registered on the machine. Program destinations are registered with destinations where data is frequently sent together with scan settings allowing data to easily be sent without the trouble of specifying the various settings. " In order to select a program destination, the program destination must first be registered on the machine. For details, refer to “Registering a program destination” on page 10-37. 1 Press [Scan to Folder] to display the initial Scan to Folder mode screen. 2 Position the document to be scanned. – For details on loading the original document, refer to “Loading a Document” on page 4-36. 3 Press the [Mode Memory] key. 4 Select the desired program destination from the list, and then press [OK]. The settings and destination addresses are recalled. " Only one program destination can be selected. 5 Press the [Start] key. – Press the [Start (Color)] key to scan in color, or press the [Start (B&W)] key to scan in black and white.10-34 Registering destinations Registering destinations Destination registration By registering destinations where scan data is frequently sent, recipients can be recalled allowing a data to easily be sent. With this machine, address book destinations, group destinations and program destinations can be registered. Address Book The information for destinations (E-mail addresses and computer folders, etc.) where data is frequently sent can be registered. A destination can selected from the address book when scanning. A maximum of 2,000 address book destinations can be registered. E-mail and SMB address book destinations can be registered from the control panel of this machine or from PageScope Web Connection. For details on registering, refer to “Registering an address book destination” on page 10-35. Computer folder FTP and WebDAV destinations are registered only from PageScope Web Connection. For details, refer to the [Reference Guide]. Group Multiple address book destinations can be registered together as a group. This is useful when sending the same scan data to multiple destinations. A maximum of 100 group destinations (with a maximum of 500 address book destinations per group) can be registered. Group destinations are registered from PageScope Web Connection. For details on registering, refer to the [Reference Guide]. Program Destinations where scan data is frequently sent can be registered together with scan settings (scan settings, document settings, etc.). During scanning, a program destination can be recalled by pressing the [Mode Memory] key in the control panel. A maximum of 400 program destinations can be registered. For details on registering, refer to “Registering a program destination” on page 10-37.Registering destinations 10-35 Registering an address book destination The procedure for registering an address book destination for scan data is described below. E-mail address book destinations can be registered from the control panel of this machine or from PageScope Web Connection. The following procedure describes how to register from the control panel of this machine. " For details on registering from PageScope Web Connection, refer to the [Reference Guide]. " FTP, SMB, and WebDAV destinations can be registered only from the PageScope Web Connection. For details on registering from PageScope Web Connection, refer to the [Reference Guide]. " For details on specifying an address book destination to send scan data, refer to “Selecting from registered destinations” on page 10-27. " If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Registering and Changing Addr.] is set to [Restrict], a destination cannot be registered from the control panel. Registering an address book destination (E-mail transmission) 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Press [Address Registration]. 3 Press [E-mail]. 4 Press [New]. – To view the information registered for a destination, select the registered destination, and then press [Mode Check]. To delete the destination, press [Delete] in the [Mode Check] screen. 5 Enter the information for the destination, and then press [OK]. Item Description [Name] Type in the registration name for the address book destination. (up to 72 bytes) [E-mail address] Type in the E-mail address of the recipient. (up to 320 characters)10-36 Registering destinations 6 Press [OK]. Registering Address Book (SMB transmission) 1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key. 2 Press [Address Registration]. 3 Press [SMB]. 4 Press [New]. – To view the information registered for a destination, select the registered destination, and then press [Mode Check]. To delete the destination, press [Delete] in the [Mode Check] screen. 5 Enter the information for the destination, and then press [OK]. 6 Press [OK]. [Favorites] For frequently used destinations, set to [ON]. This displays the destination in the [Favorites] list, allowing it to be found more easily. [Index] Select the index characters that will be used to search for the destination. Item Description [Name] Type in the registration name for the address book destination. (up to 72 bytes) [Connection] Specify [Host Name], [File Path], [User Name] and [Password] for the destination computer. If necessary, use [Browse] to search for the shared folder. [Favorites] For frequently used destinations, set to [ON]. This displays the destination in the [Favorites] list, allowing it to be found more easily. [Index] Select the index characters that will be used to search for the destination.Registering destinations 10-37 Registering a program destination The procedure for registering a program destination for scan transmissions is described below. Program destinations can be registered from the control panel of this machine or from PageScope Web Connection. The following procedure describes how to register from the control panel of this machine. " For details on registering from PageScope Web Connection, refer to the [Reference Guide]. " For details on specifying a program destination to send scan data, refer to “Selecting a program destination” on page 10-33. 1 Press [Scan to E-mail] or [Scan to Folder] to display the initial Scan to E-mail or Scan to Folder mode screen. 2 Specify settings for the various parameters available from the [Settings] screen. – For details on the parameters available from the Settings screen, refer to “Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations” on page 10-3 and “Performing Scan to Folder mode operations” on page 10-18. 3 In the control panel, press the [Mode Memory] key. The list of program destinations appears. 4 Press [Register]. 5 Specify settings for [Name] and [Dest.] for the program destination, and then press [OK]. – Press to display the address book screen. Select a registered destination. 6 Press [OK].10-38 Registering destinations11 Replacing Consumables11-2 Replacing Consumables Replacing Consumables Note Failure to follow instructions as outlined in this manual could result in voiding your warranty. Note If the toner has run out or the time to replace the transfer belt unit has been reached, an error message appears. Refer to “Error messages” on page 13-39. When the time to replace the transfer belt unit has been reached, print a configuration page, and then check the status of the consumables. For details on printing the configuration page, refer to “Printing a configuration page” on page 13-2. About Toner Cartridges Your machine uses four toner cartridges: black, yellow, magenta, and cyan. Handle the toner cartridges carefully to avoid spilling toner inside the machine or on yourself. " When replacing the toner cartridges, install only new cartridges. If a used toner cartridge is installed, the amount of remaining toner may not appear correctly. " Do not open the toner cartridge unnecessarily. If toner is spilled, avoid inhaling it or allowing it to come in contact with your skin. " If toner gets on your hands or clothes, immediately wash them with soap and water. " If toner was inhaled, move to an area with fresh air, and gargle thoroughly with a large quantity of water. If conditions such as coughing appear, seek professional medical attention. " If toner gets in your eyes, immediately flush them with water for at least 15 minutes. If any irritation persists, seek professional medical attention. " If toner gets in your mouth, thoroughly rinse it, and then drink 1 to 2 cups of water. If necessary, seek professional medical attention. " Store toner cartridges out of the reach of children.Replacing Consumables 11-3 " Refer to the following URL for recycling information. US: http://kmbs.konicaminolta.us/content/environment/cleanplanetmcpp.html Europe: http://cleanplanet.konicaminolta.eu/ Other regions: konicaminolta.com Note The use of non-genuine toner cartridges may result in unstable performance. In addition, any damage caused by the use of non-genuine toner cartridges is not covered by the warranty, even if it occurs during the warranty period. (Although damage is not certain to result from using non-genuine toner cartridges, we strongly recommend that you use genuine toner cartridges.) Keep toner cartridges: „ In their packaging until you’re ready to install them. „ In a cool, dry location away from sunlight (due to heat). The maximum storage temperature is 35°C (95°F) and the maximum storage humidity is 85% (noncondensing). If the toner cartridge is moved from a cold place to a warm, humid place, condensation may occur, degrading print quality. Allow the toner to adapt to the environment for about one hour before use. „ Level during handling and storage. Do not turn cartridges upside down; the toner inside the cartridges may become caked or unequally distributed. „ Away from salty air and corrosive gases such as aerosols.11-4 Replacing Consumables Replacing a Toner Cartridge Note Be careful not to spill toner while replacing a toner cartridge. If toner spills, immediately wipe it off with a soft, dry cloth. When the toner is empty, the message [Replace Toner (x)] appears in the touch panel. Follow the instructions below to replace the toner cartridge. As an example, the procedure for replacing the yellow toner cartridge is described below. 1 Open the machine’s front cover.Replacing Consumables 11-5 2 Pull the front lever of the color toner cartridge indicated to the left. The replacement procedure for the toner cartridge is the same for all colors (yellow: Y, magenta: M, cyan: C, and black: K). The following instructions show the procedure to replace the toner cartridge (Y). 3 Grab the handle of the toner cartridge to be replaced, and then pull out the cartridge. The following instructions show the procedure to replace the toner cartridge(Y). Note Dispose of the used toner cartridge according to your local regulations. Do not burn the toner cartridge. For details, refer to “About Toner Cartridges” on page 11-2. 4 Check the color of the new toner cartridge to be installed. Y M C K11-6 Replacing Consumables 5 Remove the toner cartridge from the bag. 6 Shake the cartridge to distribute the toner. 7 Peel off the protective film from the right side of the toner cartridge. 3 ×Replacing Consumables 11-7 8 Make sure that the toner cartridge is the same color as the machine compartment, and then insert the toner cartridge into the machine. " Fully insert the toner cartridge. 9 Pull the lever to the right to lock it in place. " The front lever should be securely returned to its original position; otherwise, the front cover of the machine cannot be closed. " If it is difficult to operate the lever, push it in. 10 Make sure that the toner cartridge is securely installed, and then peel off the protective film.11-8 Replacing Consumables 11 Close the front cover. " When closing the front cover, press the area of the cover with small projections.Replacing Consumables 11-9 Replacing a Imaging Unit Note Do not touch the OPC drum surface. This could lower image quality. If the messages [Replace Imaging Unit] appear, replace the specified imaging unit. As an example, the procedure for replacing the black imaging unit is described below. 1 Check the message window to see which color imaging unit needs replacing.11-10 Replacing Consumables 2 Open the machine’s front cover. 3 Pull the front lever of the color toner cartridge indicated to the left. The replacement procedure for the imaging unit is the same for all colors (yellow: Y, magenta: M, cyan: C, and black: K). The following instructions show the procedure to replace the toner cartridge (K). Y M C KReplacing Consumables 11-11 4 Grab the handle of the toner cartridge to be removed, and then pull out the cartridge. " Do not tilt removed toner cartridge, otherwise toner may spill. 5 Pull up the waste toner bottle to unlock it. 6 Grab the left and right handles of the waste toner bottle, and then slowly pull out the bottle. " Do not tilt removed waste toner box, otherwise waste toner may spill.11-12 Replacing Consumables 7 While pressing down the area marked “Push” on the imaging unit to be replaced, slide the unit completely out of the machine. The following instructions show the procedure to replace the imaging unit (K). Note Dispose of the used imaging unit according to your local regulations. Do not burn the imaging unit. 8 Check the color of the new imaging unit to be installed. " In order to prevent toner from spilling, leave the imaging unit in the bag until step 7 is being performed. 9 Remove the imaging unit from the bag.Replacing Consumables 11-13 10 Hold the imaging unit with both hands, and then shake it twice as shown in the illustration. " Do not grab the bottom of the bag; otherwise, the imaging unit may be damaged, resulting in decreased print quality. 11 Remove the protective cover from the imaging unit. Remove all packing tape from the imaging unit11-14 Replacing Consumables 12 Remove the paper from the imaging unit. Remove the protective cover from the imaging unit. 13 Make sure that the new imaging unit to be installed is the same color as the machine compartment, and then install the imaging unit in the machine. 14 Press in on the waste toner bottle until it locks into place.Replacing Consumables 11-15 15 Make sure that the toner cartridge is the same color as the machine compartment, and then insert the toner cartridge into the machine. " Fully insert the toner cartridge. 16 Pull the lever to the right to lock it in place. " The front lever should be securely returned to its original position; otherwise, the front cover of the machine cannot be closed. " If it is difficult to operate the lever, push it in.11-16 Replacing Consumables 17 Close the front cover. " When closing the front cover, press the area of the cover with small projections.Replacing Consumables 11-17 Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle When the waste toner bottle becomes full, the message [Waste Toner Box Full] appears in the message window. The machine stops and will not start again until the waste toner bottle is replaced. 1 Open the machine’s front cover. 2 Pull up the waste toner bottle to unlock it.11-18 Replacing Consumables 3 Grab the left and right handles of the waste toner bottle, and then slowly pull out the bottle. " Do not tilt removed waste toner box, otherwise waste toner may spill. 4 Remove the new waste toner bottle from its packaging. Insert the used waste toner bottle into the plastic bag included in the box, and then box it up. Note Dispose of the used waste toner bottle according to your local regulations. Do not burn the waste toner bott